,yC-NRLF 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/companytrainingiOOstacrich 


COMPANY  TRAINING 

{Infantry) 


By 

CAPTAIN  CROMWELL  STACEY 

U.  S.  Infantry 
Inspector^Instructor 


Franklin  Hudson  Publishing  Co. 
kansas  city,  mo. 


Ufi^. 


Copyrighted  1916  by 
Franklin  Hudson  Publishing  Co. 


INDEX. 

PAGE. 

Administration,  Company 7 

Arms,  Care  of  Arms  and  Equipment 12,  105-108 

Attack,  The 140 

Battle,  Training  for 163 

Bayonet  Training 70-95 

Books,  Reference 14 

Boxes,  Regulation  Marking,  etc 36,  37,  38 

Camps 112 

Cooks  and  Kitchens 114,  161 

Combat  Patrols 137,  139,  144,  152 

Drill,  Company 61-69 

Drill,  Recruit 48-54 

Drill,  Squad 54-60 

Drill  Schedules 45-46,  94 

Deployment 64,  148,  loO,  164 

Defense,  The;  Intrenchments,  etc 147,  152-157 

Equipment  A,  B,  and  C 19 

Equipment,  Field  Kit,  etc ; 16 

Enlisted  Strength  Required 18 

Feet  and  Shoes 38,  113 

Field  Ranges,  Packing,  etc 26,  27,  29,  36 

Organization,  Company 18-21 

Property,  Care  of;  Boards  of  Survey,  etc 96,  101 

Lectures. 

Camps 112 

Outposts  and  Camp  Guards 117 

Marches  and  Advance  Guards 121 

Reconnaissance  and  Patrolling : 128 

Contact  and  Deployment  for  Action 137 

The  Attack 140 

The  Defense 147 

Intrenching  and  Intrenchments 152 

Defense  of  Houses  and  Localities 158 

Training  for  Battle ^ 163 

Instruction  Cards 5,  120,  135 

Plate  s-howing  Field  Belt,  Equipment,  etc 42 


355536 


PREFACE. 


The  man  who  comes  forward  in  time  of  war  to  serve  his  comitry 
shows  that  he  is  courageous,  patriotic,  and  sincere. 

But  the  man  who  studies,  drills,  and  prepares  himself  in  time 
of  peace  so  that  he  can  serve  his  country  in  time  of  war  shows  that 
he  possesses  the  above  quahties  and  more;  it  shows  that  his  patriot- 
ipm  is  practical  and  sincere;  it  shows  that  his  bravery  is  real,  and 
not  mere  hysteria  or  transient  enthusiasm;  it  shows  that  he  has  red 
blood  in  his  veins,  and  is  wiUing  to  make  sacrifices  for  an  ideal. 
Of  such  stuff  true  soldiers  are  made. 

It  frequently  takes  more  courage  to  train  for  war  in  time  of 
peace  than  it  does  to  enlist  when  the  whole  country  is  ablaze  with 
martial  hysteria. 

May  the  people  of  the  United  States  accord  to  the  men  who 
serve  in  the  National  Guard  the  support  which  they  have  a  right  to 
expect  and  in  fact  demand  for  the  self-sacrificing  devotSon  which 
prompts  them  to  give  up  their  time  and  money  that  they  may  be 
able  to  serve  their  country  usefully  when  it  needs  them.  To  these 
men  this  Uttle  book  is  dedicated. 

Cromwell  Stagey, 
Captain  U.S.  Infantry,  Inspedor-Instmctor. 


INTRODUCTION. 


In  my  aasociation  with  the  oflBcera  of  the  National  Guard  of 
several  States,  extending  over  a  period  of  about  eight  years,  it  has 
been  my  good  fortune  to  have  made  many  warm  friends  among 
them.  I  have  assisted  them  whenever  possible,  and,  as  a  reward, 
have  secured  their  confidence.  I  know  the  trials  and  tribulations 
of  the  National  Guard  captains  as  well  as  if  I  had  been  one  myself, 
and  in  consequence  fully  appreciate  the  terrible  handicaps  and  dis- 
advantages under  which  they  strive  to  train  their  companies  so  that 
they  may  be  able  to  take  their  place  on  the  firing-line  when  the 
awful  test  of  war  shall  come  with  credit  to  themselves,  their  com- 
panies, and  the  Nation. 

I  fully  appreciate  the  self-sacrificing  patriotic  devotion  which 
inspires  these  men  in  their  work—generally  without  help  or  appre- 
ciation from  the  people  they  strive  to  serve,  at  great  personal  and 
financial  sacrifices,  which  are  not  dreamed  of  or  appreciated  by  the 
people  among  whom  they  live  and  work. 

It  is  at  the  request  of  these  fi lends  of  mine  in  the  Guard  that 
this  little  book  has  been  written,  with  the  hope  that  it  may  further 
assist  them  in  their  great  work,  and  also  with  the  hope  that  it  may 
prove  of  help  and  benefit  to  other  friends  and  comrades  in  the  Guard 
whom  as  yet  I  have  not  had  the  pleasure  to  meet. 

I  claim  nothing  new.  The  training  and  handling  of  mihtary 
men  is  a  science  as  old  as  the  world  itself,  and  I  believe  that  training 
will  be  necessary  so  long  as  human  nature  remains  as  it  is  to-day , 
and  I  see  no  immediate  prospect  of  change. 

In  my  military  career  of  twenty-four  years  I  have  received  un- 
limited help  from  older  and  more  experienced  officers,  and  in  writing 
this  little  book  I  am  doing  only  what  all  good  soldiers  have  done 
from  time  immemorial — that  is,  to  help  their  younger  brothers. 

In  conclusion,  I  wish  to  add  one  word  more.  1  have  foimd  the 
methods  outlined  herein  good  in  training  regulars  and  National 
Guardsmen.  Many  wiU  not  heed  this  Uttle  book,  and  in  regard  to 
the  others,  I  hope  it  will  help  them  to  prepare  our  country  for  war, 
which  will  surely  come.     May  we  be  ready. 

Cromwell  Stacey, 
Captain  U.  S.  Infantry,  Inspector-Instructor. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


RULES  OF  THE  GAME. 

For  Enlisted  Men  of  the  National  Guard. 

1.  The  fiist  duty  of  a  soldier  if-  loyai,  unhesitating  obedience. 
Without  this  quality  an  army  is  no  better  than  a  mob.  The  value 
of  an  organization  Uea  in  the  fact  that  a  thousand  men  submit  their 
wills  to  one  man  and  are  moved  as  one  man.  One  hundred  dis- 
ciphned  men  are  always  superior  to  a  thousand  undisciplined  men . 

2.  Respect  your  officers.  Your  Hves  are  in  their  hands  in 
action  and  they  know  more  of  tjie  game  than  you  do.  They  fre- 
quently know  what  cards  the  other  fellow  has,  which  you  do  not,  so 
you  cannot  tell  what  cards  should  be  played.  It  may  be  necessary 
that  you  be  sacrificed  in  order  that  the  fight  may  be  won.  Don't  be 
a  quitter;  play  the  game.  Remember,  in  war  you  are  only  part  of 
a  machine,  one  checker  on  the  board.  It  may  be  necessary  to  lose 
you  in  order  to  win  the  game. 

3.  Show  respect  to  your  officers  at  aU  times.  If  you  do  not 
respect  them  in  time  of  peace,  you  will  not  obey  them  in  time  of  war, 
and  that  means  death  and  disaster.  War  is  not  a  lady-like  game. 
It  is  team-woik  that  counts.     We  want  the  team  to  win. 

4.  Never  fail  to  salute  your  officers  at  all  times  and  in  all 
places.  Never  fail  to  stand  to  attention  when  they  speak  to  you 
or  you  speak  to  them.  Remember,  that  is  part  of  the  game.  Play  it 
like  a  man,  and  not  like  a  dub.  Remember,  strangers  judge  you  by 
these  signs.  Get  the  reputation  of  being  a  fine  military  organization, 
and  not  that  of  a  uniformed  mob. 

5.  Wheu  in  ranks,  stand  still;  keep  your  head  and  eyes  straight 
to  the  front;  don't  fix  your  hat  or  raise  your  hands.  Those  things 
are  the  earmarks  of  a  recruit,  and  trained  soldiers  notice  them 
instantly.     It  is  part  of  the  game.     Play  it  right. 

6.  Get  the  habit  of  watching  your  officers  and  non-commis- 
sioned officers  for  orders.  A  mistake  or  misunderstanding  of  orders 
in  action  means  defeat  and  ruin.  If  you  don't  develop  these  quali- 
ties in  time  of  peace,  you  won't  do  it  on  the  battle-field.  Remember, 
an  untrained  man  on  the  battle-field  stands  about  as  much  chance 


6  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

as  a  dub  in  a  poker-game.     You  can't  bluff  it  through  with  old 
hands;   it  will  come  to  a  show-down. 

7.  Remember,  you  sat  in  on  this  game  of  your  own  free  will 
and  accord.  Play  it  right.  Don't  be  a  quitter.  Put  the  same 
spirit  into  unpleasant  duties  that  you  will  into  pleasant  ones.  War 
is  not  a  pleasant  game  or  one  for  ladies.  It  takes  strong  men  to 
play  it  right.  Most  of  your  duties  are  not  always  pleasant,  but  they 
are  necessary  just  the  same.  A  nation  that  has  difficulty  in  getting 
strong  men  for  soldiers  is  a  decadent  one  and  does  not  deserve  liberty 
or  self-government. 

8.  Remember,  the  defense  of  your  State  and  Nation  is  in  your 
hands;  it  is  the  work  of  strong  men  with  red  blood  in  their  veins. 
Be  careful  to  do  everything  to  raise  the  reputation  of  your  organiza- 
tion, and  nothing  that  will  injure  it.  It  k  an  honor  to  wear  the 
uniform  of  a  soldier  of  the  United  States. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


CHAPTER  I. 
COMPANY  ADMINISTRATION. 

Moat  National  Guard  companies  have  great  difficulty  in  keeping 
their  records  up  to  date;  this  is  usually  due  to  two  causes:  one,  lack 
of  system,  and  the  other,  carelessness.  Most  officers  and  men  have 
the  time  if  they  go  at  the  work  systematically. 

The  first  thing  that  you  must  do  is  to  organize  your  company 
office  properly;  in  order  to  do  this  you  must  have  an  orderly-room, 
as  the  captain's  office  in  the  regular  service  is  called;  this  must  be  a 
room  to  which  enlisted  men  have  access  only  when  they  are  sent  for 
or  wish  to  see  the  captain  or  first  sergeant  on  business.  The  fre- 
quent practice  of  having  the  orderly-roc- m  in  the  company-room 
(enlisted  men's  room)  or  in  the  store-room  is  bad.  The  captain  and 
the  clerks  cannot  keep  their  records  properly  or  do  their  work 
without  annoyance  or  interference  from  the  men  of  the  company. 
Work  under  these  conditions  is  impossible. 

Having  seemed  a  room  where  you  can  work  in  peace  and  quiet, 
the  next  thing  to  do  is  to  secure  places,  at  which  the  office  force  can 
work.  Expensive  desks  are  not  ne)3es3ary.  A  good  solid  pine  table 
with  plain  pine  pigeon-holes,  blotters,  inkstands,  pens,  and  paper 
is  all  that  is  necessary.  There  should  also  be  boxes  in  which  the 
company  retained  papers  can  be  systematically  kept.  There  should 
be  a  table  for  the  captain,  one  for  each  of  his  lieutenant»s,  one  for  the 
first  sergeant,  and  one  for  the  company  clerk.  Each  should  have 
its  set  of  pigeon-holes  properly  marked  to  show  the  purpose  for  which 
used;  these  pigeon-holes  should  be  marked  as  follows:  Finished 
Business,  Unfinished  Business,  Miscellaneous,  From  the  Adjutant 
General,  To  the  Adjutant  General,  To  Be  Filed,  etc.  After  you  get 
your  office  organized,  many  other  headings  will  suggest  themselves 
to  you.  The  captain  should  have  at  least  twelve  pigeon-holes  to 
his  desk,  and  the  first  sergeant  and  company  clerk  an  equal  number; 
the  lieutenants  should  have  at  least  six,  and  ten  would  be  better. 
No  man  can  do  his  work  properly  or  take  interest  in  his  work  un- 
less he  has  a  nice,  clean,  orderly  place  in  which  to  work. 


8  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

It  is  essential  that  lieutenants  have  a  place  to  do  their  clerical 
work.  The  average  lieutenant  in  the  Guard  seems  to  think  that 
he  has  done  his  whole  duty  when  he  is  present  at  drill.  It  never 
occurs  to  him,  and  rarely  to  his  captain,  that  he  should  take  an  act- 
ive interest  in  the  workings  of  the  company  and  be  familiar  with  all 
the  correspondence  and  interior  workings  of  the  company.  Keep 
your  lieutenants  in  touch  with  all  the  work,  so  that  if  you  are 
absent  or  sick,  they  will  be  able  to  take  charge  immediately  and 
cany  on  the  work  or  answer  any  correspondence  that  comes  in.  An 
efficient  company  of  infantry  should  be  so  organized  that  any  man, 
from  the  captain  down  to  the  cook,  can  drop  out  and  not  dif  organize 
the  outfit.  If  your  company  is  not  run  in  this  manner,  it  is  not 
efficient.  Make  your  lieutenants  work.  Give  them  important 
things  to  do,  and  see  that  they  do  them.  Make  your  first  seigeant 
and  your  company  clerk  do  their  proper  share  of  keeping  the  records. 
Have  it  clearly  understood  just  what  each  officer  and  man  is  to  do, 
and  see  that  they  do  them.  Remember,  the  captain\<<  ]ob  is  to  su- 
pervise the  entire  company,  and  not  to  devote  his  entire  time  to  any 
one  class  of  work.  I  can  hear  you  say,  "But  they  don't  know  the 
work."  Good.  Will  they  ever  learn  unless  you  teach  them  and 
require  them  to  do  it?  You  must  teach  them;  it  is  part  of  your  job, 
and  will  well  repay  you  in  the  end. 

The  Ueutenants,  first  sergeant,  and  company  clerk  should  be 
required  to  be  at  the  armory  an  hour  before  drill;  this  will  give  them 
ample  time  in  which  to  clear  up  all  paper  work  and  keep  things 
in  shape. 

"Now,  how  will  I  use  my  Ueutenants?"  I  hear  you  say.  Let 
us  see.  A  letter  comes  from  the  adjutant  general  wanting  to  know 
the  condition  of  your  tentage.  Turn  it  over  to  the  first  heutenant; 
tell  him  what  you  want  him  to  do  and  when  you  want  a  report  from 
him.  Make  a  note  on  your  memorandum  calendar  (every  captain 
and  firat  sergeant  should  have  one  on  his  desk),  and  when  the  day 
for  the  report  arrives  and  you  turn  the  leaf  it  will  automatically 
remind  you  of  the  fact.  Ask  the  lieutenant  for  his  report.  Require 
the  second  Heutenant  to  assist  you  in  the  same  manner. 

Taking  care  of  the  company  and  its  records  is  a  big  job  for  one 
man,  but  five  men  can  do  it  easily  if  each  man  does  his  share. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  9 

You,  of  course,  must  have  files  for  orders,  letters,  reports,  etc., 
and  they  must  be  kept  up  to  date. 

Pay  particular  attention  to  your  descriptive  lists,  muster-  and 
pay-rolls,  and  see  that  men  are  discharged  promptly  when  their 
discharge  is  due.  I  have  known  men  who  belonged  to  the  Guard 
who  did  not  receive  a  discharge  for  seven  or  eight  months  after  their 
time  had  expired;  some  never  received  a  discharge  at  all.  You 
can't  have  discipline  under  these  conditions.  If  you  are  not  careful 
about  enUstment  papers  and  discharges,  your  men  will  not  take 
their  service  in  the  Guard  seriously,  and  any  kind  of  discipline 
whatever  will  be  impossible.  You  must  be  on  the  job  every  minute 
yourself,  and  if  you  are,  others  will  be  also;  if  you  are  not,  others 
will  soon  find  it  out  and  they  will  slack  up,  and  your  company  will 
soon  be  ruined. 

In  keeping  the  records  of  individual  men,  I  have  found  that  the 
very  best  system  is  to  have  a  linen  envelope,  in  which  is  placed  every 
order  or  record  that  in  any  way  pertains  to  the  man.  When  you 
want  to  find  out  something  about  Brown,  all  you  have  to  do  is  to 
get  his  envelope  and  his  entire  military  record  should  be  there- 
target  reports,  dehnquency  court  records,  enUstment  paper,  special 
orders  that  relate  to  him,  etc.  I  have  used  this  system  for  many 
years  and  it  is  entirely  satisfactory  in  every  respect. 
Discipline. 

I  have  heard  many  National  Guard  officers  say:  "Thi^  is  not 
the  Regular  Army  and  we  can't  have  the  same  discipline."  True, 
but  you  can  try.  The  nearer  you  approach  to  the  Regular  Army 
standard  the  better  organization  you  will  have  and  the  more  eflicient 
your  company  will  be.  It  is  possible  to  have  excellent  discipline 
in  the  National  Guard— keep  that  always  in  mind.  If  you  beUeve 
that  discipline  is  not  possible,  you  will  never  have  it;  you  are  half 
defeated  already.  If  you  do  not  believe  it  is  possible,  you  will  not 
strive  for  it  and  will  in  consequence  never  attain  it.  Now,  how  will 
you  attain  discipUne?  You  will  achieve  it  by  insisting  on  all  those 
little  courtesies  that  are  prescribed  in  regulations  (saluting,  etc.), 
and  by  insisting  on  orders  being  obeyed  promptly,  and  by  requiring 
smartness  and  precision  in  close-order  drill. 

Your  men  must  be  present  for  drill  promptly  in  proper  uniform; 


10    ,  COMPANY  TRAINING  (iNFANTRT). 

they  muat  obey  all  company  ordera  and  regulations,  and  must  keep 
their  lockers  and  equipments  clean  and  neat.  You  must  insist  upon 
these  apparently  small  things  continually.  This  is  the  way  you  get 
order,  organization,  and  discipline. 

Your  men  must  always  be  respectful  to  you  and  to  all  other 
officers.  They  must  salute  you,  stand  to  attention  in  your  presence, 
and  never  enter  the  orderly-room  without  knocking  and  first  re- 
ceiving the  word  to  come  in.  These  things  will  be  continually 
sUghted — ^usually  from  ignorance  or  carelessness — and  you  must 
continually  insist  upon  their  observance.  Now,  I  don't  mean  that 
you  must  nag  the  men,  but  you  must  call  a  man's  attention  to  these 
things  and  require  that  he  observe  them;  do  this  kindly  and  firmly, 
and  avoid  patronizing  the  men,  as  this  irritates  them  more  than 
anything  else.  And,  whatever  you  do,  don't  explain  and  be  apolo- 
getic; they  will  lose  respect  for  you  if  you  do;  simply  say  that  the 
regulations  prescribe  it,  it  is  a  part  of  the  game,  and  that  you  will 
require  it. 

After  a  man  receives  an  order,  see  that  he  salute^  and  makes  a 
correct  about  face  when  he  leaves  you. 

When  an  enUsted  man  speaks  to  you,  require  him  to  stand 
about  four  feet  from  you.  It  is  also  customarj^  for  enlisted  men  to 
get  the  first  sergeant's  permission  before  they  speak  to  the  captain, 
except,  of  course,  at  drill  or  other  emergency. 

Military  discipline  is  logical,  intelHgent  control;  good  discipline 
is  never  despotic,  unreasonable,  or  arbitrary.  Don't  try  to  enforce 
discipline  in  your  company  by  bluff;  it  won't  work.  Be  careful  to 
explain  to  your  men  clearly  what  you  want,  and  then  see  that  they 
do  it. 

Very  few  men  deliberately  disobey  an  order.  Mistakes  that 
are  made  are  usually  the  result  of  poorly-given  orders.  One  of  the 
hardest  things  in  this  world  to  do  is  to  give  an  order  that  cannot  be 
misunderstood  or  is  fool-proof. 

Never  coddle  your  men  or  patronize  them. 

Be  on  good  terms  with  your  men,  but  never  get  familiar  with 
them  or  permit  any  familiarity  on  their  part.  You  can  always  stop 
famiharity  by  a  brief  answer  or  by  a  dignified  manner,  and  this 
without  getting  the  reputation  of  being  a  snob  or  stuck  up. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  11 

Be  very  particular  about  your  personal  appearance,  and  always 
have  your  uniform  neat  and  clean  and  wear  it  in  a  military  manner. 
Keep  your  shoes  and  leggings  poHshed.  Men  Uke  to  take  pride  in 
their  officers,  and  your  appearance  helps  discipline  more  than  you 
realize. 

Never  neglect  to  return  the  salutes  of  enlisted  men  in  a  military 
manner,  and  require  your  lieutenants  to  do  the  same  thing.  Nothing 
will  undermine  discipline  quicker  or  more  surely  than  to  have 
officers  over  men  who  return  salutes  in  a  slouchy  or  indifferent 
manner  or  more  frequently  do  not  return  the  salute  at  all.  In  a 
very  short  time  men  will  cease  to  salute  such  officers. 

Never  fail  to  see  that  they  use  the  word  ''sir"  when  speaking 
to  you,  and  see  that  they  stand  to  attention  in  your  presence. 
These  things  are  very  necessary  for  discipline. 

I  do  not  beheve  that  it  is  necessary  or  desirable  to  insist  upon 
the  salute  when  outside  of  the  armory  unless  you  are  both  in  uniform, 
but  when  you  enter  the  armory  door,  whether  in  civiUan  clothing 
or  not,  you  are  soldiers,  and  military  courtesy  must  be  observed. 

Insist  upon  steadiness  in  ranks;  make  the  men  keep  their  hands 
down  and  stand  still.  You  can't  have  discipline  without  enforcing 
these  small  but  very  important  things.  If  a  man  raises  his  hands 
in  ranks,  call  him  by  name  and  correct  him  briefly;  don't  bluster 
or  bawl  him  out;  this  method  will  bring  about  the  desired  result 
about  as  quickly  as  anything  that  I  know  of. 

Take  care  of  every  small  thing  that  comes  up;  let  the  men  * 
know  that  it  has  been  noticed,  and  you  will  never  have  any  big 
things  to  handle. 

Good  discipHne  is  the  result  of  moral  control,  and  not  brute 
force.  , 

Uniform. 

Insist  upon  your  men  being  in  proper  uniform,  with  their  hats 
straight  on  their  heads,  blouses  buttoned,  collars  hooked;  or,  if  in 
shirts,  require  them  to  have  the  sleeves  turned  down  and  buttoned 
at  the  ^^Tists,  and  see  that  every  button  is  in  place  and  used  for  the 
purpose  for  which  designed. 

Many  Guardsmen  believe  that  the  tougher  they  look  the  more 
they  look  like  soldiers;  this  is  not  true,  and  should  not  be  tolerated 


12  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

for  a  moment.  The  well-trained  soldier  is  always  neat,  clean,  and 
is  a  self-respecting  gentleman;  the  man  who  conducts  himself  in 
any  other  manner  shows  exactly  what  he  is — a  recruit,  without  dis- 
cipHne,  training,  or  pride. 

Arms. 

The  well-trained  soldier  looks  upon  his  rifle  as  his  best  friend 
and  always  takes  the  best  care  of  it  at  all  times.  I  have  always  be- 
lieved that  each  man  should  be  required  to  clean  and  care  for  his 
own  rifle.  The  practice  of  having  the  armorer  clean  rifles  is  perni- 
cious and  tends  to  reUeve  the  individual  soldier  of  responsibility. 
It  may  be  difficult  to  enforce  this  at  first,  but  insist  upon  it,  and  in 
time  you  will  attain  this  very  desirable  result.  I  have  handled 
many  rifles  that  were  so  dirty  and  badly  looked  after  that  it  was 
necessary  to  wash  your  hands  afterwards;  this  is  absolutely  wrong. 

Belts  should  be  scrubbed  with  H.  &  H.  soap  or  other  soap 
issued  for  the  purpose,  and  kept  clean  and  free  from  dirt  and  grease. 

Gun-slings  should  be  treated  in  a  similar  manner.  The  average 
gun-sling  is  filthy. 

Scrub  your  bayonet  scabbards  also. 

But  don't  use  any  soap  except  that  issued  for  the  purpose. 

Shelter  tent  halves  should  never  be  scrubbed  with  soap;  it  in- 
jures the  fiber  and  will  cause  them  to  leak.  If  muddy  or  soiled, 
rinse  them  off  with  clean  cold  water. 

Rifles  should  be  kept  locked  in  the  racks  while  not  in  use,  and 
there  should  always  be  a  responsible  non-commissioned  officer 
present  when  they  are  taken  from  the  racks,  to  see  that  the  men  get 
their  own  rifles.  Watch  this  carefully.  Nothing  discourages  a 
man  Uke  having  his  rifle  clean  and  in  good  shape  and  then  to  have 
someone  else  take  it  out  and  use  it  for  target  practice  or  drill.  If 
this  is  permitted,  the  company  commander  is  responsible  and  is 
inefficient. 

Non-commissioned  Officers. 

Don't  expect  to  find  them  already  trained.  You  must  appoint 
any  suitable  intelligent  man  and  then  train  him  in  his  duties;  in  order 
to  be  able  to  do  this  you  must  know  his  work  better  than  you  expect 
him  to  know  it.  Remember,  the  efficient  company  commander 
knows  every  man's  job  in  the  company  better  than  he  knows  it 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  13 

himself.  Don't  fool  with  incompetents  for  a  moment;  this  game 
is  too  serious.  Allow  no  personal  like  or  feeling  to  influence  you 
in  the  appointment  or  reduction  of  non-commissioned  officers; 
there  should  be  only  one  thing  that  should  be  considered — the 
efficiency  of  the  company  as  a  whole.  Let  this  be  your  guide,  and 
you  will  make  few  mistakes. 

Enforcement  of  Discipline. 

Company  commanders  may  say :  ' '  Those  suggestions  are  good , 
but  how  am  I  to  enforce  them?"  This  question  will  have  to  be 
answered  by  every  company  commander  himself.  It  will  depend 
upon  the  personality  of  the  man,  the  standard  of  discipUne  in  his 
company  and  in  the  Guard  of  the  State  to  which  the  company  be- 
longs. No  hard-and-fast  rule  can  be  laid  down.  I  beHeve  that  the 
best  way,  and  one  that  admits  of  general  apphcation,  is  to  appeal 
to  the  soldiers'  pride  and  better  nature.  Show  the  man  the  ne- 
cessity for  the  measures  which  you  wish  to  enforce  and  impress 
upon  him  the  seriousness  of  the  work  in  which  he  is  engaged — I 
mean  that  of  preparing  himself  so  that  he  can  defend  his  country 
in  time  of  war.  This  appeal  will  usually  go  home  and  bring  results. 
If  this  method  fails,  you  will  have  to  use  more  drastic  methods. 

I  know  of  a  company  commander  who  required  men  who  were 
late  for  drill  to  work  in  the  store-room  cleaning  rifles  or  other  nec- 
essary but  unpleasant  work  as  a  punishment  for  being  late.  He 
would  not  allow  these  men  to  drill  at  all  that  evening.  This  method 
is  good.  Try  it.  If,  as  a  result  of  this,  the  man  went  absent  from 
the  next  drill,  he  preferred  charges  against  him  and  tried  him  by 
the  delinquency  court  and  had  him  fined.  As  a  general  principle, 
I  don't  beUeve  in  resorting  to  the  dehnquency  court  unless  all  other 
methods  fail,  and  then  I  beHeve  in  working  it  to  the  limit.  How- 
ever, don't  attempt  it  unless  you  have  a  good  State  law  and  can 
make  it  stick.  I  can  tell  you  from  experience  that  it  will  not  hurt 
your  company  in  any  way  and  will  have  no  effect  whatever  on  en- 
listments of  the  kind  you  want.  If  it  scares  off  the  others,  so 
much  the  better.  I  have  seen  it  tried  out  thoroughly  and  compre- 
hensively and  it  has  always  produced  good  results — provided,  of 
course,  that  you  have  a  good  State  law;  if  your  State  law  is  not 
good,  don't  attempt  it,  as  it  will  do  more  harm  than  good. 


14  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

General  Remarks. 

Moat  men  make  mistakes  through  lack  of  proper  training  and 
clear  instruction;  if  this  is  the  case,  it  is  your  fault  or  the  fault  of 
your  predecessor.  Correct  it.  A  very  good  method  of  imparting 
instruction  and  making  men  famiUar  with  orders  and  regulations  is 
to  have  what  you  want  them  to  know  printed  on  little  cards  that 
can  be  carried  in  the  pocket.  Men  will  read  these  cards  during 
leisure  moments  and  will  thus  absorb  much  valuable  information. 

In  this  book  in  connection  with  the  lectures  you  will  find  cards 
which  contain  a  sentinel's  outpost  orders  and  instructions  for  pa- 
trols. Have  similar  cards  printed  and  issue  one  to  every  man  in 
the  company. 

The  card  on  "Rules  of  the  Game"  ia  especially  recommended, 
as  it  produced  most  excellent  results. 

You  can  in  this  manner  place  any  subject  before  your  men 
and  feel  assured  that  they  will  absorb  it.  Make  your  cards  brief 
and  very  clear,  and  you  will  always  attain  the  desired  object. 

The  lectures  can  be  taken  up  in  non-commissioned  officers' 
school,  read  and  discussed,  and  excellent  results  wrU  follow.  You 
should  have  a  blackboard  with  colored  chalks  to  illustrate  them; 
this  board  is  also  useful  to  draw  diagrams  of  movements  in  drill 
that  are  not  clearly  understood. 

It  is  beUeved  that  the  orders  bound  as  an  appendix  to  the 
second  chapter  will  be  found  very  useful.  Many  officers  are  not 
only  not  famihar  with  these  orders,  but  are  ignorant  of  the  existence 
of  the  orders  themselves. 

Reference  Books. 

Every  company  should  have  a  mihtary  library  belonging  to  the 
orderly-room.  These  books  should  never  be  removed  from  the 
office,  but  all  men  in  the  company  should  be  permitted  to  refer  to 
them  whenever  they  desire. 

It  is  also  excellent  for  the  company  to  have  a  library  for  the 
exclusive  use  of  the  men  belonging  to  it;  this  Ubrary  should  have  a 
distinct  mihtary  tone  to  produce  the  best  results.  Fill  it  with 
mihtary  stories,  histories  of  campaigns,  and  standard  works  of 
fiction  deahng  with  adventure  or  mihtary  subjects.  Every  man 
has  a  certain  amount  of  the  mihtary  spirit  in  his  make-up,  and  what 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  15 

you  want  to  do  is  to  cultivate  and  foster  it.  Trashy  novels  and 
stories  dealing  with  kind-faced  cows  standing  in  silvery  streams 
should  be  prohibited;  they  are  not  proper  reading  for  men  whom  you 
are  trying  to  make,  soldiers  of.  If  men  want  this  kind  of  reading, 
they  can  get  it  outside  of  the  company. 

Hang  your  walls  with  good  military  pictures;  they  also  help 
lots  to  cultivate  the  miUtary  spirit.  In  order  to  produce  the  best 
results,  you  must  surround  your  men  with  a  miUtary  atmosphere. 

The  following  books  should  be  in  the  orderly-room  library: 

*'U.  S.  Army  Regulations.'' 

''The  Organized  Militia  Regulations  of  the  War  Department." 

''Field  Service  Regulations,  U.  S.  Army." 

"Manual  of  Court^Martial,  U.  S.  Army." 

"U.  S.  Infantry  Drill  Regulations  and  Manual  of  the  Bayonet." 
1911. 

"Manual  of  Interior  Guard  Duty."     1914. 

"Small  Arms  Firing  Manual,  U.  S.  Aimy."     1914. 

"Manual  of  Mihtary  Field  Engineering."     (Beach.) 

"Troops  on  Riot  Duty."     (Stockton-Dickinson.) 

"Drill  Regulations  and  Service  Manual  for  Sanitary  Troops, 
U.  S.  Army."     (For  teaching  first  aid.) 

"Instructions  and  Problems  in  Guard  Duty  for  the  Private 
Soldier."     Government  publication. 

"Elements  of  Mihtary  Sketching."  (Barnes.)  Published  by 
U.  S.  Infantry  Association.  * 

"Infantry  Equipment  Manual,  Organized  Mihtia." 

"Description  and  Rules  for  the  Management  of  the  U.  S. 
Magazine  Rifle."     No.  1923. 

"Description  of  the  Automatic  Pistol,  Cahber  .45,  Model  1911." 
No.  1134. 

"Description  of  the  Infantry  Equipment,  Model  1910."  (If 
you  have  the  new  equipment.) 

"Manual  for  Non-commissioned  Officers  and  Privates  of  In- 
fantry of  the  Organized  Militia  and  Volunteers  of  the  United 
States."     1914. 

"Aids  to  Scouting."     (Baden-Powell.) 

"Manual  for  Army  Cooks,  U.  S.  Army." 


16  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

'*  Training  Infantry."     (Morrison.)     A  moat  excellent  book. 

*' Military  Policy  of  the  United  States."  (Upton.)  War  De- 
partment publication. 

''The  Valor  of  Ignorance."     (Homer  Lea.) 

"Fire  Problems."  (Pilcher.)  An  EngHsh  book,  but  most 
excellent. 

I  do  not  think  that  you  can  safely  omit  a  single  book  in  the 
above  Hst. 


APPENDIX. 


General  Orders,  \  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  3.  /  Washington,  January  12,  1915. 

I.  The  bacon  chest  and  condiment  chest  are  discontinued 
as  part  of  the  field  equipment.  Those  now  in  the  hands  of  troops 
or  supply  officers  will  form  part  of  the  permanent  camp  equipment 
until  the  supply  on  hand  is  exhausted.     (2234786,  A.  G.  O.) 

II.  So  much  of  Paragraph  II.,  General  Orders,  No.  23,  War 
Department,  1906,  as  relates  to  the  clothing  component  of  the  filed 
kit  and  the  surplus  kit,  as  amended,  is  further  amended  as  follows: 

1.  The  field  kit,  clothing  component,  for  all  arms  and  branches 
of  the  service,  momited  and  dismounted,  in  addition  to  the  clothing 
worn  on  the  person,  is  composed  of  the  following  articles: 

1  blanket.  2  stockings,  pairs. 

1  comb.  1  toothbrush. 

1  drawers,  pair.  1  towel. 

1  poncho  (dismounted  men).         1  undershirt. 

1  sUcker  (mounted  men).*  1  housewife  (for  1  man  of  each 

1  soap,  cake.  squad). 

The  foregoing  field  kit,  which  is  carried  on  the  person  by  dis- 
mounted men  and  on  the  packed  saddle  by  mounted  men,  is  supple- 
mented by  the  surplus  kit,  the  two  together  making  up  the  clothing 
component  of  the  service  kit. 

2.  The  surplus  kit  consists  of: 

1  breeches,  pair.  2  stockings,  pairs. 

1  drawers,  pair.  1  shoe-laces,  extra  pair. 

1  shirt,  oUve  drab.  1  imdershirt. 

1  shoes,  russet  leather,  pair. 

The  surplus  kit  pertains  to  Equipment  ''B"  (Paragraph  I., 
G.  O.,  No.  85,  W.  D.,  1914),  as  part  of  the  permanent  camp  equip- 

*For  all  enlisted  men  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  both  mounted 
and  dismounted;  also  for  enlisted  men  of  the  Hospital  Corps  de- 
tailed as  ambulance  drivers  and  ambulance  orderlies. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 


17 


ment,  to  be  forwarded  to  troops  when  gerving  in  inatruction,  ma- 
neuver, mobilization,  or  concentration  camps,  or  when  in  active 
service  a  temporary  suspension  of  operations  permits  the  troops  to 
refit.  In  peace-time  maneuvers  and  marches  the  surplus  kit  may 
accompany  the  troops,  if  so  directed  in  the  orders  prescribing  the 
movement.  The  vehicles  and  animals  of  the  combat  train  and 
those  representing  the  divisional  supply  train  will  be  utiHzed  to 
transport  them. 

3.  The  sweater  will  form  part  of  Equipment  "A"  (Paragraph 
I.,  G.  O.,  No.  85,  W.  D.,  1914),  pertaining  to  field  service,  and, 
when  climatic  conditions  require  its  use,  will  be  carried  by  the 
soldier  on  his  person.  When  sweaters  are  not  prescribed  to  be 
worn  on  the  person,  they  will  be  collected  into  bundles  of  convenient 
size  and  secured  by  burlap  or  other  suitable  material,  or  will  be 
boxed.  They  will  be  marked  ready  for  shipment,  to  be  forwarded 
when  required.  In  peace-time  maneuvers  and  marches  the  sweater, 
even  though  not  prescribed  to  be  carried  by  the  soldier  on  the  march, 
may  accompany  the  troops,  if  so  directed  in  the  orders  prescribing 
the  movements.  The  vehicles  and  animals  of  the  combat  train  and 
those  representing  the  divisional  supply  train  will  be  utiUzed  to 
transport  them. 

The  same  rule  will  apply  in  regard  to  overcoats. 


Surplus  Kit  Bag. 

4.     Surplu.  kit  bags  will  be  issued  to  each  organization  at  the 
rate  of  one  to  each  squad,  one  for  the  sergeants,  and  one  for  the  cooks 


18  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

and  musiciang  (or  trumpetera),  and  one  for  eveiy  eight  men  of 
detachments. 

Each  bag  will  be  marked  with  the  letter  of  the  company  and 
the  number  of  the  regiment,  aa  provided  in  Paragraph  295,  Army 
Regulations,  for  haversacks,  and  the  proper  designation  of  the 
squads  to  which  the  bags  belong,  both  markings  to  be  in  center  of 
front  cover  flap,  as  shown  in  the  illustration. 

5.  The  kit  bag  for  the  sergeants  and  that  for  the  cooks  and 
musicians  (or  trumpeters)  will  be  marked  ''Sergeg-nts,"  ''Cooks  and 
Musicians"  (or  Trumpeters),  respectively.  Similarly,  the  kit  bags 
for  detachments  will  be  appropriately  marked. 

The  kit  of  each  man  will  be  packed  as  follows: 

Stockings  to  be  rolled  tightly,  one  pair  in  the  toe  of  each  shoe; 
shoes  placed  together,  heels  at  opposite  ends,  soles  outward,  wrapped 
tightly  in  underwear,  and  bundle  securely  tied  around  the  middle 
by  the  extra  pair  of  shoe-laces,  each  bundle  to  be  tagged  with  the 
company  number  of  the  owner.  These  individual  kits  will  be 
packed  in  the  surplus  kit  bag  in  two  layers  of  four  kits  each,  the 
breeches  and  olive  drab  sliirts  to  be  neatly  folded  and  packed  on  the 
top  and  sides  of  the  layers,  the  jointed  cleaning-rod  and  case,  pro- 
vided for  each  squad,  being  attached  by  the  thongs  on  the  inside  of 
the  bag.     (2234786,  A.  G.  O.) 

III.  Paragraph  V,  General  Orders,  No.  16,  War  Department, 
1914,  relating  to  the  withdrawal  of  the  surplus  kit  bag  from  issue  as 
an  article  of  equipment  for  organizations  of  mountain  artillery,  ia 
rescinded.     (2234786A,  A.  G.  O.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

A.  L.  Mills, 
Brigadier  General,  General  Staff  Corps, 
Oflficial:  '  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 

H.  P.  McCain, 

The  Adjutant  Geneial. 

General  Orders,  \  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  51.  /  Washington,  July  2,  1914. 

By  direction  of  the  President,  the  minimum  enlisted  strength 
for  each  organization  of  the  Organized  Mihtia  is  fixed  as  follows* 

For  a  company  of  infantry,  total  enlisted,  65.  This  is  based 
on  apportionment  to  grades  as  follows,  viz.:  1  first  sergeant,  1 
quartermaster  sergeant,  4  sergeants ,  6  corporals,  2  cooks,  1  artificer, 
2  musicians,  and  48  privates. 

For  a  troop  of  cavalry,  total  enUsted,  65.  This  is  based  on  ap- 
portionment to  grades  as  follows,  viz. :  1  first  sergeant,  1  quarter- 
master sergeant,  6  sergeants,  6  corporals,  2  cooks,  1  farrier,  1  horse- 
^hoer,  1  saddler,  1  waggoner,  2  trumpeters,  and  43  privates. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  19 

For  a  company  of  engineerg,  total  enlisted,  65.  This  ia  based 
on  apportionment  to  grades  as  follows,  viz.:  1  first  sergeant,  1 
quartermaster  sergeant,  5  sergeants,  8  corporals,  2  cooks,  2  musi- 
cians, 23  first-class  privates,  and  23  second-class  privates. 

For  a  company  of  coast  artillery,  total  enlisted,  65.  This  is 
based  on  apportionment  to  grades  as  follows,  viz. :  1  first  sergeant, 
1  quartermaster  sergeant,  4  sergeants,  6  corporals,  2  cooks,  2 
mechanics,  2  musicians,  and  47  privates. 

For  a  battery  of  field  artillery,  total  enlisted,  133.  This  is 
based  on  apportionment  to  grades  as  follows,  viz. :  1  first  sergeant, 
1  quartermaster  sergeant,  1  stable  sergeant,  6  sergeants,  12  cor- 
porals, 3  cooks,  1  chief  mechanic,  4  mechanics,  2  musicians,  and 
102  privates. 

For  Signal  Corps  companies: 

Type  A  company,  total  enlisted,  75.  This  is,  based  on  appor- 
tionment to  grades  as  follows,  viz. :  2  master  signal  electricians,  7 
first-clast  sergeants,  10  sergeants,  17  corporals,  2  cooks,  24  first-class 
privates,  and  13  privates. 

Type  B  company,  total  e;ilisted,  74.  This  is  based  on  appor- 
tionment to  grades  as  follow,  viz.:  1  master  signal  electrician,  5 
first-class  sergeants,  8  sergeants,  13  corporals,  2  cooks,  34  first-class 
privates,  and  11  privates. 

Type  C  company,  total  enlisted,  40.  This  is  based  on  appor- 
tionment to  grades  as  follows,  viz.:  1  master  signal  electrician,  3 
first-class  sergeants,  5  sergeants,  7  corporals,  2  cooks,  14  first-class 
privates,  and  8  privates. 

Type  D  Company,  total  enlisted,  67.  This  is  based  on  appor- 
tionment to  grades  as  foUows,  viz. :  2  master  signal  electricians,  5 
first-class  sergeants,  8  sergeants,  13  corporals,  2  cooks,  29  first-class 
privates,  and  8  privates. 

For  the  Hospital  Corps:  (a)  Ambulance  company  section, 
total  enlisted,  43.  This  is  based  on  apportionment  to  grades  as 
follows,  viz, :  2  sergeants,  first  class,  7  sergeants,  1  acting  cook,  and 
33  privates,  first  class,  and  privates,  (b)  Field  hospital,  total  en- 
listed, 33.  This  is  based  on  apportionment  to  grades  as  follows,  via. : 
3  sergeants,  first  class,  6  sergeants,  2  acting  cooks,  and  22  privates, 
first  class,  and  privates.       (1254402A,  A.  G,  O.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

W.  W.  WOTHERSPOON, 

Official:  Major-General,  Chief  of  Staff; 

Geo.  Andrews, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

General  Orders,  \  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  85.  /  Washington,  November  20,  1914. 

I.  The  following  instructions  pertaining  to  field  equipment 
are  published  for  the  information  and  guidance  of  all  concerned: 


20  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

1.  Field  service  is  defined  to  be  service  in  mobilization,  con- 
centration, instruction,  or  maneuver  camps,  as  well  as  service  in 
campaign,  in  simulated  campaign,  or  on  the  march. 

The  complete  equipment  for  field  service  (equipment  **C") 
consists  of  engineer,  ordnance,  signal,  medical,  and  quartermaster 
property;  and  is  divided  into  two  classes,  '*A"  and  ''B.^' 

Equipment  "A"  is  the  equipment  prescribed  for  use  in  cam- 
paign, in  simulated  campaign,  or  on  the  march.  It  is  limited  to 
the  animals  and  vehicles  prescribed  in  the  Tables  of  Organization, 
the  equipment  and  clothing  worn  on  the  person,  and  the  articles 
carried  on  mount  and  transported  in  field,  combat,  and  divisional 
traine. 

Equipment  "B"  is  the  equipment  which,  in  addition  to  equip- 
ment "A,"  is  prescribed  for  the  use  of  troops  in  mobiUzation,  con- 
centration, instruction,  or  maneuverx  camps;  and  during  such 
pauses  in  operations  against  an  enemy  as  permit  the  better  care  of 
troops. 

Equipment  "C"  is  the  sum  of  equipments  "A''  and  "B,''  and 
therefore  includes  every  article  prescribed  for  field  service  as  here- 
inbefore defined. 

When  troops  are  ordered  on  field  service,  instructions  will 
state  the  letter  designation  of  the  equipment  to  be  taken.  The  in- 
structions will  also  specify  whether  mosquito-bars  and  head-nets  are 
to  form  a  part  of  the  equipment,  and  what  winter  articles,  if  any, 
are  to  be  included.  The  same  rule  will  apply  in  the  issuance  of  sub- 
sequent orders  when  necessary.  Articles  distinctively  for  winter 
use  can  be  transported  &t  baggage  on  the  march  only  when  trans- 
portation in  addition  to  that  prescribed  in  equipment  ''A"  is  pro- 
vided for  that  purpose.  In  addition  to  the  allowances  prescribed 
as  the  field  equipments,  service  coats,  cravats,  fatigue  clothing,  and 
other  ai  tides  of  uniform,  extra  bedding,  and  toilet  articles  may  be 
taken  by  ofl&cers  and  enlisted  men  with  equipment  "B,"  when  au- 
thorized in  orders  directing  the  movement  of  troops. 

2.  The  articles  of  engineer,  ordnance,  and  signal  property 
listed  in  the  several  Unit  AccountabiHty  Equipment  Manuals  be- 
long to  equipment  *  'A."  The  articles  of  medical  property  belonging 
to  equipment  "A"  are  shown  in  the  Manual  for  the  Medical  De- 
partment. The  articles  of  quartermaster  property  belonging  to 
equipments  *'A,"  "B,''  and  ''C,"  respectively,  will  be  shown  in 
tables  soon  to  be  pubhshed.     (2227724,  A.  G.  O.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

H.  L.  Scott, 
Official:  Brigadier  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

E.  F.  Ladd, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  21 

CHAPTER  II. 
ORGANIZATION  AND  EQUIPMENT. 

When  an  officer  attains  to  the  grade  of  company  commander, 
hig  lesponsibiHties  become  great;  this  responsibility  is  shared  only 
with  the  colonel  of  a  regiment;  the  responsibilities*  of  all  other 
officers  sink  into  insignificance  when  compared  with  the  load  carried 
by  the  captain  and  the  colonel.  Each  is  directly  responsible  for  the 
training  of  an  organization.  If  they  are  efficient,  their  organizations 
are  efficient;  if  they  are  not,  their  organizations  reflect  their  in- 
competence. 

The  U.  S.  Infantry  DriU  Regulations  say:  "Only  one  kind  of 
infantry  is  required  in  war— good  infantry.** 

The  first  question  which  naturally  arises  in  the  mind  of  the 
company  commander  is :  "Is  my  company  efficient?  if  not,  in  what 
respect  is  it  deficient?"  Next,  "How  can  I  make  it  an  efficient 
organxziation?  " 

Let  us  start  at  the  beginning,  and  let  me  ask  you  a  few  ques- 
tions; if  you  can  answer  them  satisfactorily  to  yourself,  good;  if 
not,  don't  read  any  further  until  you  have  corrected  these  defects; 
then  proceed: 

Is  your  company  properly  organized?  Have  you  your  proper 
number  of  non-commissioned  officers,  cooks,  artificer,  and  musicians? 
If  not,  appoint  them. 

Is  your  company  properly  equipped?  Have  you  your  in- 
trenching tools,  signal  kits,  first-aid  packets,  proper  number  of 
rifles,  equipments,  etc.?    If  not,  get  them. 

Is  your  property  all  marked  as  required  by  Paragraph  295, 
Army  Regulations,  1913?  If  not,  mark  it.  While  the  Regulations 
do  not  require  clothing  to  be  marked,  stiU  I  have  found  it  advisable 
to  mark  everything— hats,  leggings,  clothing,  blankets,  etc.  Mark 
the  article  with  crossed  rifles,  company  letter,  and  regimental  num- 
ber, and  the  man's  company  number  also;  this  will  prevent  articles 
from  getting  lost,  especially  in  the  National  Guard.  All  articles  of 
clothing  can  be  marked  on  the  inside.  Use  stencil  furnished.  Have 
you  the  stencils  required?     If  not,  get  them. 


22  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Now  we  come  to  clothing.  Do  your  men  know  who  to  wear  the 
uniform?  Your  firat  thought  is,  *'0f  courae. "  But  I  aak  you  again, 
Do  they?  Has  anyone  ever  shown  the  recruit,  or  even  your  older 
men,  exactly  how  the  uniform  should  be  worn?  The  uaual  way 
ia  to  give  a  man  a  uniform  and  let  him  put  it  on  in  any  way  that 
suits  him.  Do  you  doubt  the  necessity  for  this?  Good.  Inspect 
your  company  the  next  time  it  falls  in,  and  note  the  number  of  hats 
without  hat-cords,  those  with  the  ha1>-cord3  not  sewed  on;  note  the 
number  of  men  who  have  their  leggings  on  wrong;  note  the  blouses 
with  buttons  off  or  unbuttoned,  etc.  You  will  find  that  you  have 
overlooked  these  little  but  very  important  details.     Correct  them. 

Are  the  above  points  essentials?  Yes,  they  most  certainly  are. 
A  man  cannot  become  a  good  soldier  unless  he  takes  a  pride  in  his 
equipment  and  uniform;  he  will  never  do  thia  until  he  is  sure  that 
he  will  always  have  the  same  equipment.  Teach  him  to  be  neat, 
and  he  will  take  a  pride  in  his  uniform  and  his  profession.  Let  him 
dress  like  a  tramp,  and  he  wiU  soon  be  an  undisciplined  tramp,  with 
dirty  equipment,  slouchy  uniform,  and  that  soon  means  a  rusty  gun, 
bad  drill,  and  no  discipUne. 

Are  the  campaign  hats  all  properly  creased?  If  not,  get  them 
in  shape  and  teach  your  men  to  place  them  carefully  in  the  lockers 
so  that  they  will  not  get  jammed  out  of  ahape. 

Have  your  men  a  uniform  way  of  arranging  their  clothing  in 
the  lockers?    If  not,  prescribe  one  and  enforce  it. 

AU  these  smaU  things  make  for  disciphne.  Every  time  a  man 
does  something  that  you  want  him  to  do  in  the  manner  that  you 
want  it  done  you  have  acquired  a  certain  amount  of  discipline. 
He  will  obey  you  just  that  much  better  at  driU  and  on  the  firing-line 
some  day.  As  I  said  before,  all  these  small  (usually  thought  unim- 
portant) details  go  to  make  your  company  well  discipUned  and 
efficient;  neglect  them  and  you  will  never  have  a  well-disciplined 
organization.  You  must  strive  for  discipline  aU  the  time,  and  never 
neglect  the  amaUeat  thing  that  will  in  any  way  help.  We  utiHze 
these  small  things  in  the  regular  service  to  bi-ing  about  the  desired 
result  and  they  are  more  necessary  in  the  Guard  than  in  the  regular 
service,  because  you  have  control  over  your  men  for  such  a  short 
time  at  best  and  at  intervals.     Make  the  most  of  the  time  you  have. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  23 

For  this  reason  I  require  all  drill  in  the  National  Guard,  whether 
clos.e  or  extended  order,  to  be  at  attention.  Your  extended-order 
drill  is  not  so  long  that  it  will  work  any  hardship  upon  your  men, 
and  it  will  improve  your  disciphne  wonderfully. 

Now,  how  about  your  tenta?  Have  you  the  correct  number 
and  kinds?  Are  they  in  good  condition?  Have  you  extra  ropes 
and  the  proper  number  of  tent-pins?     If  not,  get  them. 

How  about  your  field  range?  Is  it  clean?  Are  the  utensils 
clean  and  have  you  the  required  number?  Do  you  know  how  to 
pack  the  field  range?  If  not,  see  appendix  to  this  chapter.  It  is 
necessary  that  the  range  be  packed  exactly  as  prescribed  for  the 
following  reasons:  First,  you  will  lose  parts  if  it  is  not  properly 
packed  in  transit;  and  second,  you  will  not  be  able  to  get  all  of  the 
cooking  utensils  inside  of  it  unless  it  is  properly  packed.  After  the 
range  has  been  used  in  camp,  it  should  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and 
then  painted  with  stove  enamel,  asphalt  varnish,  or  any  preparation 
to  keep  it  from  rusting;  this  will  burn  off  in  a  short  time  when  the 
range  is  used  again  and  wiU  keep  your  range  in  excellent  condition. 
The  cooking  utensils  should  be  scoured,  dried,  and  then  greased  with 
cosmoHne  to  keep  them  from  rusting;  they  can  be  washed  in  lye 
when  required  for  use. 

Now,  how  about  your  company  records?  Are  they  kept  up  to 
date?  Get  after  them  if  they  are  not.  Do  you  try  to  do  it  all 
yourself?  If  you  do,  don't;  it  is  not  your  work.  Make  your  lieu- 
tenants help,  and  be  saie  to  have  the  first  sergeant  and  the  company 
clerk  do  their  share.  The  captain's  business  is  to  supervise  eveiy- 
thing.  You  must  see  that  the  others  do  not  slight  tjieir  work. 
You  may  say:  ^*I  have  no  one  who  knows  the  work;  it  is  easier  to 
do  it  myself  than  it  is  to  try  to  teach  someone  else."  I  know  that, 
but  the  System  is  wrong.  Teach  them;  it  is  part  of  j^our  work,  and 
will  more  than  repay  you  in  the  end.  Remember,  if  the  efficiency 
of  your  company  depends  entirely  upon  you,  your  organization  will 
never  be  really  efficient,  and  you  will  not  have  the  time  to  devote 
to  other  more  important  things  that  need  your  attention. 

Now,  how  about  your  first  Sergeant  and  quartermaster  sergeant? 
Do  they  do  their  work,  or  are  they  merely  figure-heads?  If  they  are, 
something  is  wrong.    Correct  it  at  once.     I  once  saw  an  adjutant 


24  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

general  of  a  State  issuing  clothing — in  fact,  doing  quartermaster 
sergeant's  work.  Was  that  Guard  efficient?  It  certainly  was  not. 
At  another  time  I  saw  a  lieutenant  colonel  issuing  out  blanket-rolls 
which  had  been  unloaded  from  a  wagon  to  enlisted  men.  This  is 
absurd.  The  sergeants  did  not  know  how  to  do  it.  Could  they  ever 
learn  under  such  a  system?  Remember,  in  order  to  be  a  thoroughly 
eflScient  officer,  the  captain  must  know  every  man's  job  in  the  com- 
pany better  than  he  does  himself.  If  you  don't  know  their  work, 
learn  it. 

Is  the  armory,  or  at  least  the  company-room  in  the  armory,  kept 
clean  at  all  times,  especially  on  drill  nights?  If  not,  have  it  cleaned 
and  keep  it  clean.  How  can  a  man  take  a  pride  in  his  organization 
if  he  comes  to  an  untidy,  unkept  room  to  change  clothes  for  drill? 
Will  tliis  man,  trained  under  such  sunoundings,  keep  his  camp 
clean  and  sanitary  when  he  takes  the  field  and  his  life  and  the  lives 
of  his  comrades  are  at  stake?  He  will  not,  and  we  will  have  the 
horrors  of  the  camps  of  1898  repeated. 

Your  responsibilities  as  a  company  commander  are  great. 
Take  them  seriously. 

Now,  how  about  shoes?  Do  you  know  anything  about  the 
fitting  of  shoes?  You  should;  you  are  a  captain  of  foot  troops.  I 
know  that  your  men  cannot  get  the  Government  shoe  in  time  of 
peace;  but  you  should  know  how  to  fit  shoes  to  them  when  they  are 
issued  to  you  as  they  will  be  in  war.  One  is  apt  to  think  that  every 
man  knows  whether  a  shoe  fits  him  or  not;  he  does  not.  The  av- 
erage man  habitually  wears  a  shoe  too  short  and  too  narrow  for 
him.  If  you  take  the  number  given  you  by  this  man  when  issuing 
Government  shoes  to  him,  your  company  will  not  be  properly  shod, 
and  they  will  not  be  able  to  march  when  put  to  the  test. 

Get  the  book,  "The  Soldier's  Foot  and  the  Mihtary  Shoe,"  by 
Munson.  You  will  find  things  in  it  about  your  feet  that  you  never 
dreamed  of.  This  is  an  essential.  Read  carefully  G.  O.  No.  26, 
August  16,  1912,  War  Department.  This  will  teach  you  how  to 
measure  the  feet  of  your  men.  Also  read  G.  O.  No.  30, 1913,  which 
amends  the  above  order  in  regard  to  socks.  Socks  are  almost  as 
important  as  shoes. 

How  about  your  company  boxes  for  packing  surplus  articles? 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  25 

Do  they  conform  in  size  to  the  War  Department  requirements? 
Read  G.  O.  No.  10,  February  18,  1914,  War  Department,  for  sizes 
required.     (These  orders  are  found  as  an  appendix  to  this  chapter.) 

How  about  your  tents  for  camp?  are  they  folded  as  prescribed 
in  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations?  If  not,  fold  them  in  the  proper 
manner  and  keep  them  in  shape.  It  takes  no  longer  to  fold  them 
correctly  than  it  does  to  throw  them  together,  and  it  has  the  ad- 
ditional advantage  of  having  them  ready  for  transportation,  if 
necessary. 

Do  your  men  know  how  to  make  up  the  blanket-roU  (old 
pattern)  correctly?  Teach  them.  (See  appendix  to  first  chapter.) 
I  believe  that  it  is  better  to  have  your  rolls  made  up  at  all  times; 
articles  do  not  then  get  lost,  and  if  you  are  ordered  out  in  a  hurry, 
everything  is  ready.  Have  two  pegs  in  the  company-room  for  each 
man;  hang  the  made-up  blanket-roll  on  one  and  the  man^s  belt, 
haversack,  canteen,  etc.,  on  the  other;  have  the  man's  company 
number  stenciled  above  the  pegs.  Remember,  each  man  in  the  com- 
pany should  be  given  a  company  number,  and  aU  of  his  equipment 
should  be  marked  with  this  number;  this  will  prevent  articles  from 
getting  lost  or  misplaced.  The  method  of  doing  this  is  prescribed 
in  Paragraph  295  A.  R.,  1913.  The  man's  locker  in  the  armory 
will  bear  the  same  number.     This  is  system. 

Now  in  regard  to  organization :  Do  you  know  where  to  find  out 
how  your  company  should  be  organized?  If  not,  get  and  study 
''Tables>f  Organization,  U.  S.  Army,"  1914,  and  G.  O.  No.  51,  W- 
D.,  1914.  This  is  the  one  authoritative  source  for  all  information 
of  this  kind. 

Do  you  know  what  the  proper  equipment  of  every  man  in  your 
company  is?  If  not,  get  the  ''Infantry  Equipment  Manual,  Or- 
ganized Militia,"  1914;  this  will  teU  you. 

Do  you  know  what  the  field  kit  and  surplus  kit  are?  Do  you 
know  how  and  where  they  are  carried,  and  when  used?  See  appendix 
to  first  chapter. 

For  convenience  and  reference,  the  orders  referred  to  above 
are  bound  as  an  appendix  to  this  chapter. 

"The  Infantry  Equipment  Manual,  Organized  Militia,"  1914, 


26  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

contains  complete  information  in  regard  to  the  equipment  of  all  kinds 
and  claggea  that  you  should  have  on  hand  in  your  organization. 

Always  take  a  receipt  for  every  article  that  goes  out  of  your 
store-room;  this  means,  make  every  oflBcer  and  soldier  receipt  to 
you  for  every  article  issued  to  him.  Follow  this  rule,  and  you  will 
always  know  where  your  property  is  or  should  be;  neglect  it,  and  in 
a  short  time  you  will  have  lost  hundreds  of  dollars'  worth  of  prop- 
erty, which  you  will  have  to  pay  for.  You  will  never  be  able  to 
make  it  up  or  find  it. 

Never  throw  away  any  article,  no 'matter  how  worthless  it 
may  seem,  until  it  has  been  acted  upon  by  a  survey  officer;  he  will 
decide  what  disposition  should  be  made  of  it. 


APPENDIX. 

Method  of  Packing  Field  Range  No.  1  (Old  Pattern). 

Every  article  must  be  thoroughly  cleaned  and  dried  before 
packing  range. 

Take  down  stovepipe  and  nest  the  pipes  carefully.  Pack  rame 
in  fire-box. 

Take  off  all  stove -lids  and  pack  same  in  the  fire-box  under 
the  grate. 

Place  stovepipe  supporter  in  the  top  of  the  stove  through  small 
door  in  font  of  stove.     (This  rod  holds  the  stovepipe  in  the  fire-box.) 

Close  small  door  and  secure  it. 

Place  fire  shovel  inside  under  grate. 

Take  one  of  the  two  bake-pans  and  place  it  on  the  ground. 
Nest  the  boilers,  and  place  them  on  their  sides  inside  the  bake-pan 
with  the  bottom  of  the  boilers  toward  the  end  of  the  bake-pan, 
which  will  be  at  the  back  of  the  oven  when  the  oven  is  closed. 

Place  stovepipe  elbows  inside  nested  boilers. 

Place  the  meat-chopper,  pot-cleaner,  salt,  pepper,  and  flour 
dredges,  sieve,  dipper,  ladles,  butcher-knife,  cleaver,  meat  saw,  etc., 
inside  of  the  boilers. 

Place  the  other  bake  pan  inverted  over  the  top  of  the  boilers, 
so  that  articles  above  enumerated  are  nested  between  both  bake- 
pans. 

Place  range  lanterns  between  bake  pans  on  the  side  toward  the 
door  of  the  stove  when  the  nested  pans,  etc.,  are  packed  in  the  oven. 

Slide  nested  bake-pans  and  other  articles  packed  between  them 
into  the  oven. 

Place  boiler  covers  on  top  of  bake-pan;  close  oven  door  and 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  27 

secure  it  with  the  iron  rod  provided  for  this  purpose;  wire  this  rod 
to  the  staple. 

Contents  of  Field  Range  No.  1  (Old  Pattern). 
Price,  $23.18. 
Price.  Price 

Boilers,  nested  (4) $1.11     Ladles,  soup,  1 $0. 23 

Choppers,  meat,  1 1  21     Lanterns,  folding,  2 1 .30 

Cleaners,  pot,  1 03     Pans,  bake,  small,  2 60 

Cleavers,  large,  1 57    Pipe,  smoke,  elbow,  2 .  .  .      .27 

Dippers,  large,  1 32     Pipe,  smoke,  joints,  4. . .      .15 

Dredges,  flour,  1 .09     Saws,  meat,  1 64 

Dredges,  pepper,  1 05    Shovels,  range,  large,  1  .      .06 

Dredges,  salt,  1 08    Sieves,  flour,  1 35 

Forks,  large,  1 29     Skimmers,  large,  1 20 

Guards,  tent,  1  (2  pieces) ...      .10    Spoons,  large,  1 .  . 07 

Knives,  butcher,  1 27     Steels,  butcher,  1 29 

Ladles,  pierced,  1 25    Turners,  cake,  1 19 

Field  ranges  should  be  kept  properly  packed  at  all  times  when 
not  actually  in  use. 

Company  commanders  should  verify  the  articles  and  replace 
by  purchase  from  local  markets  any  missing  article.  They  cannot 
be  replaced  in  any  other  manner,  as  these  things  are  no  longer  an 
article  of  issue.     This  is  a  proper  charge  against  company  funds. 

If  the  range  is  to  be  packed  and  not  used  for  any  length  of  time, 
boilers,  dippers,  and  other  equipment  should  be  coated  with  cosmo- 
line  or  paraffine,  which  is  better.  Cosmoline  can  be  removed  with 
lye-water  and  paraffine  will  quickly  boil  off  if  the  article  is  placed  in 
water. 

If  the  above  precautions  are  not  taken,  the  range  and  its  equip- 
ment wiU  become  a  mass  of  rust,  which  will  utterly  ruin  everything 
in  a  short  time. 

Circular  ]  ADJUTANT  GENERAL'S  OFFICE, 

No.  3,     V  Office  of  the  Insector-Instructor, 

0. 1. 1.    J  Phoenix,  Arizona,  October  19,  1914. 

Regulations  for  Folding  Tents  and  Making  Up 
Blanket-Roll. 
1.  Spread  shelter-half  smoothly  on  the  ground,  buttons  up 
and  triangular  end  to  the  front.  Fold  blanket  once  across  its  length 
and  place  it  upon  shelter-half;  fold  toward  the  bottom  edge,  one- 
half  an  inch  from  the  square  end,  the  same  amount  of  canvas  un- 
covered at  top  and  bottom.  Place  the  pole  on  the  side  of  the 
blanket  next  the  square  of  the  shelter-half,  near  and  parallel  to  the 
fold,  end  of  pole  about  6  inches  fiom  the  edge  of  the  blanket. 
Nest  the  pins  near  the  opposite  end  of  the  blanket,  and  distribute  the 


28  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

other  articles  carried  in  the  loll  (if  any).  Fold  the  triangular  end 
and  then  the  exposed  portion  of  the  bottom  of  the  shelter-half  over 
the  blanket.  The  two  men  in  each  file  roll  and  fasten  first  the  rcU 
of  the  front-rank  and  then  the  rear-rank  man.  File-closers  work  in 
a  similar  manner — two  and  two.  When  the  roll  is  completed,  fasten 
the  center  strap  and  then  the  end  straps.  With  the  roll  so  lying  on 
the  ground  that  the  edge  of  the  shelter-half  can  }ust  be  seen  when 
looking  vertically  downward,  one  end  is  bent  upward  and  over  to 
meet  the  other.  Fasten  and  adjust  blanket-roll  straps  or  rope  to 
suit  wearer.  When  the  rolls  are  slung,  the  end  containing  the  pole 
should  be  to  the  rear.  Shelter-halves  should  be  so  marked  that  the 
crossed  rifles  will  show,  when  the  loll  is  slung,  on  the  end  that  con- 
tains the  pole.  An  inspection  will  then  show  whether  each  man  has 
his  own  sheltei-half  oi  one  belonging  to  another  man  or  another 
company. 

To  Fold  Wall  Tents. 

2.  Spread  the  tent  flat  on  its  side  and  place  all  guys  but  two 
over  the  canvas;  fold  the  triangular  ends  over  so  as  to  make  the 
canvas  retcangular;  fold  both  ends  over  so  that  they  meet  at  the 
center  and  then  fold  one  end  over  on  the  other;  fold  the  bottom  and 
ridge  over  so  that  they  meet  at  the  center  of  the  strip,  and  then  fold 
one  end  over  the  other.  Fold  the  fly  into  four  folds  parallel  to  its 
length,  then  in  a  similar  manner  across  its  length,  making  a  rectangle 
with  dimensions  about  the  same  as  the  folded  tent.  Place  the  fly 
on  the  tent,  cross  the  two  free  guys  and  tie  them  so  that  they  pass 
over  the  ends  and  across  the  sides.  The  hospital  and  common  tents 
are  folded  in  the  same  manner  as  the  wall  tent. 

To  Fold  Conical  Tents. 

3.  Spread  the  tent  flat  with  the  door  up;  holding  the  ring 
vertical,  fold  the  two  edges  in  so  that  they  meet  at  the  center  and 
again  fold  in  the  same  manner;  place  the  hood  on  one  half  and  fold 
the  other  half  over  it;  turn  wall  over  toward  ring,  fold  the  ring  down, 
placing  knees  on  each  fold  to  make  bundle  compact  and  flat.  Tie 
bundle  with  two  free  guys,  as  in  case  of  wall  tent. 

4.  In  striking  tents,  common  and  wall  tents  are,  unless  other- 
wise directed,  lowered  to  the  right,  facing  out  from  the  tent  door; 
conical  wall  tents,  away  from  the  door. 

To  Fold  Pyramidal  Tents. 

5.  See  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911  edition.  Paragraph 
808. 

Cromwell  Stagey, 
Captain  U.  S.  Infantry,  Inspector-Instructor. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY),  29 

WAR  DEPARTMENT, 
Office  of  the  Quartermaster  General  of  the  Army, 

^No^s'^  }  Washington,  May  18, 1914. 

CJircular  No.  16,  Office  of  the  Chief  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps, 
June  12,  1913,  is  hereby  revoked,  and  the  following  instructions 
are  given  for  instalUng  and  operating  the  Army  field  ranges  Nos. 
1  and  2,  viz.: 

The  Army  field  range 'No.  1,  complete,  as  described  herein, 
weighs  approximately  264  pounds  with  utensils,  and  with  the  addi- 
tion of  the  Alamo  attachment  is  designed  to  cook  for  150  men.  It 
consists  essentially  of  two  parts,  viz.:  the  oven  No.  41  and  the 
boiUng-plate;  the  boihng-plate  has  three  sections.  No.  42  and  two 
other  parts,  forming  the  Alamo  attachment,  Nos.  42A  and  42B. 

To  pack  the  utensils  and  range  for  tiansportation,  place  the  bake- 
pan  No.  52  on  the  ground.  Set  boiler  No.  50  inside  of  bake-pan 
No.  52;  boiler  No.  51  inside  of  boiler  No.  50.  Place  tent-guards 
inside  of  boiler  No.  51  on  bottom.  Telescope  the  4  joints  of  pipe. 
Inside  of  the  pipe  place  2  forks,  3  knives,  1  sharpener,  1  cleaver, 
and  2  folding  lanterns.  Place  joints  of  pipe  containing  utenails 
inside  of  boiler  No.  51.  Place  meat-chopper  in  boiler  No.  51  along- 
side of  joints  of  pipe.  Place  two  basting-spoons,  1  meat-saw,  and  1 
skimmer  in  boiler  No.  51  on  top  of  pipe.  Cover  with  lid  No.  51, 
then  No.  50.  Place  bake-pan  No.  52  upside  down  over  lid  No.  50. 
Care  should  be  taken  that  bake-pan  handles  are  well  down  to  sides 
of  the  pan.  Nest  4  boilers,  Nos.  48,  49,  53,  and  54,  No.  48  outside. 
Place  stovepipe  elbow  in  No.  54.  Place  dippers  alongside  of 
elbows.  Place  covers  Nos.  54,  53,  49,  and  48  on  boilers  in  order 
named.  Place  nested  boilers  Nos.  48,  49,  53,  and  54  in  rear  end  of 
oven.  Place  bake-pans  and  nested  boilers  in  front  end  of  oven. 
Close  the  oven  dooi  and  lock  with  damper  lock.  Place  42 A  on  left 
front  corner  of  oven  No.  41  and  42B  on  right  front  corner,  inserting 
bar  in  crimp.  This  bar  now  rests  against  the  pipe  collar  and  pre- 
vents sliding.  Place  boiling-plate  No.  42  on  top  of  range,  eye 
fitting  over  stovepipe  flange  and  engaging  under  the  flat  hook. 
Make  secure  by  fastening  hook  on  front  of  boiling-plate  to  the  lug 
on  back  of  range.     The  range  is  now  secure  for  transportation. 

Installing  the  Range. 
(See  Fig.  1.) 
On  the  march  the  range  is  ordinarily  set  up  by  simply  levehng 
the  ground  selected  and  placing  the  oven  No.  41  and  boiUng-plate 
No.  42  side  by  side,  so  that  the  oven  door  and  fire-box  door  will 
be  at  the  same  end.  Draw  in  42A  and  42B  and  secure  bar-lock. 
Insert  42A  into  42  and  rest  42B  snugly  on  the  angle  iron  on  the  rear 
of  the  range.    The  oven  should  not  be  banked,  as  this  would  cause 


30  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

the  sheet  iron  along  the  sides  to  warp  and  finally  bum  through. 

Sufficient  earth,  however,  s^hould  be  tamped  along  the  sides  and 
closed  end  to  prevent  the  passage  of  gaees  beneath.  This  earth 
should  not  extend  above  the  straps  along  the  sides  and  undei 
the  oven  door. 

When  used  for  one  day  only  (see  Fig.  3),  it  will  be  necessary  to 
dig  a  trench,  but  if  a  few  shovelfuls  of  earth  are  removed  from  the 
place  to  be  covered  by  the  boiling-plate,  it  will  facilitate  firing. 
The  best  results  are  obtained  by  using  short  wood— keeping  the 
fire  well  toward  the  firing  end  of  the  boiling-plate;  or,  if  using  long 
sticks  and  branches,  pushing  them  under  the  boiling-plate  as  they  . 
are  consumed. 

Trenching. 
(See  Fig.  2.) 

If  the  range  is  to  remain  in  place  for  several  days,  it  is  best  to 
dig  a  trench  (except  in  sandy  soil)  about  18  inches  wide  by  6  inches 
deep  and  the  length  of  the  boiling-plate,  say  6  feet,  sloping  upwaid 
to  about  5  inches  in  depth  at  back  end.  When  installed,  the  trench 
should  extend  under  the  boiling-plate  and  about  1  foot  under  the 
Alamo  attachment^ust  enough  to  facilitate  the  draft — and  about 
6  inches  under  the  oven.  When  the  range  is  set  up  on  different 
ground  daily,  no  difficulty  will  be  experienced  in  obtaining  the 
proper  temperature  in  the  oven,  both  for  top  and  bottom  heat. 
Whenever  it  remains  for  a  longer  time  than  one  day  in  the  same 
spot,  the  ground  will  become  dried  out  and  hot,  and  it  may  be  nec- 
esirary  to  elevate  the  bake-pans  from  the  bottom  of  the  oven  about 
2  inches  above  the  floor  of  the  oven.  This  can  be  easily  done  by 
the  use  of  angle  irons  or  other  convenient  means,  thereby  causing 
an  air-space  under  the  receptacle  in  which  the  baking  or  roasting 
is  being  done.  Never  use  earth  or  sand  on  the  bottom  of  the  oven 
chamber,  for  by  so  doing  a  hole  will  soon  be  burned  in  the  bottom 
plate. 

If  the  range  is  to  be  used  for  a  considerable  length  of  time  in  one 
place,  cooks  wiU  find  a  greater  ease  in  cooking  if  a  trench  about 
18  inches  wide  and  1  foot  deep  is  dug  along  the  side  of  the  boiling- 
plate  and  oven.  This  will  greatly  lessen  the  labor  in  frying,  baking 
hot  cakes,  etc.  The  inside  edge  of  the  trench  should  be  about  1 
foot  from  the  range. 

At  times  it  may  be  necessary  to  install  this  range  for  cooking  on 
a  railroad  car  or  on  a  wooden  floor  of  a  house,  shed,  etc.  To  install, 
erect  a  frame  12  inches  high,  6  feet  long,  and  4  feet  6  inches  wide; 
fiU  with  sand  and  set  the  oven  and  boiling-plate  on  top  of  the  sand, 
anchoring  firmly  in  place.  If  clay  is  available,  remove  all  stones, 
pebbles,  etc.,  add  salt  water  and  sand;  this  foundation  will  become 
hard  and  solid  and  will  prevent  the  burning  of  the  floor. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  31 

Eliminating  Trenches  and  Installing  on  Bricks  Where  Same 
Are  Available. 

Level  the  giound  or  use  a  brick  floor.  Set  up  range  temporarily 
and  mark  outline  on  the  level  ground  or  brick  floor,  after  which 
remove  the  range  and  parts  and  construct  an  8-inch  wall  three  bricks 
high  on  the  outline  and  on  line  between  the  oven  and  boiUng-plate 
for  support  of  same.  Assemble  range  on  walls;  under  oven  place 
brick  on  edge  with  three-fourths  inch  spaces  for  conservation  of 
heat.  Fire-box  channel  under  boiling-plate  No.  42  and  gas  chamber 
under  Alamo  attachment  Nos.  42A  and  42B  to  be  formed  between 
brick  wall  supports.  Bank  outside  of  brick  walls  at  sides  and  back 
of  range  with  clean  earth,  sloped  about  1  to  2. 

In  a  permanent  camp  (see  Fig.  4)  it  is  frequently  necessary  to 
evaporate  waste  under  the  range  and  to  consume  the  garbage  by 
the  same  fire.  In  this  case  dig  a  pit  about  4  feet  long,  33^  feet 
wide,  and  2  feet  deep  to  give  a  reservoir  for  waste  water.  Fill  the 
pit  with  cobblestones,  making  large  cavities,  and  leaving  a  fire-box 
and  gas  chamber  under  boiling-plate  and  Alamo  attachment,  as 
suggested  for  temporary  installation.  Place  a  length  of  stovepipe 
or  any  kind  of  chute  at  a  convenient  place  anywhere  along  the  side 
of  the  oven,  arranging  the  rocks  on  which  it  rests  so  that  there  will 
be  a  free  passage  for  the  water.  Pour  in  the  waste  water  as  it  ac- 
cumulates, retaining  all  sohd  matter  by  a  wire  screen,  the  solid 
matter  to  be  burned  in  the  trench  under  the  boiling-plate,  a  little 
at  a  time,  or,  perhaps  better,  after  the  meal  has  been  prepared. 
Great  care  must  be  exercised  in  garbage  incineration  to  prevent 
injury  to  the  metal  of  the  range. 

Reassembling  for  Transportation. 
When  breaking  camp  and  reassembling  for  transportation,  draw 
boiling-plate  No.  42  foiward.     Unfasten  bar-lock,  pull  apart,  and 
remove  42 A  and  42B,  and  proceed  as  indicated  above. 

Remarks  ON  Handling  the  Range. 

If  properly  installed,  the  oven  will  not  be  too  hot  on  the  bottom 
for  ordinary  baking,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  fire  does  not  strike 
the  range  proper.  A  tin  will  be  found  inside  the  baking  chamber 
which  may  be  used  if  for  any  reason  the  bottom  of  the  oven  is  too 
hot.  Should  the  bottom  of  the  oven  be  too  cold  for  efficient  baking, 
the  tin  should  be  removed.  Articles  brought  to  a  boil  on  the 
boiling-plate  will  continue  to  simmer  if  set  on  top  of  the  oven  or  if 
placed  close  alongside  the  oven,  the  ground  being  leveled  for  the 
purpose.  In  this  manner  a  dinner  has  been  prepared  for  an  entire 
battalion  by  adding  the  necessary  utensils.  A  little  care  and 
judgment  only  is  necessary  to  secure  satisfactory  results. 

Coal  should  never  be  used  when  wood  is  obtainable.    If  possible, 


32  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

even  when  coal  is  used,  part  of  the  fuel  should  be  wood,  for  the  use 
of  coal  alone  will  quickly  destroy  the  range. 

In  permanent  camp  the  space  above  and  on  the  sides  of  the 
oven  and  the  stovepipe  should  be  cleaned  at  least  once  a  week. 
This  also  applies  to  the  boihng-plates.  The  range,  boihng-plates, 
and  piped  should  be  coated  with  a  mixture  of  sugar  and  grease, 
this  preservative  preventing  rusting  and  gives  a  neat,  poHshed 
appearance  to  the  lange. 

Army  Field  Range  No.  2. 

The  Army  field  range  No.  2,  complete,  weighs  about  150  pounds 
with  utensils  and  is  designed  to  cook  for  55  men.  This  range  is 
without  the  Alamo  attachment.  It  consists  essentially  of  two 
parts— the  oven.  No.  61,  and  boiling-plate,  No.  62.  For  transpor- 
tation the  boiling-plate  is  placed  on  top  of  the  oven  and  the  utensils 
(with  flue)  packed  within  the  oven  chamber. 

On  the  march  the  range  is  set  up  ordinarily,  from  day  to  day,  by 
simply  leveling  the  ground  to  be  covered  by  it,  removing  the  boiling- 
plate  and  placing  it  in  the  position  shown,  the  projecting  collar  being 
slipped  into  the  space  cut  from  one  end  of  the  oven  for  that  purpose. 
The  best  results  are  obtained  when  using  short  wood,  keeping  the 
fire  well  towaid  the  firing  end  of  the  boihng-plate;  or,  if  using  long 
sticks  and  branches,  pushing  them  under  the  boiling-plate  (never 
under  the  oven)  as  tney  are  consumed. 

If  the  range  is  to  remain  in  place  for  several  days  (see  Fig.  A),  it 
is  best  to  dig  a  trench  (except  in  sandy  soil)  about  16  inches  wide  by 
6  inches  deep,  and  of  sufficienb  length  for  free  service,  say  5  feet. 
When  installed,  the  tiench  should  extend  under  the  boiling-plate 
and  about  3  inches  under  the  oven^ust  enough  to  prevent  choking 
of  the  draft.  If  the  flame  is  allowed  to  play  freely  on  the  bottom 
of  the  oven  chamber,  it  will  become  too  hot  for  baking,  and  the 
bottom  of  the  oven  will  bum  out  prematurely. 

In  a  permanent  camp  (see  Fig.  B)  it  is  frequently  necessary  to 
evaporate  waste  under  the  range  and  consume  garbage  by  the  same 
fire.  In  this  case,  dig  a  pit  about  6  feet  long,  2  feet  wide,  and  2  feet 
deep,  to  give  a  reservoir  foi  waste  water.  Fill  the  pit  with  cobble- 
stones, making  laige  cavities  and  leaving  a  trench  for  fire-box  under 
boiling-plate,  as  suggested  for  temporary  installation. 

Place  a  length  of  stovepipe,  or  any  kind  of  chute,  at  a  convenient 
place  alongside  of  oven,  arranging  rock  on  which  it  rests  for  a  free 
passage  of  waste  water  to  pit. 

Pour  in  the  waste  water  as  it  accumulates,  letaining  all  soHd 
matter  by  a  wire  screen,  the  solid  matter  to  be  burned  in  the  trench 
under  boiling-plate  a  littie  at  a  time,  or  perhaps  better  after  the 
meal  has  been  prepared.  Great  care  must  be  exercised  in  garbage 
incineration  to  prevent  injury  to  the  metal  of  the  range. 

To  pack  utensils  and  range  for  transportation,  place  bake-pan 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


33 


TRACES^    cffu    &A%,JSz.,  I 

5oi.ip  a*'Nei&  ^HQiH  TicfeMCH)W6l 


34 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 


f=i6.3: 


|L  pent  A>46M  c«j.iNti.S&&  pol^  n 


41 


iHL 


4-1. 


=4S-= 


^3_ 


flG.4- 


1 


IS 


4:^71 


"^ 


k 


\/L2.  *.l 


t 


UTo^i^Xfe-STPrtE:  p;T/  »F  usep^  ^Ff  ^^^^ 


p/6. 1^  SyceKM  op  A^My pBLP RxrtGE H^l  m/ith "Aumq' 

pi6.Z-  SKercM  opTf^&KcmHG  for  5AMe  k     u  • 
pf6.3-     ^«  "    Ram^El^witm  or  without  T<^e^*<^*< 

pi6.4.    It  u       ^         .*•    TeeMcw  AMP  pix. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


35 


P<Si.A. 


^/^'*ff<^ff<{/^    ^<y///>^>%^ 


a 


Ouen 


^ 


Oyfn 
oCoor. 


T'Ci.  ^. 


Ou<pn, 


J^tr/ry^  €^d^         ff^J/fhg   F/at? ,  ^y 


Oyent 
cCoor. 


^n: 


^ 


I  coBBte-sTOMB  prx.  J 


Sketches  op^^^kmy  f'^^p  Rai^Cis  Mo.  2. 

PCJ, A.^KerCH  01=  RaH<5£,W>TH  or  WfTHOUT  T(?eNcH I 


36  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

No.  52  on  the  ground.  Set  boiler  No.  50  inside  of  bake-pan  No.  52; 
boiler  No.  51  inside  of  boiler  No.  50.^  Place  tent-guards  on  bottom 
of  boiler  No.  51.  Telescope  the  4  joints  of  stovepipe.  Inside  of 
pipe  place  2  forks,  2  knives,  1  sharpener,  2  spoons,  1  lantern  (folding), 
and  1  skimmer.  Place  the  joints  of  pipe  containing  utensils  in 
boiler  No.  51.  Place  dipper  and  elbow  alongside  the  pipe.  Place 
meat-saw  in  bake-pan  No.  52  alongside  of  boilers.  Cover  boilers 
with  lids  No.  51  and  No.  50.  Place  bake-pan  No.  52  upside  down 
over  hd  No.  50.  Place  pans  in  the  range  oven.  Place  the  boiling- 
plate  at  the  door  end  of  the  oven.  Engage  the  flanges  on  the  in- 
ner side  of  boiling-plate  with  the  lugs  on  the  door  end  of  the 
oven.  Fasten  the  hook  on  boihng-plate  (firing  end)  to  lug  above 
the  handle  on  the  closed  end  of  oven.  The  range  is  now  secure  for 
transportation.     (441575.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

J.  B.  Aleshire, 
Approved:  Quartermaster  General. 

Geo.  Andrews, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

General  Orders,  \  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  10.  /  Washington,  February  18, 1914. 

I.  The  foUowmg  instructions  prescribing  standard  packing- 
boxes  for  shipment  of  quartermaster  supplies  between  depots,  posts, 
and  stations,  and  from  depots,  posts,  or  stations  to  troops  in  the 
field,  marks  to  be  placed  on  such  boxes  and  other  packages  for 
shipment,  and  marks  on  quartermaster  suppUes  for  issue,  are  pub- 
lished for  the  information  and  guidance  of  all  concerned: 
1.    Standard  Packing-Boxes. 

Packing-boxes  38  by  19  by  15  inches,  outside  measurement, 
meet  nearly  all  requirements  for  escort  wagon,  motor  truck,  pack 
animal,  or  water  transport,  and  accordingly  all  quartermaster  sup- 
plies intended  for  field  service  will,  when  practicable,  be  packed  in 
boxes  of  such  dimensions,  constructed  of  suitable  light  but  durable 
material  (ordinarily  not  exceeding  3^-inch  sides  and  1-inch  ends), 
and  bound  around  ends  and  center  when  necessary  with  suitable 
hoop  iron  or  wire,  weight  not  to  exceed  150  pounds  gross. 

Sacking  or  baling  will  be  substituted  for  boxes  whenever  prac- 
ticable, and  when  necessary  to  use  smaller  boxes,  same  should  be 
exact  subdivisions  of  corresponding  dimensions  of  the  standard  box. 

By  reducing  the  number  of  articles  the  standard  size  and  gross 
weight  limit  of  box  adapts  itself  to  most  quartermaster  supplies. 
2.     Exceptions. 

(a)  In  exceptional  cases  where  conformity  to  the  standard 
weight  limit  would  destroy  the  unity  of  equipment  and  separate 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  37 

component  parts,  the  loss  of  any  one  of  which  would  render  the 
others  useless,  the  gross  weight  of  the  standard-size  box  may  exceed 
150  pounds. 

(6)  In  exceptional  cases,  where  suppUes  are  now  packed  in 
boxes  or  bales  of  less  than  150  pounds  gross  weight,  and  the  di- 
mensions of  which,  determined  by  the  nature  of  the  supplies  and  the 
number  of  units  necessarily  carried,  are  within  the  standard  di- 
mensions, same  may  be  packed  as  heretofore. 

(c)  In  othei  exceptional  cases  the  height  of  the  standard  box 
may  be  shghtly  varied,  the  length  and  breadth  being  adhered  to. 

(d)  Subsistence  Stores.— Unless  otherwise  directed,  subsistence 
stores  will,  when  practicable,  be  shipped  in  containers  in  which  re- 
ceived or  containers  of  similar  dimensions.  The  weight  of  any  one 
box  of  subsistence  stores  prepared  for  shipment  to  posts  should  not 
exceed  100  pounds  gross.  The  gross  weight  of  barrels  may,  however, 
exceed  100  pounds. 

3.     Marks  on  Packages. 

Shipping.— When  space  permits,  name  or  initials  of  consignee 
and  address  wiU  be  marked  on  top  surface  of  package,  box,  etc.,  and 
on  the  ends  U.  S.  number,  contents,  gross,  tare,  and  net  weight, 
name  of  seller  or  contraactor,  or,  if  packed  or  repacked  by  Quarter- 
master Corps,  date  packed  and  initials  of  packers.  Also,  when 
practicable,  the  insignia  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps  will  be  stamped 
on  both  ends  of  each  box,  crate,  barrel,  etc.,  of  quartermaster  sup- 
plies, and  in  addition,  to  readily  distinguish  subsistence  stores,  a 
crescent  3  inches  in  height  and  2  inches  in  width  will  be  stamped  in 
red  or  othei  conspicuous  color  on  both  ends  of  all  packages  con- 
taining subsistence  stores. 

Exception. — Where  it  is  not  practicable  to  mark  contents  on 
boxes,  etc.,  with  stencil  or  brush,  the  contents  wiU  be  listed  on  heavy 
paper  by  use  of  typewriter  or  pen,  the  Hst  attached  by  means  of 
tacks  or  paste,  and  the  hst  then  given  a  Jight  coat  of  varnish  to 
prevent  obHteration  by  rain  or  moisture. 

4.    Specifications  for  Stencil  Plates. 

For  marking  property  for  shipment,  a  complete  set  of  stencil 
plates  consists  of  two  full  alphabets,  Roman  capitals  (including  the 
usual  mark  for  ^'and^'),  and  two  series  of  numbers  from  1  to  0. 
One  set  of  letters  and  numbers  is  1  inch,  the  other  3^  incn  high. 
They  are  cut  on  plates  of  sheet  brass.  No.  28,  the  larger  2J^  by  2 
inches,  the  smaller  1 M  by  1  ^  inches.  The  upper  edge  of  each  plate 
is  turned  up  so  as  to  form  a  rim  about  H  inch  high.  These  plates 
are  issued  in  japanned  tin  boxes,  83^  inches  long,  4  inches  wide,  and 
1%  inches  high,  with  hinged  lids.  Each  box  contains,  besides  the 
full  set  of  stencils,  a  cake  of  marking  paste  in  tin  box,  a  sponge,  and 
a  stencil  brush.  Printed  directions  for  the  use  of  the  latter  materials 
are  attached  to  the  inside  of  the  lid. 


38  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

5.  These  instructions  are  not  to  be  construed  as  prohibiting 
the  use  by  supply  depots  of  crates  of  suitable  dimensions  in  the 
shipment  of  tentage  and  other  supplies  which  experience  has  shown 
can  be  more  advantageously  and  economically  transported  in  that 
form  of  container. 

6.  The  requirements  of  Section  4,  Paragraph  I.,  of  this  order, 
as  to  the  use  of  stencil  plate  sets,  do  not  apply  to  depots  and  other 
points  equipped  with  stencil-cutting  machines. 

7.     Marks  on  Articles. 

All  non-expendable  articles  of  quartermaster  supplies  hereafter 
procured  will  be  marked  with  the  letters  ''U.  S.  Q.  M.  C."  in  one  of 
the  three  following  sizes,  according  to  the  tool  or  article: 

Size  1,  with  letters  Vie  inch  high. 

Size  2,  with  letters  ^  inch  high. 

Size  3,  with  letters  1  inch  high. 

The  marking  of  all  tools  will  be  done  under  the  direction  of  the 
purchasing  officer. 

8.    The  following  will  be  supplied  to  posts  as  a  Class  A  supply : 

Q.  M.  C,  1  inch. 

U.  S.,  1  inch. 

Numerals,  1  inch  (from  0  to  9,  inclusive). 

Stencil  plates,  sets,  complete. 

Rubber  stamp,  insignia  of  the  Quartermaster  Corps,  and 
crescent  stencil  plate  sets. 

9.     Old  Marks. 

When  boxes,  crates,  barrels,  etc.,  which  have  been  used  in  the 
transportation  of  supphes  are  again  used  as  containers  in  the  ship- 
ment of  supplies,  care  must  be  taken  that  all  old  marks  are  ob- 
Hterated.     (2124765,  A.  G.  O.) 

II.  Circular  No.  9,  Office  of  the  Quartermaster  General,  1909, 
is  rescinded.     (2124765,  A.  G.  O.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War : 

Leonard  Wood, 
Official:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

Geo.  Andrews, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

General  Orders,  \  WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

No.  26.  /  Washington,  August  16,  1912. 

I.  With  a  view  to  increasing  the  marching  capacity  of  troops, 
company  commanders  will  personally  measure  the  feet  and  fit  the 
shoes  of  men  of  their  commands,  and  will  be  held  responsible  that 
the  instiuctions  herein  contained  are  strictly  followed. 

All  measurements  prescribed  herein  will  be  taken  with  the 
soldier  standing  in  bare  feet  and  with  a  40-pound  burden  on  his 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


3d 


back,  bearing  the  entire  weight  upon  the  foot  to  be  measured, 
Balance  may  be  preserved  by  resting  the  hand  on  a  fixed  object. 
The  measurements  of  the  foot,  which  must  be  taken  to  make  suita- 
ble preliminary  selection  of  the  shoe  to  try  on,  are:  (a),  the  length; 
(6),  the  circumference  around  the  ball. 

To  measure  the  length  the  soldier  will  stand  with  foot  upon 
the  foot  measure,  furnished  by  the  Quartermaster's  Department, 
fitted  in  a  slot  on  a  board,  the  heel  of  the  soldier  fitting  snugly 
against  the  heel-block.  The  movable  block  will  then  be  pushed  up 
until  it  touches  the  end  of  the  great  toe.  The  scale  on  the  top  of 
the  measure,  which  is  graduated  in  sizes,  will  then  be  read,  and  the 
proper  length  of  the  shoe  will  be  determined,  approximately,  by 
adding  2  to  the  reading  of  the  scale;  thus,  if  the  soldier's  foot  scales 
63^,  a  shoe  not  smaller  than  83^  should  be  tried  on  first. 

To  take  the  ball  measure,  pass  the  foot  tape,  supplied  by  the 
Quartermaster's  Department,  aiound  the  foot  at  the  prominent 
tubercle  at  the  base  of  the  great  toe  and  the  prominent  tubercle  at 
the  base  of  the  little  toe.  The  position  of  the  tape  is  shown  by  the 
line  A—  B  in  the  diagram  below : 


The  tape  should  lie  closely  to  the  flesh,  but  should  not  be  so 
tight  as  to  compress  it.  Having  taken  the  foregoing  measurements, 
the  shoe  best  suited  to  the  foot  will  be  determined  by  reference  to 


40  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Circular  No.  10,  Quartermaster  General's  Office,  April  0,  1912. 
For  example,  assume  that  the  circumference  of  the  ball  is  found  to 
be  9}<C  inches.  In  the  table  on  page  28  of  the  aforesaid  circular, 
under  the  heading  ''Marching  Shoes,"  it  will  be  seen  that  for  a  foot 
requiring  an  8)^  shoe  a  ball  measurement  of  9}^  inches  corresponds 
to  a  D  width.  The  size  of  shoe  to  try  on  for  actual  fitting  is,  then, 
in  this  case,  83^  D. 

If  the  ball  measurement  found  as  above  does  not  correspond 
exactly  with  any  ball  measurement  given  in  the  table,  then  the  nar- 
rower of  the  two  widths  between  which  the  measurement  lies  should 
be  selected. 

Beginning  with  the  size  and  width  thus  tentatively  selected, 
shoes  will  be  tried  on  until  a  satisfactory  fit  is  secured.  Correct  fit 
in  waist  and  instep  will  be  determined  experimentally.  To  de- 
termine the  fact  of  fit,  the  shoe  will  be  laced  snugly,  and  the  soldier 
with  a  40-pound  burden  upon  his  back  will  again  throw  his  entire 
weight  on  one  foot.  The  officer  will  then  press  in  the  leather  of  the 
shoe  in  front  of  the  toes  to  determine  the  existence  of  sufficient  vacant 
space  in  that  region  to  prevent  toe  injury.  Under  no  circum- 
stances should  this  vacant  space  in  front  of  the  great  toe  be  less  than 
%  inch;  nor  should  there  be  pressure  on  the  top  of  the  toes.  The 
officer  will  then  grasp  with  his  hand  the  leather  of  the  shoe  over  the 
ball.  As  his  fingers  and  thumb  are  brought  slowly  together  over  the 
leather,  the  shoe  should  feel  snugly  filled  without  apparent  tension, 
while  the  leather  should  lie  smoothly  under  the  hand.  If  the 
leather  wrinkles  under  the  grasp  of  the  hand,  the  shoe  is  too  wide 
and  a  narrower  width  is  needed;  if  the  leather  seems  tense  and 
bulging  and  the  hands  tend  to  slip  over  easily,  the  shoe  is  too  nanow 
and  a  greater  width  is  necessary. 

It  may  be  necessary  to  try  on  several  pairs  of  shoes  in  this 
manner  before  an  entirely  satisfactory  shoe  is  secured.  A  record 
of  the  proper  size  and  width  of  shoes  as  determined  above  will  be 
kept  as  provided  in  Circular  No.  10,  Quartermastei  Generars  Office, 
April  6,  1912. 

Measurements  will  be  taken  and  shoes  will  be  fitted  as  pre- 
scribed at  least  once  in  each  enlistment,  and  the  record  will  be 
changed  from  time  to  time,  if  subsequent  fittings  render  a  change 
necessary. 

Sizes  called  for  in  requisitions  will  conform  to  the  record,  and 
the  fact  of  fit  of  shoes  issued  on  such  requisitions  will  be  personally 
verified  in  every  instance  by  company  commanders  in  the  manner 
above  prescribed. 

No  shoes  will  be  issued  to  or  worn  by  enlisted  men  while  on 
duty  which  are  net  fitted  in  accordance  with  this  order. 

New  shoes  should  be  adapted  to  the  contours  of  the  feet  as 
soon  as  possible.     Shoe-sti  etchers,  with  adjustable  knobs,  to  take 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  41 

pressure  off  painful  corns  and  bunions,  are  issued  by  the  Quarter- 
mastei^s  Depaitment. 

All  shoes  should  be  properly  bioken  in  before  beginning  a 
march,  but  if  this  is  impracticable,  then  the  following  is  suggested, 
but  not  required: 

The  soldier  stands  in  his  new  shoes  in  about  23/2  inches  of  water 
for  about  five  minutes  until  the  leather  is  thoroughly  pUable  and 
moist;  he  should  then  walk  for  about  an  hour  on  a  level  suiface, 
letting  the  shoes  dry  on  his  feet,  to  the  irregularities  of  which  the 
leather  is  thus  molded  in  the  same  way  as  it  was  previously  molded 
oyer  the  shoe  last.  On  taking  the  shoes  off  a  veiy  Uttle  neaf^'s-foot 
oil  should  be  lubbed  into  the  leather  to  prevent  its  hardening  and 
cracking. 

If  it  is  desired  to  water-proof  the  shoes  at  any  time,  a  consid- 
erable amount  of  neat's-foot  oil  should  be  rubbed  into  the  leather. 

Light  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  socks  will  habitually  be  worn 
for  marching;  the  socks  will  be  large  enough  to  permit  free  move- 
ment of  the  toes,  but  not  so  loose  as  to  permit  of  wiinkhng.  Darned 
socks,  or  socks  with  holes,  will  not  be  worn  in  marching. 

Company  commanders,  by  frequent  inspections  throughout 
the  year,  will  maintain  the  feet  of  their  men  in  condition  for  proper 
marching.  They  will  cause  the  proper  trimming  of  nails,  removal 
or  paring  of  corns  and  callouses,  relief  of  painful  bunions,  treatment 
of  ingrowing  nails,  and  other  defects,  sending  serious  <»ases  to  the 
surgeon. 

Before  a  march  is  imdertaken  by  foot  troops,  company  com- 
manders will  personally  inspect  the  bare  feet  of  their  men.  While 
on  the  march  they  will  personally  see  each  day  that  their  men  wash 
their  feet  as  soon  as  possible  after  reaching  camp,  prick  and  evacuate 
blisters  and  cover  such  blisters  or  excoriations  with  zinc  oxide 
plaster,  supplied  by  the  Medical  Department,  applied  hot,  dust  the 
feet  with  the  foot  powder  supplied  by  the  Medical  Department,  and 
put  on  clean  socks.  Hereafter  an  undue  amount  of  foot  injury  and 
disability  from  shoes  will  be  regarded  as  evidence  of  inefficiency  on 
the  part  of  the  officers  concerned  and  as  causes  for  investigation. 

Post  quartermasters  will  provide  a  place  in  the  quartermaster's 
store-house  where  shoes  may -be  fitted  for  the  purpose  of  determining 
or  verifying  the  record  required  by  General  Ordeis,  No.  48,  Wax- 
Department,  1911.  For  the  purpose  of  fitting,  they  will  keep  on 
hand  at  all  times  a  complete  series  of  each  size  and  width  of  shoes 
furnished  for  issue.  Shoes  of  this  series  will  be  put  in  stock  and 
issued  before  they  become  unserviceable  and  will  be  replaced  by 
new  shces,  keeping  the  series  always  complete.  Company  com- 
manders will  report  in  writing  to  the  post  commanders  every  intance 
of  failure  to  secure  proper  shoes  for  their  commands  or  to  obtain 
(Coniintied  on  page  44-) 


4^ 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


CORRECT   METHOD  OF  ATTACfflNG  EQUIPMENT 
TO  FIELD  BELT. 

Bayonet  may  be  placed  under  haversack  if  full  of  rations. 


CORRECT  METHOD  OF  ARRANGING  ARTICLES  IN 
SHELTER  TENT  FOR  INSPECTION. 


7?A7i^ 


^^/c 


BLANKET 


W^y^^'d'mM>f^i;t^6m^  ^OA^CMO        ^         V>W^v         VSF?^ 


Office  of  Inspector-Instructor, 
National  Guard  of  Arizona. 


Campbell  Stacey, 
Instructor-Inspector. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  43 

PRESCRIBED  METHOD  OF  CARRYING  EQUIPMENTS 
ON  FIELD  BELT. 


Haversack — Hooked  in  front  of  first  cartridge  pocket  g,nd  in  rear 

of  third. 
Bayonet — Hooked  in  rear  of  first  cartridge  pocket  (left  side)  over 

haversack  (under,  if  full). 
First  Aid  Packet — Under  the  ninth  pocket. 
Intrenching  Tool — Hooked  in  rear  of  sixth  cartridge  pocket. 
Canteen — Hooked  in  rear  of  seventh  cartridge  pocket. 
Suspenders — Hooked  in  front  and  rear  of  first  and  second  and  eighth 

and  ninth  cartridge  pockets,  and  outside  of  fifth  and  sixth. 

Buckles  to  the  front  and  coming  up  under  strap  (not  over). 

Buckle  on  rear  strap  on  right  side. 
Mess  Pan,  Etc. — In  haversack. 
Tin  Cup — Will  be  carried  in  haversack. 


ARRANGEMENT  OF  EQUIPMENT  FOR  INSPECTION 
IN  SHELTER  TENT. 

Poncho— Folded  as  prescribed,  on  ground  between  pole  and  side  of 
tent. 

Blanket — Folded  as  prescribed,  on  top  of  poncho. 

Cup,  containing  Knife,  Fork,  Spoon,  and  Toothbrush — On  blanket 
next  to  front  pole,  handle  to  rear. 

Mess  Pan — Open,  on  blanket  next  to  cup,  end  of  handle  to  rear. 

Housewife — Next  to  mess  pan. 

Socks — In  rear  of  housewife  (folded) . 

Towel — Neatly  folded,  with  soap  and  comb  on  top. 

Other  Clothmg— (If  any.) 

Salt,  Sugar,  and  Coffee  Sacks — On  top  of  one  another,  but  so  ar- 
ranged that  all  will  show  next  to  clothing. 

Blanket  Roll  Straps — At  end  of  blanket  next  to  side  of  tent. 


44  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

proper  facilities  for  fitting  the  shoes  as  herein  directed.  Post  com- 
manders will  investigate  the  reasons  for,  and  be  held  responsible  as 
far  as  hes  in  their  power  for  the  rectification  of,  such  deficiencies. 

A  brief  record  of  the  number  of  such  reports  from  company 
commandeiB  and  the  reason  for  such  deficiencies  will  be  furnished  to 
inspectors  at  each  inspection  of  the  post. 

Inspections  conducted  under  the  provisions  of  Paragraph  913, 
Army  Regulations,  will  embrace  an  inquiry  into  the  manner  in  which 
this  ordei  has  been  complied  with,  and  the  report  of  inspections  will 
include  a  statement  of  aU  instances  of  failure  on  the  part  of  company 
commanders  to  secure  proper  shoes  for  their  commands  and  the 
cause  of  such  failure.     (1856626R,  A.  G.  O.) 

II.  A  new  pattern  shoe  has  been  adopted  for  the  service 
which,  when  the  old  stock  shall  have  been  exhausted,  will  supersede 
the  different  patterns  now  on  hand  in  the  Quartermaster's  Depart- 
ment. Hereafter,  until  the  old  supply  is  exhausted,  requisitions 
for  shoes  will  be  filled  from  stocK  on  hand,  irrespective  of  pattern 
or  finish.     (1856626S  A.  G.  O.) 

By  order  of  the  oecretaiy  of  War: 

Leonard  Wood, 
Official:  Major  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

Geo.  Andrews, 

The  Adjutant  General. 

I^''.  The  rection  (page  3)  o|f  Paragraph  I.,  General  Orders » 
No.  26,  War  Department,  August  16,  1912,  that  prescribes  the 
habitual  wearing  of  Ught  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  socks  for  marching, 
is  amended  to  read  as  follows: 

Light  woolen  or  heavy  woolen  stockings  will  habitually  be 
worn  for  maiching,  but  commanding  officers  of  organizp^tions  may 
authorize  the  wearing  of  Ootton  stockings  in  individual  cases  where 
the  surgeon  certifies  to  the  fact  that  the  wearing  of  such  stockings 
subserves  the  best  interests  of  the  Sjervice.  The  stocking's  will  be 
large  enough  to  permit  free  moVement  of  the  toeSj,  but  not  so  loose 
as  to  permit  of  wrinkhng.  Darned  stockings  or  stockings  with  holes 
will  not  be  worn  in  marching.     (2025438,  A.  G.  O.) 

By  order  of  the  Secretary  of  War: 

W.  W.  WOTHERSPOON, 

Official:  Major  Geneial,  Acting  Chief  of  Staff. 

Geo.  Andrews, 

The  Adjutant  General. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  45 

CHAPTER  III. 
INSTRUCTION  AND  DRILL. 

The  instruction  imparted  to  the  average  soldier  in  the  National 
Guard  is  usually  superficial,  follows  no  well-defined  scheme,  and, 
in  consequence,  the  men  do  not  receive  the  amount  of  training  that 
really  can  be  given  to  a  soldier  of  the  Guard  under  our  present 
system.  We  all  know  that  the  system  is  fundamentally  wrong, 
but  it  is  all  we  have;  so,  instead  of  damning  it,  let  us  try  to  do  the 
best  we  can  with  the  means  at  hand.  If  every  officer  in  the  Guard 
would  do  this,  it  is  skfe  to  assume  that  the  di^cipUne,  training,  and 
efficiency  of  the  National  Guard  could  be  improved  at  least  50  per 
cent  in  a  year. 

The  average  officer  of  the  National  Guard  must  first  earn  his 
living  and  then  devote  his  spare  time  to  his  company.  Frequently 
he  has  not  the  time  or  experience  to  prepare  a  systematic  coui'se  of 
instruction  for  training  his  company.  The  object  of  this  little  book 
is  to  place  in  his  hands  a  system  that  has  been  thought  out  and  put 
to  the  practical  test  in  training  a  regiment  in  the  National  Guard, 
and  has  not  been  found  wanting  in  any  esislential  particular.  If 
followed  through  exactly  as  laid  down,  the  captain  who  uses  it  will 
find  that  his  company  has  received  a  foundation  upon  which  a  solid 
military  structure  can  be  built. 

Division  of  Time  in  Company  Training. 

Drills  usually  commence  in  September  and  continue  until  June, 
when  summer  eamps  ojp  maneuvers  are  held.  Drills  are  larely  held 
until  some  time  after  sVunmer  camp.  The  National  Guard  company 
cd'mmander  can  usually  figui^  on  thirty  drills  during  this  period,  if 
his  company  drills  every  weej^.  There  are  always  events— auto- 
mobile shows,  dances,  conventions,  etc. — which,  by  utilizing  the 
armory,  interfeie  with  drilig;  parades  and  holidays  also  cut  down 
the  time.  Happy  indeed  is  the  National  Guard  captain  who  can 
confidently  figure  on  thirty  diills  before  going  to  camp. 

The  following  schedule  will  enable  you  to  divide  your  time  as 
follows: 


46  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Thirteen  recruit  and  squad  drills 13 

Seven  company  drills,  close  and  extended  order 7 

Ten  drills  preparatory  to  target  practice 10 

Total 30 

This  leaves  no  time  for  bayonet  exercise  or  first-aid  instruction. 
It  is  assumed  that  each  drill  will  be  for  1  hour — the  usual  time.  Bay- 
onet exercise  and  first-aid  instruction  can  be  given  only  if  you  can 
prolong  your  drill  3^  hour;  this  will  give  you  15  additional  hours 
of  drill;  devote  11  of  them  to  bayonet  exercise  and  4  to  first-aid 
drill,  each  drill  J^  hour. 

You  should  also  have  non-commissioned  officers'  school  at  least 
1  hour  each  week;  this  will  give  you  30  hours  for  this  purpose. 
Devote  15  hours  to  Part  IJ.,  "Infantry  Drill  Regulations,"  Para- 
graphs 350  to  707,  inclusive;  divided  into  15  lessons,  this  will  give 
you  an  average  lesson  of  24  paragraphs,  which  is  not  too  long. 

Devote  5  hours  to  map-ieading.  You  scarcely  have  time  to 
learn  map-making.  The  berft  book  qp  this  subject  that  I  know  of  is 
"Military  Map-Reading,  Field  Outpost  and  Road  Sketching,''  by 
Beach. 

Devote  10  hours  to  "Small  Arms  Firing  Manual,  U.  S.  Army," 
1913,  Paragraphs  12  to  118  and  Paragraphs  200  to  221,  inclusive; 
this  gives  you  127  paragraphs,  or  an  average  lesson  of  13  para- 
graphs, which  is  not  too  much  to  be  assimilated. 

It  may  be  noted  that  no  time  is  devoted  to  "Field  Service 
Regulations";  you  have  not  the  cime.  The  lectures  1  to  10  cover 
about  all  that  your  men  would  get  out  of  them  any  way,  and  besides, 
they  are  not  ready  for  a  study  of  them  yet.  If  you  have  the  same 
non-commissioned  officers  next  year  (forlorn  hope),  it  will  be  time  to 
take  them  up  then.  It  may  be  noted  that  this  couise  only  provides 
a  course  of  instruction  for  the  first  year.  It  has  been  the  expeiience 
of  the  writer  that  it  is  almost  useless  to  prescribe  a  comprehensive 
course  of  training  extending  over  more  than  one  year,  because  your 
men  in  the  Guard  change  so  rapidly.  If  such  a  course  is  necessary, 
and  you  have  honestly  followed  the  above  course,  you  will  have 
gained  enough  experience  to  prescribe  one  for  the  needs  of  your 
company  better  than  the  writer  can  now  do,  not  being  familiar  with 
your  special  needs  and  conditions. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  47 

It  may  be  noticed  that  no  time  is  allowed  for  pitching  the  large 
tents  or  foi  drill  in  Butts'  Manual;  you  have  not  the  time  to  waste 
on  these.  You  will  learn  to  pitch  large  tents  in  two  days  if  you  ever 
go  into  the  field,  and  Butts'  Manual  is  valuable  only  if  given  as  a 
short  daily  drill;  it  has  no  value  whatever  if  given  once  a  week.  It 
takes  a  long  time  to  leain  the  movements  correctly,  and  it  is  of  no 
value  to  you  as  a  show  drill  unle^^s  you  can  execute  the  movements 
in  cadence.  You  cannot  acquiie  this  precision  without  alighting 
more  important  woik. 

In  teaching  bayonet  exeicise,  complete  your  recruit,  squad,  or 
company  drill  fiist,  and  then  devote  the  extia  half-hour  to  bayonet 
exercise.  More  than  half  an  hour  at  a  time  devoted  to  bayonet 
drill  is  too  long.  The  men  become  tired  and  lose  inte^eet.  Fiirft-aid 
instruction  can  be  given  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  course  outlined  aboVe  does  not  allow  enough  drills  to  be- 
come perfect  in  the  movemem-s,  but  every  movement  can  be  taught, 
and  it  should  not  take  your  company  long  to  attain  a  reasonable 
degree  of  peifection  if  you  aie  ordered  into  the  field  and  can  diill 
your  men  daily.  If  you  are  so  fortunate  as  to  be  able  to  drill  your 
men  for  two  nours  a  week  or  two  drills  of  two  houis  each  per  week, 
you  will  have  ample  time  to  attain  consideiable  perfection  in  the 
execution  of  movements.  It  will  be  noted  that  the  schedule  is  very 
elastic.  The  mere  time  you  have  at  your  disposal  the  more  time 
you  can  devote  to  each  movement,  and  that  without  alte.  ing  youi 
general  scheme.  If  you  can  inculcate  a  good,  healthy  spirit  in  your 
men  and  get  them  interested  in  the  work,  you  should  not  have  very 
much  difficulty  in  getting  your  men  to  drill  three  or  foui  hours  per 
week.  I  know  of  one  company  in  the  Guard  that  had  such  a  good 
spirit  that  the  men  averaged  seven  hours^  diill  a  week  for  two 
months,  and  that  without  any  pressure  from  the  captain.  The  men 
wanted  to  learn  to  be  soldiers,  and  willingly  gave  the  time.  I  have 
steen  these  men  driU  three  and  four  hours  on  Sundaj^s. 

It  is  not  claimed  by  the  writer  that  the  following  coursp,  with 
the  time  devoted  to  each  subject,  will  develop  ciained  soldiers,  but 
it  is  believed  that  the  time  alloted  to  each  is  absolutely  the  minimum 
to  produce  any  results  at  all.  If  you  are  so  foitunate  as  to  be  able 
to  give  your  men  more  drill,  so  much  the  better;  but  I  believe  that 


48  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

if  the  course  is  followed,  your  men  will  have  received  a  good,  solid 
foundation  upon  which  a  solid  military  structure  can  be  evelitually 
built,  and  3^0 ur  men  will  have  received  more  real  s|ysteinatic  in- 
struction than  is  usually  given  the  National  Guardshian. 
Complete  Recruit  Course. 

To  be  given  alsb  to  eve'ry  officer  and  man  in  the  company  who 
has  not  previously  received  it.  It  doeh  hot  mattejr  how  long  a  man 
has  been  in  the  National  Guard  or  how  well  drilled  he  is  or  thinks  he 
is,  he  should  take  this  complete  colirse.  If  he  really  is  a  well-drilled 
man,  it  will  not  hurt  him,  and  he  will  know  his  drill  better  than  he 
did  befo're;  if  he  is  not  well  drilled,  it  naturally  follows  that  he 
needs  it. 

The  basis  of  efficiency  depends  largely  upon  the  foundation 
laid  in  recruit  drill.  Nothing  is  gained  by  slighting  this  very  im- 
portant instruction.  No  organization  can  ever  hope  to  be  efficient 
or  rise  above  mediocrity  whosfe  recruit  instruction  is  not  thorough. 

Remember,  closb-ordei  drill  is  principally  to  impart  discipline 
to  your  cotomand.  Unless  your  drill  is  very  exact  and  snappy,  and 
unless  you  correct  every  mistake  that  is  mad  e,  you  are  wasting  your 
time  absolutely. 

Extended-oWer  drill  is  to  teach  your  men  to  maneuver  in  the 
presence  of  the  enemy.  Unless  you  put  life  into  it  and  explain  the 
object  of  every  movement  and  insist  that  each  one  be  correctly 
executed,  you  are  again  wasting  your  time  and  will  never  attain 
efficiency. 

Battle  exercises  are  for  the  purpose  of  training  officers  and  men 
in  battle  tactics;  they  must  be  w^ell  thought  out  beforehand,  must 
be  handled  intelligently,  and  must  always  teach  a  military  lesson. 

First  DriIll. 

Time,  two  hours. 

Issue  armsj,  equipment,  and  uniform.  Don't  take  it  for  granted 
that  every  man  is  properly  uniformed  and  equipped;  ins'pect  him 
and  find  out,  down  to  the  sight  cover  and  oiler,  brush,  and  thong 
in  the  butt  of  his  rifle,  whether  he  is  properly  equipped  or  not. 

Instruct  men  how  to  salute,  who  to  salute,  and  when  to  salute. 
(See  Paragraphs  58  and  758,  I.  D.  R.) 

Teach  men  how  to  assemble  equipment;  this  means  that  they 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  49 

must  know  how  the  suspenders  go  on  the  belt  and  where  each  article 
of  the  equipment  should  be  carried.  The  U.  S.  Ordnance  Depart- 
ment issues  a  pamphlet,  "Description  of  the  Infantry  Equipment," 
1910,  also  one  describing  the  infantry  equipment,  old  pattern. 
You  can  get  thes'e  by  writing  for  them  to  the  Chief  of  Oidnance, 
U.  S.  Army.     Get  them. 

Men  should  be  taught  how  to  pitch  the  shelter  tent.  Nails  can 
be  driven  in  the  armory  floor  to  serve  as  tent-pins. 

.  Men  must  be  taught  how  to  make  up  the  blanket-roll,  if  you 
have  the  old-style  equipment.  (See  appendix  to  first  chapter.)  The 
manual  referred  to  above  will  show  you  how  to  pack  the  new  model 
equipment. 

The  first  question  which  will  naturally  arise  in  your  mind  is, 
'•Can  this  instruction  be  given  in  two  hours?"  Yes,  it  can  and  has 
been  repeatedly  given  in  that  time;  but,  in  order  to  do  this,  you 
must  have  system. 

Let  us  assume  that  you  have  a  squad  of  eight  men  to  receive 
this  instruction  or  first  lesson.  The  first  sergeant  will  assign  lockers 
to  these  men  and  give  them  a  s  lip  of  paper  on  which  is  the  man's 
company  numbejr.  (Locker  should  bear  this  same  number.)  The 
men  then  report  to  the  quartermaster  sergeant,  who  will  fit  and 
issue  uniforms  to  them.  They  then  pass  to  the  artificer,  who  will 
issue  equipment  and  arms,  taking  up  the  slip  of  paper  given  to  the 
men  by  the  first  sergeant.  (This  slip  indicates  to  the  artificer  the 
number  of  the  equipment  that  he  will  issue  to  each  man.)  Re- 
member, each  article  of  equipment  should  be  marked  with  a  numbei . 
For  instance,  the  company  number  given  to  a  recruit  is  No.  12. 
Every  article  of  equipment  issued  to  him  should  bear  this  number-  - 
shelter  tent  half,  blanket,  haversack,  canteen,  etc.  If  your  equip- 
ment is  marked  in  this  manner,  it  will  not  get  lost  or  misplaced. 
The  men  then  pass  to  a  sergeant,  who  will  teach  them  to  assemble 
their  equipment.  He  then  teaches  them  to  pitch  the  shelter  tent. 
Nails  can  be  driven  in  floor  for  pegs.  They  are  then  taught  to  make 
up  the  blariket-roll.  When  the  rolls  are  made  up,  the  men  are  taken 
to  their  pegs  in  the  company-room,  shown  how  to  hang  the  roll  and 
equipment  on  them,  and  are  then  taken  to  the  armory  floor  for  drill; 
here  they  will  be  taught  how  to  wear  the  uniform,  how  to  salute,  etc. 


50  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

After  this  drill,  they  are  shown  how  to  place  their  uniform,  etc.,  in 
their  lockers  in  a  neat  and  uniform  manner. 
Second  Dri!ll. 

The  squad  will  be  assembled  in  prbper  uniform  and  inspected 
to  see  that  the  men  are  wearing  the  uniform  properly,  that  their 
leggings  are  on  straight,  and  that  every  button  is  in  place  and 
buttoned,  etc.  Hat-cofds  must  be  habitually  worn  and  sewed  to 
the  hat.  Hats  must  be  worn  straight  and  properly  creased.  After 
this  inspection,  proceed  with  the  drill.  (Paiagrkphs  1  to  7  and  50 
to  70,  inclusive.) 

In  teaching  the  halt,  it  will  be  found  that  better  results  will  be 
gotten  if  the  pifeparatory  command,  "Squad,"  is  given  when  the 
left  foot  strikes  the  ground;  give  the  command  "«Halt''  when  this 
foot  s'trikes  the  ground  again.  Men  advance  and  plant  the  right  foot 
and  halt.  In  teaching  rebruits— and,  in  fact,  in  company  drill— 
you  will  always  get  better  results  if  you  accustom  the  men  to  re- 
ceiving the  prepariatory  command  when  the  left  foot  strikes  the 
ground;  give  the  command  of  execution  when  this  foot  strikes  the 
ground  again.  The  movement  will  theii  be  executed  in  a  prompt 
and  uniform  manner.  At  least  half  of  the  poor  drills  are  due  to  the 
manner  in  which  the  instructor  gives  his  commandsl  If  you  have 
a  unifohn  system  in  giving  commands  and  the  men  become  accus- 
tomed to  it,  you  will  always  get  bettel  resVilts  than  by  giving  the 
commands  in  any  old  manner. 

Don't  allow  men  to  drill  in  shirts;  make  them  drill  in  blouses. 
DrilUng  in  shirts  in  the  armory  makes  men  slouchy  and  careless. 
Under  no  circumstances  sihould  men  be  allowed  to  drill  in  civilian 
clothes^.  Now,  don't  slight  this  drill;  make  your  instruction  thor- 
ough, and  do  not  advance  men  to  the  thiid  drill  until  they  are  rea- 
sonably proficient  in  the  second,  and  so  on.  You  will  save  time 
in  the  ejnd. 

Recruits  should  be  required  to  drill  at  least  twice  a  week,  three 
times  if  possible,  and  every  night  for  the  fii*st  two  weeks  would  be 
better.  New  men  are  enthusiastic  and  anxious  to  learn;  make  the 
most  of  this  while  it  lasts'.  If  recruits  only  drill  once  a  week,  they 
advance  so  slowly  that  they  soon  become  discouraged  and  lose 
interest  in  the  drill  and  in  their  organization.    It  is  better  to  have 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  51 

one  instructor  for  each  batch  o-f  recruits.    If  you  change  instructors 
frequently,  your  recruits  will  not  learn  nearly  so  fast.    The  first 
lecture  will  be  delivered  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
Third  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform  and  inspected  as  in 
the  second  drill.  Review  s'aluting  and  movements  in  second  diill, 
then  proceed  with  third  drill.     (Paragraphs  71  to  73,  inclusive.) 

In  marching  by  the  right  flank,  be  careful  to  give  the  prepara- 
toiy  command  when  the  light  foot  strikeis  the  giound  and  the  com- 
mand of  execution  when  the  right  foot  strikes  the  ground  again. 
The  men  advance  and  plant  the  left  foot,  turn  to  the  right,  and  step 
off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  right  foot. 

If  marching  by  the  left  flanlc,  give  the  commands  on  the  left 
foot.  The  men  advance  and  plant  the  right  foot,  turn  to  the  left, 
and  step  off  in  the  new  direction  with  the  left  foot. 

»When  marching  to  the  reai,  give  the  preparatory  command 
when  the  right  foot  st/ikes  the  ground  and  the  command  of  execu- 
tion when  the  right  foot  strikes  the  ground  again.  Men  advance 
and  plant  the  left  foot,  face  about  to  the  right,  and  step  off  promptly 
with  the  left  foot. 

Give  your  commands  in  this  manner:  "By  the  right  flank, 
March;  One,  two."  "By  the  left  flank,  March;  One,  two."  "To 
the  rear,  March;  One,  two,  three."  If  this  method  is  followed, 
men  can  be  taught  to  execute  these  movements  without  hesitating 
or  losing  the  cadence — a  common  error.  When  the  men  are  well 
drilled,  the  counts  after  the  commands  would,  of  course^  be  omitted. 

You  must  insist  upon  your  men  standing  absolutely  still  in  ranks. 
They  must  keep  their  head  and  eye^  straight  to  the  front,  their 
hands  down,  and  the  thumb  along  the  seam  of  the  breeches.  Insist 
upon  these  things.  They  all  go  for  discipline  and  smartness.  When 
you  correct  a  man  in  the  rear  rank,  don't  allow  half  of  the  front  rank 
to  turn  around  to  see  what  you  are  doing.  Make  them  stand  a  till 
in  ranks.  There  is  only  one  way  to  play  this  game,  and  that  is 
the  right  w^ay. 

The  second  lecture  will  be  delivered  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
Fourth  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform  and  inspected,  as  in 


52  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

previous  drills.  They  will  be  taught  the  names  of  the  principal 
parts  of  the  rifle;  not  the  intricate  parts,  but  just  the  principal 
parts',  such  as  butt,  barrel,  bolt,  sights,  trigger  guard,  etc.  They 
should  be  given  a  short  talk  upon  the  necessity  of  keeping  the  rifle 
clean  and  in  a  serviceable  condition  at  all  times  and  they  should  be 
given  some  idea  of  how  this  is  done.  Don't  give  them  too  much,  or 
they  will  not  get  any  of  it.  Then  proceed  with  the  drill.  (Paia- 
graphs  74  to  84,  inclusive.)  The  instructor  should  carefully  study 
thesle  paragriaphs  before  going  out  to  drill,  no  matter  how  well  he 
thinks  he  knows  the  drill. 

Impress  upon  the  men  the  fact  that  in  most  m^ovements  in  the 
manual  of  arms  there  is  a  right  angle  somewhere;  see  that  they  get 
it.  For  example,  in  port  arms  and  right  shoulder  arms,  the  right 
arm  forms  a  right  angle  at  the  elbow.  In  port  arms  a  common 
error  is  to  have  the  rifle  cross  opposite  the  left  shoulder,  instead  of 
opposite  the  junction  of  the  neck  with  the  shoulder.     Watch  this. 

In  coming  to  the  port  or  right  shoulder,  the  rifle  should  be 
thrown  up  smaitly  and  grasped  with  both  hands  simultaneously  or 
nearly  so.  The  common  error  is  to  raise  the  piece  with  the  right 
arm,  instead  of  throwing  it  up  as  prescribed. 

In  coming  to  the  order,  the  piece  must  be  lowered  gently  to  the 
ground,  and  not  jammed  down.  There  should  be  scarcely  any  noise 
made.  The  rifle  is  carried  to  the  right  side  smartly  and  then  low- 
ered gently  to  the  ground.  This  does  not  interfere  with  carrying 
the  left  hand  to  the  side  smartly. 

In  executiag  the  manual,  the  men  must  be  impressed  with  the 
fact  that  they  must  not  move  their  heads.  In  coming  up  to  the 
port  and  right  shoulder,  the  rifle  mus^t  be  grasped  and  held  firmly 
with  both  hands.  A  common  error  is  to  allow  the  mu^ale  to  dip 
down  and  to  the  left,  sometimes  striking  the  man  on  the  left. 

Make  your  men  stand  still  in  ranks. 

The  third  lecture  will  be  dehvered  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
FiB-TH  DriIl. 

Men  wiU  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform  and  inspected,  as  in 
previous  drills.  Review  previous  drills.  Question  men  in  regard 
to  names  of  parts  of  the  lifle.     (Paragraphs  85  to  100,  inclusive.) 

In  parade  rest  the  common  error  is  to  place  the  right  foot  in 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  53 

rear  of  the  left;  this  is  wrong;  the  right  foot  is  diawn  6  inches 
straight  to  the  rear.  In  coming  to  the  parade  rest,  the  piece  must 
be  turned  on  its  toe,  not  on  the  heel.  In  order  to  do  this,  incline  the 
rifle  slightly  forward  when  coming  to  parade  rest.  In  resuming  the 
order,  the  piece  is  also  turned  on  its  toe. 

Men  should  be  taught  how  to  carry  the  piece  at  the  balance. 
This  form  of  trail  arms  should  be  habitually  used  in  extended-order 
diill. 

In  fixing  and  unfixing  bayonet,,  the  muzzle  of  the  rifle  must  be 
kept  in  place  in  front  and  center  of  body.  Raipe  the  left  elbow  to 
get  room  for  drawing  or  returning  the  bayonet.  The  common 
error  made  is  to  extend  the  left  arm  to  its  full  lejigth.  Remember, 
in  fixing  and  unfixing  bayonet  you  come  to  a  complete  parade  rest 
first.  The  common  error  made  is  to  shght  this  movement;  men 
do  not  come  to  the  complete  parade  rest  before  fixing  and  unfixing 
bayonet. 

In  coming  to  the  position  of  charge  bayonet,  the  most  common 
mistakes  are:  weight  of  body  not  equally  supported  by  both  legs; 
one  knee  bent  more  than  the  other;  point  of  bayonet  too  high; 
rifle  not  far  enough  to  the  front.  Most  men  get  the  right  hand 
opposite  the  right  hip;  this  is  wrong;  the  right  hand  must  be  well 
to  the  frjont  and  on  a  line  with  the  left  hip.  Study  the  illustration 
in  the  '^ Manual  of  the  Bayonet." 

A  very  snappy  way  of  executing  inspection  arms  is  as  follows 
and  ddes  away  with  the  ragged  manned  in  which  this  movement  is 
usually  executed:  (1)  Port  (2)  Arms.  (3)  In.spection  [place  the 
right  hand  on  the  bolt  handle]  (4)  Arms  [open  the  bolt  smartly]. 
(5)  Port  [close  the  bolt  cimartly]  (6)  Arms  [pull  the  trigger].  After 
a  few  drills,  your  company  will  be  able  to  do  this  like  one  man,  and 
it  is  a  very  pretty  and  effective  movement.  It  is  valuable,  because 
it  teaches  men  precision  and  smartness;  the  other  way  teaches 
them  to  be  careless,  as  it  is  next  to  impossible  to  execute  this  move- 
ment together. 

Make  your  men  stand  still  in  ranks  and  keep  their  hands  down 
and  their  heads  still. 

The  fourth  lecture  will  be  delivered  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 


54  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Sixth  Dri^l. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  propQi'  uniform  and  inspected,  as  in 
previous  drilL-. 

This  drill  will  be  entirely  devoted  to  a  review  of  aU  previous 
drills.  Be  careful  to  correct  every  mistake  that  is  made.  Stop  the 
drill  and  make  the  correction  at  once.  Remember,  simply  giving 
commands  is  not  drilling  men.  You  must  correct  every  mistake. 
I  have  seen  National  Guard  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
stand  in  the  center  of  the  armory  floor  and  give  commands  to  a 
squad  or  company  drilling  and  never  correct  a  single  mistake. 
They  thought  that  this  was  drill,  but  it  was  not.  I  know  of  nothing 
that  will  ruin  a  conmaand  quicker  than  this  practice.. 

It  is  better  to  be  able  to  do  four  things  correctly  than  it  is  to 
do  twelve  and  none  of  them  right.  Don^t  delude  yourself  into  the 
belief  that  you  will  become  efficient  by  imparting  superficial  in- 
struction to  your  men.  You  may  think  that  perfection  can  be  ob- 
tained by  repetition,  but  you  will  not  attain  it  unless  your  instruc- 
tion is  thorough,  careful,  and  precise.  Go  slow  at  first,  and  you  will 
be  able  to  go  faster  later  on;  go  too  fast  at  first,  and  you  will  never 
advance  beyond  mediocrity  and  will  never  be  really  efficient. 

Remember,  close  order  is  for  discipline,  and  is  useless  for  this 
purpose  unless  exact;  extended-order  drill  is  to  teach  your  men  to 
maneuver,  and  is  worthless  unless  snappy.  Battle  exercises  must 
be  carefully  thought  out  and  must  always  teach  a  military  lesson. 

The  fifth  lecture  will  be  read  to  the  men  after  this  drilK 
General  Remarks  on  Squad  Drill. 

Squad  diill  is  geneially  neglected  in  the  National  Guard  be- 
cause its  importance  is  not  understood. 

The  squad  is  the  unit  upon  which  the  entiie  system  of  close- 
and  extended-order  drill  is  based.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  your 
squad  drill  must  be  thorough  and  exact;  you  can  do  nothing  unlese 
this  is  done. 

You  can  take  sixteen  squads  that  nevei  had  a  company  drill, 
but  know  sjquad  diill  thoroughly,  and  teach  them  company  drill  in 
three  houis;  but  you  could  not  teach  these  same  men  company  dril  1 
in  threjB  months  if  they  did  not  know  squad  drill.  Do  you  doubt 
this?    Wejl,  let  ussiee. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).   '  55 

Your  company  is  in  line.  Give  squads  right,  or  left,  or  right 
about — ^what  is  it  but  squad  drill  and  dressing  on  the  guide?  Take 
right  or  left  front  into  Une,  for  instance.  The  corporal  of  the  first 
squad  commands  "Forward,"  and  takes  his  squad  forwaid  until  the 
captain  commands  ''Halt."  All  the  other  squad-leaders  command 
"Right  obUque,"  then  Forward,  march,"  and  "Squad  halt"  when 
they  arrive  on  the  new  line — ^what  is  this  but  squad  drill?  On  right 
into  line  is  similar.  In  extended-order  drill  it  is  the  same  thing : 
the  corporal  commands  ''Follow  me,"  and  leads  his  squad  to  its 
place,  when  he  deploys  it.  As  far  as  the  squads  are  concerned,  it  is 
all  squad  drill,  so  you  see  the  men  mus't  know  squad  drill  thoioughly. 

Every  minute  silent  on  aquad  drill  will  save  you  twenty  latei 
on  when  learning  company  diill.  You  will  find  that  this  statement 
is  not  overdrawn. 

You  must  have  intelligent  men  for  corporals  or  squad-leadeis. 
Don't  waste  time  o;n  any  man  who  cannot  thinK  quickly.  If  your 
corporals  are  efficient,  your  squads  will  be  efficient,  and  it  follows 
naturally  that  you  will  have  an  efficient  company. 

Do  your  heutenants  know  squad  diill  thoroughly?  Put  them 
in  the  ranks,  give  them  a  squad,  and  see.  I  have  found  this  method 
excellent.  You  can't  teach  drill  until  you  know  it  youi-s'elf,  and 
the  best  place  to  learn  drill  is  in  the  ranks.  I  do  not  mean  to  let 
them  drill  a  squad  separately,  although  it  is  a  good  thing  to  let 
them  do  this  also;  but  what  I  mean  is,  have  them  act  as  corpoial 
in  the  ranks  in  company  drill. 

Squad  drill  should  always  be  under  arms. 

Until  your  men  know  the  School  of  the  Soldier  and  the  Manual 
of  Arms  they  are  not  ready  for  squad  drill. 

Don't  hurry.    The  moie  haste  the  less  speed. 

Remember,  when  anything  happens  to  the  corporal  the  private 
who  has  the  most  seivice  immediately  assumes  chaige.  This  rule  is 
general.  If  the  captain  wants  any  other  man  to  take  charge  of  the 
squad,  he  will  designate  him;  otherwise  the  senior  private  assumes 
charge  without  waiting  for  express  orders  to  do  so. 

Remember,  when  any  body  of  armed  men  is  formed,  the  first 
thing  that  is  done  after  the  command  "Fall  in"  is  given  is  to  inspect 
the  pieces  to  see  if  any  are  loaded.    Remember,  the  last  thing  that 


56  COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 

is  done  before  dismissing  any  body  of  armed  men  is  to  inspect  the 
pieces'.  This  rule  is  general,  and  this  inspection  must  never  be 
omitted. 

Teach  the  rear-rank  men  to  get  theii  distance  by  raising  the 
rifle,  muzzle  against  back  of  fiont-rank  men  and  comb  of  the  atock 
3  inches  in  front  of  the  belt  buckle  of  reai-rank  men.  From  the 
muzzle  of  the  rifle  to  the  comb  of  the  stock  is  about  37  inches. 

In  dressing,  watch  the  left  elbow.  The  common  error  is  to  let 
it  incline  to  the  rear,  instead  of  keeping  it  parallel  to  your  front. 

Don't  neglect  teaching  taking  intervals  and  distances;  it  teaches 
a  mauxwhere  he  belongs  in  the  squad  better  than  any  other  drill. 

Make  the  rear-rank  men  cover  the  front-rank  men  accurately. 
A  common  error  is  not  to  do  this. 

Seventh  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  and  in- 
spected, as  in  previous  drills.     (Paragraphs  101  to  115,  inclusive.) 

The  instructor  should  read  carefully  the  Drill  Regulations  ex- 
plaining how  arms  are  stacked,  no  matter  how  well  he  knows  it. 

The  sixth  lecture  \^  ill  be  read  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
Eighth  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  andi  in- 
spected,  as  in  previous  drills.     (Paragraphs  116  to  122,  inclusive.) 

COMMON  MISTAKES. 

In  turning  on  the  fixed  pivot,  pivot-man  does  not  turn  at  once; 
usually  waits  for  other  men  to  come  around.  He  must  turn  90  de- 
grees at  once  as  soon  as  the  command  "March"  is  given,  without  ref- 
erence to  movements  of  any  other  man. 

Rear-rank  men  usually  execute  movements  the  same  as  front- 
rank  men;  this  is  wrong.  The  movements  of  the  rear  rank  are  en- 
tirely different  from  those  of  the  front  rank.     Study  the  book. 

No.  3  or  No.  2,  as  the  case  may  be,  is  follow^ed  in  column  by 
Nos.  2  and  1  or  3  and  4;  this  is  rarely  done  correctly. 

Squad  right  about  is  simply  squad  right  twice.  The  second 
change  is  not  made  until  the  man  on  the  marching  flank  gets  up  on 
the  line,  then  the  pivot  turns  again.  Usually  the  pivot-man  does 
not  wait,  but  turns  too  soon.  In  turning  on  the  moving  pivot,  the 
pivot-man  usually  marks  time  in  his  place  for  two  or  three  steps,. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  57 

.  instead  of  immediately  marching  in  the  new  direction  at  half-step. 
The  rear  rank  in  this  case  must  turn  on  the  same  ground  and  in  the 
■  same  manner  as  the  front  rank. 

Remember,  in  halting  from  oblique  march  men  halt  faced  to  the 
front;  they  do  not  halt  and  then  face,  but  halt  faced  to  the  front. 
Give  the  command  ''Half'  when  the  left  foot  strikes  the  ground,  and 
men  should  have  no  difficulty  in  halting  correctly  faced  to  the  front. 
They  advance  and  plant  the  right  foot  and  the  half  face  is  made  in 
biinging  up  the  left  foot. 

The  seventh  lecture  will  be  read  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
Ninth  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  and  in- 
spected, as  in  previous  drills. 

Review  of  seventh  and  eighth  drills. 

Watch  for  and  correct  all  mistakes.  Watch  for  the  very 
common  mistake  of  men  commencing  to  come  to  the  order  before 
the  halt  is  completed.  You  can  cori-ect  this  tendency  if  you  teach 
the  men  to  halt  and  come  to  the  order  in  five  counts.  For  example : 
''Squad  halt — one,  two"  (this  completes  the  halt);  "One,  two, 
three"  (this  for  the  Manual).  Give  the  command  "Halt"  when  the 
left  foot  strikes  the  ground.  They  then  advance  and  plant  the  right 
foot — this  is  one;  they  then  bring  the  left  foot  alongside  of  the  right 
— ^this  is  two;  thej^  then  come  to  the  order — one,  two,  three. 

The  eighth  lecture  will  be  read  to  the  men  aftei  this  drill. 
Tenth  DriIl. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  and  in- 
spected, as  in  previous  drills.     (Paragraphs  123  to  132,  inclusive.) 

Some  time  should  be  devoted  to  teaching  the  squad  to  follow 
the  corporal  when  he  commands,  "Follow  me."  Lead  them  about 
the  armory  floor  in  every  direction  and  without  further  commands 
after  this  command  has  been  given. 

Note  that  in  deploying  as  skirmishers  in  the  squad  the  men 
always  get  to  their  places  on  the  run.  This  rule  is  general.  The 
captain  may  command,  "As  skirmishers.  Guide  right."  The  com- 
pany will  execute  this  movement  in  quick  time  and  the  squads  will 
move  to  their  places  in  quick  time;  but  when  the  corporal  com- 


58  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

mands,  "As  skirmishers,  March,"  the  men  habitually  deploy  on  the 
run.     This  is  not  usually  done;  insist  upon  it. 

Note  the  deployment  and  assembly  are  made  on  the  corporal. 

The  ninth  lecture  will  be  read  to  the  men  after  this  drill. 
Eleventh  Drill. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  and  in- 
spected, as  in  previous  drills.     (Paragraphs  133  to  145,  inclusive.) 

Note  that  in  the  position  of  aim  the  right  elbow  is  at  the  height 
of  the  right  shoulder.  The  common  mistake  made  is  to  have  the 
elbow  5  or  6  inches  below  the  shoulder;  this  will  cause  the  piece  to 
be  canted.  Watch  this  and  make  the  men  keep  the  right  elbow  up 
where  it  belongs.  Note  that  in  the  position  of  aim  the  man  first 
makes  a  half  right  face  and  then  carries  the  right  foot  about  1  foot 
to  the  right;  this  will  bring  the  right  heel  about  1  foot  to  the  rear 
and  about  3  inches  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel.  Common  mistakes 
made  are  to  place  the  right  foot  in  rear  of  the  left  and  to  retain  the 
left  foot  in  place;  if  this  is  done,  it  places  the  men  in  a  constrained 
position.  You  must  insist  that  men  make  the  complete  half  right 
face  before  they  move  the  right  foot  to  the  right. 
Twelfth  DriIl. 

Men  will  be  assembled  in  proper  uniform,  under  arms,  and  in- 
spected, as  in  previous  drills.  (Paragraphs  146  to  168,  inclusive.) 
Give  careful  instruction  in  Paragraphs  152  to  158,  inclusive. 

Teach  men  to  fire  from  windows,  doorways,  from  behind  boxes 
to  i-epriesent  intrenchments,  from  behind  chairs  to  lepresent  sandbags 
and  loop-holes,  etc.  If  you  can  secure  six  or  seven  gunny-sacks 
filled  with  earth,  so  much  the  better  for  this  instruction.  Make  this 
instruction  thorough,  and  be  careful  that  each  man  understands 
exactly  what  you  are  trying  to  teach  him. 

Read  the  tenth  lecture  to  the  men  after  this  diill. 
Thirteenth  Dri^ll. 

General  review  of  all  previous  drills.    Time,  two  hours. 

Watch  for  and  correct  all  mistakes. 

If  the  pieceding  drills  have  been  thorough  and  your  men  are 
reasonably  intelligent,  they  will  now  be  able  to  take  their  places  in 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  59 

the  ranks  of  the  company  without  getting  lost  or  "balling  up"  the 
formation. 

This  completes  the  lecruit  instruction. 

In  some  cases  it  may  be  found  necessary  to  repeat  one  or  more 
of  the  drills  for  the  benefit  of  the  men  who  learn  slowly.  However, 
don't  hold  the  entire  squad  back  on  account  of  one  or  two  men,  as  it 
kills  their  interest. 

General  Remarks  on  the  Preceding  Drills. 

The  instructor  should  always  read  over  the  drill  in  the  Drill 
Regulations  before  he  goes  out  to  drill  the  squad.  This  is  very 
necessary. 

Don't  detail  a  man  to  drill  recruits  who  cannot  talk  and  explain 
things  clearly.     Don't  detail  a  man  who  is  not  well  drilled  himself. 

Don't  allow  the  instructor  to  waste  time  at  rest.  If  you  want 
to  rest  the  men,  change  the  movement  or  review  previous  drills. 
Your  time  is  very  short;  make  the  most  of  it. 

Don't  be  afraid  of  giving  the  men  a  hard  drill;  recruits  joining 
the  Guard  expect  it,  and  are  disappointed  and  lose  interest  if  the 
drills  are  not  sharp  and  snappy. 

No  man  should  be  allowed  to  take  his  place  in  the  ranks  of  the 
company  until  he  has  had  the  complete  recruit  course.  Don't 
violate  this  rule;  you  will  never  get  anywherje  if  you  do,  and  your 
company  can  never  become  eflficient.  You  can't  teach  men  these 
things  in  the  ranks  of  the  company;  they  must  be  learned  in  the 
squad. 

The  object  of  the  lectures  is  to  give  the  men  some  theory  along 
with  their  practical  instruction  and  to  impress  upon  them  the  fact 
that  there  is  more  to  their  business  than  simply  learning  the  move- 
ments laid  down  in  Part  I.  of  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations.  It 
is  not  expected  that  every  recruit  will  get  every  point  brought 
out  in  the  lectures,  but  the  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers 
will  get  these  points  thoroughly  impressed  upon  their  minds  in 
drilling  recruits,  and  this  will  be  an  enormous  gain  in  efficiency 
in  itself. 

The  company  commander  should  have  the  cards  on  "Rules  of 
the  Game,"  ** Sentinels'  Outpost  Orders,"  and  "Instructions  for 


60  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Patrols'' printed  in  convenient  size  to  be  carried  in  the  pocket,  on 
heavy  cardboard,  and  these  cards  should  be  issued  to  every  man  in 
the  company  when  the  corresponding  lecture  is  read.  You  will 
find  that  you  will  impart  an  enormous  amount  of  military  informa- 
tion to  your  men  in  this  simple  manner.  You  get  them  to  thinking 
and  talking  among  themselves,  and  when  you  have  attained  this, 
improvement  is  sure  to  follow  and  be  rapid. 

One  word  more.  All  National  Guard  troops  are  careless  in 
saluting.  The  salute  is  one  of  the  most  important  aids  to  enforcing 
discipline.  Insist  that  your  men  salute  properly  and  smartly,  and 
never  overlook  the  slightest  dereliction  in  this  matter.  If  your 
recruits  are  properly  instructed  in  saluting,  you  should  never  have 
any  serious  trouble  in  enforcing  the  salute.  Offic^ers  must,  however 
insist  upon  the  salute  being  rendered  at  all  times,  and  must  be  care- 
ful to  return  properly  the  salute  of  enlisted  men.  Nothing  is  so  de- 
moralizing to  a  command  as  having  officers  negligent  and  careless 
in  returning  the  salutes  of  enlisted  men.  Officers  must  salute  each 
other;  this  is  important  also.  A  visiting  officer  invariably  judges 
the  discipline  of  your  command  by  the  manner  in  which  they  salute  > 
and  quite  properly  too,  because  I  know  of  nothing  that  shows  the 
standard  of  discipUne  in  an  organization  more  clearly  than  this. 

See  first  part  of  this  chapter  in  regard  to  time  devoted  to 
teaching  recruits  bayonet  exercise. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  61 


CHAPTER  IV. 

COMPANY  DRILL. 

FiteiST  Drill. 

Paragraphs  159  to  175,  inclusive.  (Inspect  the  company,  as 
in  recruit  driU.) 

The  captain  and  heutenants  should  study  carefully  (before 
commencing  company  drill)  Paragraphs  159  to  175,  inclusive.  Now 
I  don't  mean  that  they  should  read  this  part  superficially;  I  mean 
that  they  should  read  and  study  these  paragraphs  carefully  before 
attempting  company  drill. 

The  diagrams  on  page  46  should  be  memorized  so  that  there 
will  never  be  any  question  in  your  mind  as  to  where  any  man  in  the 
company  belongs.  Remember,  each  man  has  a  definite  place  in 
line  and  in  column;  see  that  he  stays  there.  The  most  common 
error  is  to  sprinkle  men  along  in  the  line  of  file-closers,  and  generally 
they  do  not  know  where  they  belong. 

Your  first  company  drill  should  be  devoted  to  forming  your 
company  properly  and  carefully  explaining  to  each  man  exactly 
where  he  belongs,  both  in  line  and  in  column  of  squads  and  column 
of  platoons.  Don't  attempt  to  maneuver  in  this  fii^st  drill.  Devote 
the  entire  hour  to  teaching  officers  and  men  where  they  belong  and 
how  they  get  there.  You  will  find  that  it  will  be  time  well  spent. 
,  When  the  company  is  first  formed,  squads  and  platoons  are 
given  a  number.  These  designations  are  permanent,  no  matter 
where  the  squad  or  platoon  is  or  how  it  is  facing;  that  is,  the  second 
squad  is  always  the  second  squad  and  the  fourth  platoon  is  always 
the  fourth  platoon.  Y"ou  can  maneuver  your  company  so  that  you 
can  place  the  first  and  fourth  platoons  in  the  center  of  the  company, 
but  they  are  always  the  first  and  fourth  platoons  and  will  be  des- 
ignated as  such  in  commands. 

Second  Drill. 

Paragraphs  176  to  186,  inclusive.  (Inspect  the  company  as 
[n  recruit  diill.) 

Note  that  in  company  right  the  right-flank  man  is  the  pivot 


62  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

and  that  the  guide  steps  back  on  the  line.  In  company  right  turn 
the  guide  is  the  pivot  and  initiates  the  turn.  A  common  mistake  is 
to  execute  both  movements  in  the  same  manneyr.  Watch  this.  In 
company  right  the  right-flank  man  must  turn  ninety  degrees  to  the 
right  at  the  command  "March,"  and  not  wait  for  the  man  on  his  left. 
Caxition  the  left  flank  of  the  company  not  to  increasfe  the  cadence 
or  length  of  step;  you  will  wait  for  them. 

In  right  turn  see  that  the  guide  turns  at  once  at  the  command 
* 'March"  and  takes  up  the  half-step  without  waiting  for  anyone  else. 
The  usual  error  is  to  turn  to  the  right  too  slowly,  and  mark  time 
for  the  first  two  or  three  steps,  and  wait  for  the  two  or  three  men 
on  his  left  to  get  up  on  the  line  before  he  advances. 

Note  that  in  company  right  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  squad 
executes  the  movement  in  a  different  manner  from  any  of  the  other 
squads.  All  the  other  men  in  the  lear  rank  move  straight  to  the 
front  foui  paces  before  they  obUque  to  the  light. 

Note  that  in  right  turn  the  rear  rank  executes  the,  movement  on 
the  same  giound  as  the  front  rank  and  in  a  similar  manner. 

Third  Drill. 

Repeat  second  drill.  Watch  carefully  for  mistakes  and  correct 
each  one.  Never  imder  any  circumstances  fail  to  correct  a  mistake 
as  sbon  as  made. 

Fourth  Drill. 
'  Paragraphs  187  to  193,  inclusive.     (Inspect  the  company  as  in 
previous  drills.) 

Note*  that  the  leader  of  each  unit  gives  certain  commands. 
This  means  squad  leaders  if  the  company  is  in  column  of  squads, 
and  platoon  commanders  if  in  column  of  platoons.  Require  your 
squad  and  platoon  commanders  to  give  their  commands  so  that 
they  can  be  distinctly  heard  by  you,  and  see  that  the  commands  are 
given  promptly. 

Note  that  the  movement  is  executed  at  the  command  "March" 
given  by  the  captain.  The  leader  of  the  first  unit  does  not  give  the 
command  * 'March";  his  unit  executed  the  movement  at  the  com- 
mand "March"  given  by  the  captain.  The  leaders  of  all  other  units 
give  the  commands  "Right  turn"  and  "March"  when  it  is  time  for 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  63 

their  units  to  turn.  The  leading  unit  halts  at  the  command  "Com- 
'  pany  halt,"  given  by  the  captain.  Its  leader  then  commands  **Right 
dress."  The  other  units  are  halted  by  their  leaders  when  they  arrive 
on  the  line.  They  also  give  the  command  ''Right  dress."  The 
command  "Front"  is  given  by  the  captain  after  the  last  unit  has 
arrived  on  the  Une  and  has  dressed.  His  post  in  dressing  the  com- 
pany is  two  pja'ces  from  the  right  or  left  flank,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Caution  units  in  rear  of  the  first  not  to  try  to  catch  up  with 
the  first  unless  the  command  "Double  time"  has  been  given.  If  the 
movement  is  executed  while  marching  in  double  time,  its  execution 
issimilai  to  the  movement  in  quick  time. 

In  the  movement  front  into  line  from  column  of  squads  or 
platoons,  the  previous  remarks  in  regard  to  the  movwnent  on  right 
into  line  apply. 

See  that  the  leaders  of  subdivisions  give  their  commands 
promptly.  The  most  common  mistake  made  is  that  corporals  fail 
to  give  the  commands  "Halt"  and  "March."  They  usually  give  the 
preparatory  command,  but  fail  to  give  the  command  of  execution. 
Another  common  error  is  that  subdivisions  do  not  wait  for  the  com- 
mands of  their  leaders.  Insist  that  they  make  no  movement  until 
they  get  the  commands  of  their  corporal  or  platoon  commander. 

Don't  alloV  the  units  in  rear  to  catch  up  with  the  leading  units. 
The  distance  between  squads  must  be  maintained  until  they  reach 
the  line.  These  movements  are  called  "successive  formations." 
The  units  are  supposed  to  arrive  on  the  line  in  succession. 

Another  point:  Don't  allow  leaders  of  subdivisions  to  give  the 
command  for  dressing  until  their  units  have  completed  the  halt  and 
order  arms.  If  they  give  the  command  "Dress"  before  these  move- 
ments are  completed,  you  wiU  always  have  a  ragged  execution. 

These  are  all  small  points,  but  you  must  observe  them  if  you 
want  precision  and  a  snappy  drill.  Remember,  if  your  close-order 
drill  is  not  precise  and  snappy,  it  is  worthless,  and  will  defeat  the 
object  for  which  given— namely,  to  impart  discipHne. 

Paragraphs  194  to  197,  inclusive,  are  not  included  in  any  of 
the  drills.  These  movements  have  Httle,  if  any,  value  and  require 
lots  of  practice  beforte  they  can  be  executed  without  confusion. 
The  National  Guard  has  not  the  time  to  waste  on  these  movements. 


64  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

If  it  is  ever  necessary  to  use  a  column  of  twos,  you  can  get  this 
formation  by  forming  your  company  in  line  and  then  giving  ''Right 
face." 

You  can  get  a  column  of  files  by  deploying  as  skirmis,hers  and 
then  marching  by  the  flank,  and  it  takes  no  longer  than  forming 
right  by  file  from  cblumn  of  squads.  To  assemble  your  company 
afterwards!,  give  the  command,  ''Assemble  on  the  first  squad  in 
column  of  squads;  March."  You  will  then  be  back  in  column  of 
squads,  and  it  takes  no  longer  than  the  movement  squads  front 
into  line. 

EXTENDED-ORDER  DRILL. 
General  Remarks. 

Officers  and  sergeants  should  read  carefully  and  thorou^ghly 
memorize  Paragraphs  199  to  205,  inclusive.  Never  go  out  for 
extended-order  drill  without  re-reading  these  paragraphs. 

Remember,  you  have  but  three  commands  for  deploying  your 
company— "Guide  right,  left,  o:  center"— and  these  are  sufficient. 
Your  company  can  be  deployed  in  any  direction  by  these  commands. 
I  will  illustrate. 

You  are  marching  north  and  want  to  deploy  to  your  front: 
Give  the  command,  "As  skirmishers.  Guide  right  or  left."  This  will 
throw  your  line  to  the  right  or  left  front. 

You  are  marching  north  and  want  to  deploy  to  the  northeast 
or  northwest:  "Column  half  right  or  half  left;  As  skirmishers* 
Guide  left  or  right." 

You  are  marching  no  rth  and  you  want  to  deploy  to  the  east  or 
west:      "Squads  right  or  left;   As  skirmishers,  Guide  right  or  left." 

You  are  marching  north  and  you  want  to  deploy  to  your  right 
rear:  "Squads  right  or  left  about;  As  skirmishers.  Guide  right 
or  left." 

If  you  want  to  deploy  in  an  oblique  direction,  give  the  com- 
mand, "Column  half  right  or  half  left,"  after  wheeling  about  by 
squads. 

If  you  want  to  deploy  on  both  sides  of  the  road  upon  which 
you  are  marching,  give  the  commands,  "As  skirmishers'.  Guide 
center."     (You  are  in  column  of  squads.)     The  center  squad  de» 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  65 

ploys  on  the  road,  the  squads  in  front  of  the  center  squad  move  to 
'  the  right  and  deploy  on  the  line,  the  sijuads  to  the  rear  of  the  center 
squad  move  to  the  left  front  and  deploy  on  the  line. 

If  you  want  to  deploy  to  the  rear,  give  the  command,  "Squads 
right  or  left  about,''  and  then  execute  the  movement  as  above 
explained. 

Remember,  the  squads  in  reai  of  the  center  squad  always  go  to 
the  left  front.    This  rule  is  geneial.     It  does  not  matter  whether 
the  right  or  left  of  the  company  is  in  front. 
Remarks  on  Handling  the  Company  After  It  Has  Been  Deployed. 

Youi  company  is  in  line,  deployed,  facing  north,  and  you  want 
to  open  fire  to  your  rear:    About  face,  Fire  at  will. 

Your  company  is  in  line,  deployed,  facing  north,  and  you  want 
to  change  front  to  the  east:  Company  right,  or  Company  right, 
Double  time,  March.  Same  to  change  front  to  the  west.  To  change 
front  to  the  right  or  left  rear:    About  face.  Company  right  or  left. 

After  a  little  practice,  you  should  sbon  be  able  to  throw  your 
company  in  any  direction  promptly  and  without  the  shghtest 
confusion. 

Fifth  Drill. 

Paragraphs  206  to  211,  inclusive. 

The  Drill  Regulations  do  not  provide  for  assembling  by  squads, 
but  it  is  not  contrary  to  their  spirit  to  do  so,  and  I  have  found  that 
it  is  a  very  good  exercise  to  impress  upon  men  the  fact  that  the 
squad  is  the  unit,  and  they  mustlook  to  their  corporal  for  commands 
and  direction.  This  can  be  done  by  the  captain  giving  the  com- 
mand: L.  Assemble  by  squad,  2.  March.  At  the  preparatory 
command  the  corporals  command,  "Squad  assemble."  The  move- 
ment is  completed  at  the  command  "March,"  given  by  the  captain. 
Squad-leaders  do  not  repeat  the  command  "March"  unless  it  is 
necessary. 

To  deploy  the  company  again,  the  captain  commands:  1.  As 
skirmishers,  2.  March.  Corporals  repeat  the  preparatory  com- 
mand, but  do  not  repeat  "March"  unless  necessary.  Remember, 
squads  deploy  and  assbmble  on  the  corporal. 

To  assemble  the  company  from  a  Une  of  squads,  command: 
1.  Assemble  to  the  right,  2.  March.    The  corporal  of  the  first  squad 


66  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

commands,  "Stand  fast";  the  corporals  of  the  other  squads  com- 
mand, "By  the  right  flank."  The  movement  is  completed  at  the 
command  "March,"  given  by  the  captain.  Each  co!pporal  halts  his 
squad  when  in  place  and  commands,  "Left  face."  It  is  not  usual 
to  give  the  command  for  dressing  when  drilling  in  extended  order. 

Being  in  line,  to  fotm  skirmish-line:  1.  As  skirmishers,  Guide 
right,  2.  March.  The  corporal  of  the  first  or  right  squad  com- 
mands, "As  skirmishers";  the  corporals  of  all  the  other  squads  com- 
mand, "By  the  left  flank."  The  movement  is  completed  as  the  com- 
mand "March,"  given  by  the  captain.  Each  corporal  commands 
"As  cskii-mishers,  March,"  when  his  squad  is  where  it  should  be 
deployed.  It  is  not  necessary  to  command  "Halt"  or  "Right  face'^ 
before  this  command.  The  men  deploy  on  the  corporal  and  dress 
without  command.  In  deploying  on  the  center,  the  movement  is 
executed  in  a  similar  marmer.  Squads  to  the  right  of  the  base  squad 
move  to  the  right,  those  to  the  left  move  to  the  left. 

Being  in  column,  to  deploy  as  skirmishers:  1.  As  skirmishers, 
2.  Guide  right  or  left.  The  corporal  of  the  leading  squad  commands, 
"As  skirmishers";  all  the  other  corporals  command,  "Follow  me." 
"  The  movement  is  completed  at  the  command  "March,"  given  by  the 
captain.  Corporals  command,  "As  skirmishers,  March,"  when  about 
two  paces  in  rear  of  their  place  in  the  line.  The  men  halt  on  the  line 
without  command  and  dress.  If  this  movement  is  executed  on  the 
center  squad,  corporals  in  advance  of  the  center  lead  their  squads  to 
the  right  rear  and  then  place  them  on  the  line.  Corporals  in  rear 
of  the  center  squad  lead  their  squads  to  the  left  front  and  place  them 
on  the  line  as  above  explained. 

If  marching  in  column  of  files  or  twos,  to  form  skirmishers  to 
the  front :  1 .  As  skirmishers,  2.  Guide  right  or  left.  Each  corporal , 
except  the  corporal  of  the  leading  squad,  cautions,  "Left  oblique"  or 
"Right  oblique,"  if  the  movement  is  guide  left.  This  caution  of  the 
corporal's  is  verly  necessary  and  will  prevent  much  confusion. 

Being  in  skirmish-Une,  to  assemble:  1.  Assemble  to  the  right, 
2.  March.  The  corporal  of  the  first  squad  commands,  "Squad 
assemble";  the  other  corporals  caution,  "By  thenght  flank."  The 
movement  is  executed  at  the  command  "March,"  given  by  the 
captain. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  67 

To  increase  intervals:  1.  As  skirmishers,  At  five-pace  inter- 
vals, 2.  Guide  right,  3.  March. 

To  decrease  intervals:  1.  As  skirmishers.  At  two-pace  inter- 
vals, 2.  Guide  left,  3.  March. 

Intervals  can  be  in  ci  eased  or  deci  eased  on  the  centei  squad  by 
commanding  ^'Guide  center"  instead  of  "right"  or  "left." 

In  executing  these  movements,  men  move  by  the  flank  if  at  a 
halt,  or  by  the  oblique  if  marching. 

Corporals  should  supervipe  their  squadd.  The  corporal  of  the 
baae  squad  is  the  guide.  Remember,  the  guide  in  extended  order 
is  habitually  center.  It  does  not,  however,  become  center  until  any 
deployment  is  completed.  It  is  a  very  wise  precaution  for  sergeants 
in  the  Une  of  file-closers  to  observe  the  movement  and  caution,  ''Guide 
center"  when  the  movement  is  completed.  Men  on  the  hne  rarely 
know  when  the  guide  becomes  center  from  right  oi  left  unless  this 
is  done.     This  simple  piecaution  will  prevent  much  confusion. 

Some  officers  may  think  that  I  have  gone  into  detail  imneces- 
saiily  in  explaining  these  movements,  but  in  answer  I  will  state 
that  I  have  found  it  absolutely  necessary  in  training  new  troops 
and  especially  newly-appointed  oflScers.  Of  course,  they  would  all 
work  these  points  out  themselves  in  time,  but  remember,  in  the 
Volunteers  and  in  the  National  Guard  our  time  is  limited.  Why 
make  an  officer  work  these  things  olit  when  he  can  be  shown  in 
five  minutes? 

Sixth  Drill. 

Paragraphs  212  to  220,  inclusive. 

Don^t  forget  your  combat  patrols.  Never  have  a  drill  ox  prac- 
tice an  attack  without  sending  out  youi  right-  and  left-flank  combat 
patrols.  In  action  they  should  be  out  at  least  500  yards;  for  drill 
they  can  be  closer  in,  but  be  careful  to  explain  each  time  why  they 
are  so  close  to  tne  Une. 

What  is  a  combat  patrol?  A  combat  patrol  is  a  patrol  that  is 
always  sent  out  from  a  deployed  line  or  an  advancing  column  to 
protect  your  command  from  surprise  or  fire  on  the  flank.  For  a 
company  a  squad  of  four  men  is  usually  sufficient,  although  circum- 
stances might  arise  when  it  would  be  necessary  to  have  a  stronger 
force.    If  the  combat  patrol  encounters  the  enemy  or  is  attacked, 


68  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

it  must  lesist  to  the  last  man  until  the  line  or  column  has  had  time 
to  prepare  for  the  unexpected  attack. 

Remember,  the  squad  column  is  never  used  to  provide  security 
against  artillery  fire.  This  formation  is  more  vulnerable  to  aitillery 
fire  than  the  deployed  line.  It  is  useful  only  when  passing  through 
broken  ground  or  undeibiush  or  trees. 

The  platoon  column  offers  more  security  from  aitillery  fiie, 
but  to  secuie  the  best  results  the  heads  of  the  columns  must  not  be 
on  the  same  line.  You  can  secure  this  formation  by  ordering 
platoons  forward  at  intervals,.  There  should  be  at  least  100  yai^ds 
distance  between  the  heads  of  the  columns^.  I  am  not  speaking  of 
intervals,  remember.  The  interval  between  platoon  columns  will 
be  governed  by  the  interval  that  you  had  between  skirmisjhers 
before  you  ordered  platoon  column. 

Seventh  Drill. 

Paragraphs  221  to  224,  inclusive. 

The  captain  should  carefully  study  Paragraphs  225  to  257,  in- 
clusive, and  Paragraphs  29)0  to  236,  inclusive. 

The  Regulations  say:  "A  captain  uses  his  platoons  in  attack 
like  a  major  usps  his  companies;  due  allowance  being  made  for 
their  difference  in  strength." 

In  teaching  the  different  methods  of  advancing  by  rushes,  it 
is  better  to  first  teach  the  movements  at  a  walk,  first  carefuUy  ex- 
plaining to  the  company  just  what  you  arfe  trying  to  do.  When  the 
movements  are  well  underb'tood,  execute  the  movements  in  double 
time  and  finally  at  the  run,  which  is  the  way  they  should  be  executed 
in  action. 

General  Remarks  on  the  Preceding  Drills. 

If  the  course  of  drills  outlined  above  has  been  carefully  fol- 
lowed and  the  instruction  has  been  thorough,  your  company  should 
now  be  ready  to  take  up  training  for  combat. 

It  may  be  found  necessary  to  review  spme  of  the  drills  before 
passing  to  the  next  one,  but  this  will  depend  upon  your  ability  as 
an  instructor  and  the  intelligence  of  your  men. 

Let  me  cautioii  you  again  to  be  thorough  in  whatever  you  do. 
Do  not  advance  to  the  next  lesson  until  the  previous  one  is  well  un- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  69 

dei stood.  You  will  save  time  in  the  end  and  have  a  well-trained 
company  in  addition. 

The  fault  of  all  National  Guard  troops  is  to  attempt  to  go  too 
fast,  and  the  instruction  given  is  rarely  systematic  or  tho)rough. 
This  is  a  great  mistake.  It  is  bettei  to  be  able  to  do  four  things 
well  than  to  be  able  to  do  twelve  things  and  none  of  them  cor- 
rectly. If  you  can  do  four  things  well,  you  will  in  time  learn  the 
others;  but  if  you  are  not  able  to  do  anything  right,  there  is  very 
little  hope  for  you. 

This  book  is  not  a  treatise  on  tactics  or  strategy.  It  prescribes 
a  course  of  training  for  the  recruit  and  for  the  company.  If  the 
things  laid  down  herein  are  well  learned,  you  are  ready  for  higher 
training;  but  if  your  recruits  aife  not  thoroughly  trained  and  you 
cannot  handle  your  company,  it  is  folly  to  attempt  anything  higher. 

The  amount  of  training  that  you  can  give  your  company  in 
battle  tactics  depends  in  a  great  measlire  upon  the  time  and  ground 
available  for  the  purpose  and  cannot  be  prescribed  or  foreseen. 

The  clpurse  outlined  in  this  book,  with  your  target  practice, 
both  gallery  and  range  practice,  and  instruction  in  bayonet  exercise 
and  combat,  it  is  believed,  will  keep  you  pretty  busy  during  the 
fall  and  winter  and,  if  followed  systematically,  should  prepare  you 
for  your  summer  camp  maneuvers.  The  average  company  in  the 
Guard  fails  to  get  the  most  benefit  from  summer  camps  and  ma- 
neuvers becausle  it  has  to  learn  many  things  that  should  have  been 
learned  in  the  armory  beforehand. 

Every  soldier  in  your  command  should  receive  at  least  four 
hours'  instrucjtion  in  fiist  aid  during  the  first  year  of  his  service. 

Your  gaUery  and  range  practice  are  usually  prescribed  by  State 
Regulations.  In  the  absenc^te  of  these,  follow  the  course  laid  down 
in  the  ''Firing  Manual,  U.  S.  Army,"  1913;  but  here,  again,  make 
your  instruction  systematic  and  thorough.  The  following  course 
is  suggested : 

Preparatory  Training  for  Target  Practice. 

Four  drills  in  sighting— threte  with  sighting-bar  and  one  with 
the  I  ifle  in  a  rest. 

Two  drills  in  position  and  aiming  elxercisles.  Don't  sHght 
these;  they  aie  very  important.     No  man  ca^n  learn  to  shoot  until 


70  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

he  has  learned  to  hold  the  lifle  conectly.    Insist  upon  accuracy  in 
these  drills,  and  t^ch  every  filing  position. 
-  Four  drills  in  galleiy  practice. 

Each  of  the  above  drills  should  be  for  one  hour. 

If  the  instruction  impaited  has  been  thorough,  your  men  will  be 
ready  for  range  practice.  The  amount  of  range  practice  you  will  be 
able  to  give  your  men  will  depend  upon  time,  money,  and  circum- 
stances^ and  carmot  be  prespr^bed.  However,  give  them  all  you 
can,  but  don't  slight  your  other  instr^ictions;  they  are  equally 
important. 

If  you  are  so  placed  that  you  have  to  choose  between  drill  and 
target  practice,  devote  your  time  to  drill.  More  battles  have  been 
won  by  maneuvering  and  discipline  than  have  ever  been  won 
by  shooting. 

Instruction  in  Bayonet  Fencing  and  Combat. 

Your  instruction  in  bayonet  exercise,  to  be  of  any  value,  must 
be  thorough.  The  men  must  be  taught  correctly  each  movement. 
It  is  necesskry  to  pay  particular  attention  to  position  guard;  this 
is  usually  neglected. 

The  following  course  outHned  lays  down  a  preliminary  course 
in  bayonet  training  and  also  an  advanced  course  for  those  of  yo\ir 
men  who  are  ready  fo!r  it.     But  here,  again,  don't  go  too  fast. 

Don't  make  your  drills  too  long.     On^-half  hour  is  sufficient. 

BAYONET  EXERCISE. 

(Time,  one-half  hour.) 
First  Drill. 

Paragraphs  11  to  22,  inclusive,  "Manual  of  the  Bayonet," 
1913. 

The  usual  mistake  made  in  coming  to  the  position  of  guard  is 
to  have  the  weight  of  the  body  all  on  one  le^  instead  of  equally 
distributed  bti  both.  Both  knees  must  be  bent  equally.  The  body 
must  be  erect  upon  the  hipsl  Mols^jt  men  either  lean  to  the  front  or 
to  the  rear.  Both  arte  equally  bad.  Study  the  illustration  in 
the  Manual. 

Impress  upon  the  men  the  fact  that  bayonet  fetocing  is  like 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  71 

bo!xmg-^you  must  be  evenly  balanced  on  the  feet  and  be  able  to 
move  in  any  direction  quickly  without  it  being  necessary  to  shift 
the  weight  of  the  body  from  one  leg  to  the  other. 
Second  Drill. 
Paragraphs  23  to  28,  inclusive. 
Study  the  illustrations  in  the  Manual. 

Require  the  meii  to  make  the  movements  with  life  and  put 
force  into  their  thrusts  and  lunges.     They  must  be  made  with  force 
and  life;  otherwise  they  are  of  no  use  whatever. 
Thi!rd  Drill. 
Paragraphs  29  to  36,  inclusive. 

Fourth  Drill. 
Review  of  first,  second,  and  third  drills.     Be  careful  to  correct 
all  mistakes. 

Fkfth  Drill. 

Paragraphs  37  to  42,  inclusive. 

SitxTH  DriIll. 
Paragraph  43  only.     Invent  combinationsj. 

Seventh,  Eighth,  Ninth,  Tenth,  and  Eleventh  Drills. 
General  review  of  all  drills  and  combined  movements. 

General  Remarks. 

Paragraphs  46  to  114,  "Manual  o'f  the  Baygnet,"  should  be 
studied,  and  the  article  on  bayonet  fighting,  repubhshed  from  the 
United  States  Infantry  Journal^  should  be  carefully  read  by  officers 
and  sergeants  before  commencing  bayonet  exerci^.  This  will  give 
your  instructors  a  better  idea  of  how  to  direct  bayonet  training 
and  impriBss  upon  them  the  necessity  for  this  very  important 
instruction. 

The  above  schedule,  if  carefully  fo^owed,  will  give  you  an  ele- 
mentary coursle  in  bayonet  training,  and  the  article  in  Chapter  V. 
will  give  you  an  advanced  course,  should  one  be  desjired. 

Study  the  illustration^,  carefully  and  they  will  give  you  a  better 
idea  of  the  positions  and  movements  than  you  can  get  frbm  the 
text  alone. 


72  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


CHAPTER  V. 

PRACTICAL   SUGGESTIONS  FOR  TRAINING  A   COMPANY 
OF  INFANTRY  IN  BAYONET  FIGHTING. 

Republished  (by  permission)  from  U.S.  Infantry  Journal,  1914. 

"It  is  impossible  to  shoot  an  enemy  out  of  a  poisition.,7-*-Para- 
graph  251,  Field  Service  Regulations,  1913. 

"  Confidence  in  their  ability  to  use  the  bayonet  gives  the  as- 
saulting troops  the  "promise  of  success."-^  Para^mpA^^'i,  Infantry 
Drill  Regulations,  1911. 

"Only  the  offensive  wins."  —  Paragraph  51 U  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  1911. 

"Fire  action  (in  night  attacks)  should  be  avoided  in  offens|ive 
operations.  In  general,  pieces  should  not  be  loaded.  Men  must 
be  trained  to  rely  upon  the  bayonet  and  to  use  it  aggress^ively."— 
Paragraph  561,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911. 

"A  force  which  makes  a  vigorous  bayonet  charge  in  the  dark 
will  often  throw  a  much  larger  foice  into  disorder." — Paragraph  564 y 
Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  1911, 

At  Cerro  Benego,  on  June  13,  1862,  two  companies  of  French 
infantry,  numbering  140  men,  charging  at  night  with  the  bayonet, 
drove  from  their  position  a  division  of  6,000  Mexicans,^  inflicting  a 
loss  of  250  kiUed  and  wounded,  and  made  200  prisoners,  captured 
3  mountain  guns  and  a  number  of  flags;  The  French  in  this 
engagement  lost  34  men. 

How  many  ofl&cers  of  infantry  appreciate  the  value  and  im- 
portance of  the  paragraphs  quoted  above  and  are  familiar  with  the 
remarkable  sjuccess  of  the  140  French  infantrymen  trained  to  use 
the  bayonet  in  their  fight  at  Cerro  Benego? 

Exactly  the  same  thing  might  happen  to-day  on  a  dark  night 
under  similar  circumstances'.  And  yet  there  are  still  some  who 
believe  that  the  bayonet  is  an  obsolete  weapon. 

In  every  battle  of  the  army  of  General  Okus,  from  Nanshan  to 
Mukden,  in  the  Russb- Japanese  Wax,  a  part,  at  least,  of  every  posi- 
tion was  carried  by  assault,  and  in  the  army  of  Kuroki  the  bayonet 
is  reported  to  have  been  resorted  to  more -extensively  than  in  the 
army  of  General  Okus. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY) ,  73 

It  is  reported  that  in  the  recent  Balkan  troubles  the  Bulgars, 
and  later  the  Greeks,  made  good  use  of  the  bayonet. 

At  the  annual  inspection  of  the  21st  Infantry  at  Vancouver 
Barracks,  in  1913,  the  officers  of  the  regiment  were  thoroughly  sat- 
isfied with  the  instruction  which  had  been  given  and  with  the  results 
obtained,  with  the  exception  of  bayonet  fighting.  It  is  safe  to  as- 
sume that  the  showing  made  by  the  regiment  in  that  respect  was 
equal,  if  not  superior,  to  that  usually  made  in  this  subject  by  any 
infantry  regiment;  but  it  was  so  far  behind  the  showing  made  in  all 
other  subjects  that  it  was  thought  best  to  devote  special  attention 
to  this  subject  during  the  winter  instruction  from  November  to 
March,  1913-14. 

It  was  decided  to  detail  one  lieutenant  or  sergeant  from  each 
company  to  take  a  special  course  in  this  subject,  for  the  purpose  of 
producing  at  least  one  competent  instructor  in  each  company  and 
in  order  to  make  the  instruction  imparted  in  the  regiment  uniform. 

General  Order  No.  13,  21st  Infantry,  October  15,  1913,  con- 
tains this  paragraph : 

^'3.  During  the  month  of  November  one  oflScer  or  sergeant 
from  each  company  will  report  to  Captain  Cromwell  Stacey,  21st 
Infantry,  from  9:45  to  10:45  a.  m.  daily,  except  Satul-days  and 
Sundays,  to  be  trained  as  instructors  in  bayonet  fencing." 

Pursuant  to  the  above  order,  one  sergeant  reported  from  each 
company.  It  was  found  impracticable  to  detail  lieutenants,  on 
account  of  shortage  of  officers,  other  duties,  etc. 

The  sergeants  detailed  were  excused  from  all  duty  that  would 
in  any  way  conflict  with  the  instruction,  because  it  was  desired  to 
have  every  man  present  at  each  lesson.  Great  care  was  taken  not 
to  tire  the  men  at  first.  Instruction  was  sharp  while  it  lasted,  and 
the  rests  were  frequent,  but  short.  I  have  found  that  men  get 
diggusted  with  too  much  rest,  the  same  as  they  do  if  the  drill  is  too 
long  without  rests. 

Men  were  encouraged  to  ask  questions  and  to  find  out  why. 
This  privilege  was  not  abused.  It  must  be  remembered  that  all  of 
these  men  were  selected  sergeants  and  exceptionally  good  men. 

It  may  be  remarked  that  it  will  be  useless  to  waste  time  on  any 
man  who  is  not  mentally  alert  and  physica%  sound,  strong,  and 


74  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

quick.  It  is  also  useless  to  select  a  man  for  instructor  who  is  not  a 
very  close  observer,  because,  while  he  may  know  the  movements 
thoroughly  himself,  he  may  not  be  able  to  see  at  a  glance  whether  a 
man  has  the  correct  position.  I  have  seen  many  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  who  would  have  to  make  a  minute  inspection 
of  every  man  before  they  could  tell  whether  his  position  was  correct 
or  not.  Such  men,  no  matter  how  good  they  may  be  in  other 
respects,  are  totally  unfit  for  instructors. 

An  instructor  should  be  able  to  cast  a  glance  over  his  squad  or 
company  and  see  instantly  whether  each  man  has  the  correct 
position. 

Instructors  must  be  able  to  talk.  Many  good  men  know  a 
subject,  but  are  totally  incapable  of  imparting  their  knowledge 
to  others. 

An  instructor  should  be  patient.  Many  men  try  as  hard  as 
they  can  and  yet  are  not  able  to  comprehend  movements  at  once. 
Such  men  must  not  be  growled  at  or  discouraged:  They  are  the 
very  ones  who  need  instruction  the  most. 

It  was  impressed  upon  the  sergeants  at  every  opportunity  that 
the  bayonet  instruction  was  in  no  sense  a  calisthenic  drill.  The 
object  of  bayonet  instruction  was  to  teach  a  man  to  kill  his  opponent 
in  personal  combat  in  the  shortest  possible  time. 

In  teaching  the  thrusts,  Ixmges,  and  throw  point,  men  were 
impressed  with  the  fact  that  they  had  to  put  force  behind  the 
movement  in  order  to  kill  their  man.  If  they  did  not  execute  their 
movements  correctly  at  drill,  they  would  not  do  them  properly  when 
they  were  required.  They  must  form  the  habit  of  executing  each 
movement  correctly;  then,  and  not  till  then,  could  they  feel  safe  be- 
hind their  point.  They  were  also  impressed  with  the  fact  that  their 
opponent  would,  in  all  human  probability,  be  as  badly  scared  as 
they  were,  and  if  they  would  only  keep  cool  and  use  their  heads, 
they  would  have  no  difficulty  in  defeating  him. 

Bayonet  instruction  must  be  systematic.  Proper  instruction 
in  bayonet  fighting  will  never  be  obtained  by  giving  two  or  three 
hours'  instruction  in  the  subject  a  month.  Squads  or  platoons 
should  be  placed  at  this  work  and  given  not  less  than  twenty  hours' 
consecutive  instruction — «ay   twenty   lessons.       Most   instructors 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  75 

make  the  mistake  of  placing  the  plastrons  and  masks  on  the  men 
and  starting  them  in  on  combat  before  they  know  the  rudiments  of 
fencing.  This  is  a  vital  defect,  as  it  is  very  difficult  later  to  eradi- 
cate faults  in  position  and  execution  acquired  in  this  manner. 

No  man  should  ever  be  allowed  to  engage  in  combat  until  he 
has  had  at  least  fifteen  hours'  instruction  in  fencing,  and  this,  it 
must  be  remembered,  after  he  has  received  the  usual  amount  of 
instruction  usually  given  to  a  recruit  in  this  subject. 

There  is  a  pernicious  custom  in  the  Army  of  not  giving  a  recruit 
any  instruction  in  bayonet  exercise  until  he  is  proficient  in  the 
Manual  of  Arms.  Why?  Learning  the  Manual  of  Arms,  the  load- 
ings, firings,  and  marching,  have  no  connection  with  bayonet  ex- 
ercise. There  is  no  reason  why  a  recruit  should  not  receive  some 
instruction  in  bayonet  exercise  the  first  day  that  he  has  a  rifle 
placed  in  his  hands.  In  my  company,  in  recruit  instruction,  I 
always  devote  part  of  each  day's  drill  to  bayonet  exercise.  One- 
half  hour  is  sufficient,  but  that  does  not  mean  twenty-five  minutes' 
rest  and  five  minutes'  instruction.  Before  good  results  can  be  ob- 
tained, you  must  impress  upon  the  men  that  this  instruction  is 
important — very  important — and  ranks  next  to  instruction  in  rifle 
practice. 

Pointing  and  aiming  drill  prepares  a  man  for  range  practice, 
but  he  is  not  a  competent  rifleman  until  he  has  had  that  practice. 
The  bayonet  exercises  taught  on  the  drill-grounds  hold  the  same 
relation  to  bayonet  fighting  that  pointing  and  aiming  drill  does  to 
range  practice.  It  follows,  therefore,  that  a  man  is  not  a  com- 
petent bayonet  fighter  until  this  instruction  has  been  supplemented 
by  thorough  instruction  in  bayonet  fencing  and  combat.  It  is  also 
impossible  to  make  a  competent  bayonet  fencer  by  giving  him 
instruction  in  bayonet  exercise  on  the  drill-ground  alone.  He  must 
cross  bayonets  with  an  opponent  before  he  can  make  use  of  the 
movements  taught. 

The  movements  laid  down  in  the  Manual  are  good,  but  there 
are  not  enough  of  them.  Paragraph  95,  ''Manual  of  the  Bayonet," 
is  elastic,  but  I  believe  that  better  results  would  be  obtained  if  more 
movements  were  included  in  the  Manual  itself.  If  you  have  an 
instructor  wha  Jias  a  knowledge  of  foil  fencing,  he  may  be  able  to 


76  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

fill  up  the  gaps;  but  he  should  also  have  a  knowledge  of  broadsword 
work,  so  that  he  will  know  what  cuts  a  cavalryman  will  likely  use. 

I  believe  that  the  Manual  is  deficient  in  the  following 
movements: 

No  short  thrusts  are  taught.  Short  thrusts  are  very  useful 
sometimes. 

No  parry  is  taught  for  a  cavalry  right  low  cut  (right  cut  against 
infantry).  You  cannot  parry  this  cut  with  a  parry  high  or  a  parry 
right.     The  same  thing  applies  to  the  left  low  cut,  cavalry. 

The  throw  point  is  an  excellent  attack  if  properly  used,  and  it  is 
hard  to  parry  if  made  with  hfe. 

Men  are  told  that  they  can  make  a  return  from  the  low  or  high 
parries,  but  they  are  not  told  how  to  do  so. 

The  average  man  is  not  able  to  evolve  a  correct  method  from 
his  inner  consciousness;  and  the  result  is  that  most  men  inva- 
riably execute  these  movements  incorrectly  and  ineffectually  in 
consequence. 

Left  point  should  be  taught.  It  is  much  more  effective  than 
changing  front  to  the  left  and  then  thrusting  or  lunging.  It  is  a 
very  nasty  attack  and  is  hard  to  parry.  It  is  also  extremely 
effective  in  a  melee. 

Men  are  not  taught  to  get  upon  the  right  rear  of  a  lancer. 
This  is  important.  It  is  all  right  to  gain  the  left  rear  of  a  man 
armed  with  a  saberj  but  you  don't  want  to  get  there  if  he  is  armed 
with  the  lance. 

On  the  whole,  this  subject  has  never  received  the  attention  in 
our  service  that  it  deserves.  It  is  a  tendency  with  our  Army; 
the  cavalry  has  always  slighted  the  saber  in  the  same  way.  Bay- 
onet fighting  in  the  Army  could  be  very  much  improved  if  this 
subject  were  taken  up  seriously  in  each  regiment;  but  frequently 
there  is  no  officer  who  has  sufficient  knowledge  of  the  subject  to  be 
a  competent  instructor.  It  is  not  sufficient  to  know  the  movements 
laid  down  in  the  Manual.  An  instructor  must  be  a  fencer  himself 
before  he  can  t^ach  others.  There  are  hundreds  of  men  in  the 
infantry  who  know  every  movement  laid  down  in  the  Manual  and 
can  take  each  position  correctly,  and  yet  they  cannot  deliver  an 
attack  properly  or  defend  themselves  by  the  parries  that  they  can. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY),  77 

execute.  If  anyone  doubts  this,  let  him  take  the  best  men  he  has 
in  his  company  in  bayonet  drill  (as  learned  on  the  drillrground), 
put  plastrons  and  masks  on  them,  and  let  them  engage  in  combat. 
Watch  the  hammer-and-tongs  way  in  which  they  go  at  it  and  watch 
the  hits  that  are  made.  Practically,  every  thrust  and  lunge  goes  home. 
Also  watch  the  manner  in  which  they  wrestle  with  their  rifles — 
swaying  back  and  forth,  trying  to  do  they  know  not  what;  bayonet 
points  clear  up  over  their  heads  instead  of  on  a  iine  with  their 
chests,  etc.  It  undoubtedly  looks  very  fine  to  a  person  who  is  not 
a  fencer,  but  any  man  who  can  use  a  foil  or  broadsword  can  see  at 
a  glance  how  gross  it  all  is.  If  you  can  use  a  broadsword  yourself, 
put  on  the  plastron  and  mask  with  your  best  drill-ground-trained 
bayonet-man  and  see  how  helpLess  he  is  against  your  attacks.  Try 
him  with  the  foil,  if  you  prefer.  But  if  you  can't  fence  yourself, 
how  are  you  going  to  tell  whether  his  work  is  good  or  bad,  and  how 
are  you  going  to  teach  him? 

A  parallel  case  would  be  to  place  boxing-gloves  on  men  who 
don't  know  how  to  box;  but  it  will  take  a  boxer  to  see  how  rotten 
the  exhibition  is.  I  have  found  that  men  who  can  box  learn  bayonet 
fighting  in  about  half  the  time  it  takes  to  teach  the  ordinary  man. 
Why?  Because  they  already  have  the  idea;  they  appreciate  attacks 
and  parries;  they  know  the  necessity  for  quickness  and  good  foot- 
work; they  know  that  the  parries  must  be  close  and  the  attacks 
made  with  force  and  reach;  they  know  that  the  body  must  be 
pHable  and  that  anything  like  stiffness  must  be  avoided. 

I  do  not  believe  that  this  subject  will  ever  receive  the  attention 
that  it  deserves  until  a  School  for  Bayonet  Fencing  is  established 
in  connection  with  the  School  of  Musketry,  and  that  each  regiment 
be  required  to  send  two  Ueutenants  there  for  instruction.  Sergeants 
might  be  sent  also.  When  they  return  to  their  regiments  they  can 
organize  classes,  and  in  that  manner  the  whole  Army  would  receive 
proper  instruction.  The  course  should  include  boxing,  fencing 
with  foil  and  broadsword,  fencing  with  bayonet,  foil  against  bayonet, 
bayonet  against  saber,  and,  if  possible,  bayonet  against  lance. 

I  see  no  reason  why  the  cavalry  School  in  Fencing  (and  they 
need  one  quite  as  badly  as  we  of  the  infantry  do)  should  not  be 


78  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

located  in  the  same  place.  Cavalry  should  know  how  to  attack  a 
man  armed  with  the  bayonet. 

The  course  should  be  for  ninety  days,  four  hours  a  day,  six 
days  per  week. 

Qualifications  should  be  established  in  bayonet  fencing. 

Two  grades:     1st,  proficient;  2d,  expert. 

A  cloth  badge  should  be  given  and  worn  on  the  left  sleeve  of 
the  uniform. 

A  board  of  officers  in  each  regiment  should  conduct  examina- 
tions and  award  badges.  When  you  do  this,  the  men  will  take  an 
interest  in  the  work  and  will  drill  overtime  to  gain  that  badge. 

Qualifications  to  last  for  one  year. 

An  officer,  once  qualified,  should  retain  his  qualification  per- 
petually and  should  wear  the  badge.  Officers  should  not  compete 
with  enhsted  men. 

Graduates  of  the  School  of  Fencing  should  wear  some  dis- 
tinctive badge. 

This  school  could  be  organized  by  order  and  should  not  cost 
much.     The  only  item  would  be  equipment  and  transportation. 

One  word  more  in  regard  to  badges.  One  can  not  safely  ignore 
the  very  human  quality  of  vanity,  especially  in  the  Army.  Call 
it  esprit  de  corps  if  you  will,  but  to  obtain  the  best  results  it  must  be 
fostered.  If  any  man  works  hard  and  .has  achieved  proficiency  in 
any  subject,  he  likes  his  comrades  and  the  world  in  general  to  know 
about  it. 

The  following  system  was  adhered  to  in  training  the  sergeants 
of  the  21st  Infantry  as  instructors.  It  is  not  claimed  by  the  writer 
that  it  is  the  best  or  the  only  scheme,  but  it  was  the  result  of  much 
thought  and  study  on  his  part,  covering  a  number  of  years,  and  it 
is  with  the  hope  that  it  may  add  something  to  the  efficiency  of  the 
infantry  that  these  notes  are  printed.  They  may  be  found  useful 
to  any  officer  detailed  or  interested  in  this  very  important  subject. 

The  course  consisted  of  twenty  lessons,  one  hour  per  day,  five 
days  a  week.  As  a  matter  of  fact,  more  time  than  this  was  devoted 
to  the  subject.  We  all  became  very  much  interested  in  the  work, 
and  many  times  the  instruction  ran  over  the  time  allotted,  due  to 
questions,  explanations,  etc. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY) .  79 

The  sergeants  practiced  some  of  the  movements  themselves 
in  barracks. 

The  following  principles  were  impressed  upon  the  men  at  every 
opportunity : 

Rely  on  your  point.  Don't  cut  unless  you  cannot  use  your 
point.  Remember  that  before  commencing  an  attack  with  the 
point  your  bayonet  must  be  directed  at  the  point  to  be  attacked 
before  the  thrust  or  lunge  commences;  otherwise  your  attack  will 
be  wild,  and  you  will  get  into  the  habit  of  making  attacks  with  the 
hope  that  perhaps  they  may  go  home. 

Be  careful  to  always  take  the  correct  position  of  guard.  Have 
the  weight  of  the  body  equally  distributed  upon  both  legs.  (A 
common  fault  is  to  throw  too  much  weight  on  the  left  leg.) 

Never  give  your  opponent  any  indication  of  your  intention  to 
deliver  an  attack.  (This  is  often  done  by  partially  closing  the  eyes, 
setting  the  muscles,  drawing  back  the  rifle  preparatory  to  thrusting 
or  lunging,  looking  at  the  point  to  be  attacked,  etc.) 

No  movement  whatever  should  be  slighted  in  any  circumstance. 
Make  your  parry  complete  before  you  attempt  a  return,  and  then 
make  your  return  with  force  and  life.  Don't  make  a  return  unless 
there  is  a  good  opening  and  a  fair  chance  of  your  attack  going  home. 
Don't  get  into  the  habit  of  always  making  the  same  return  from  a 
parry. 

From  the  start,  attack,  attack^  attack.  Throw  your  opponent 
on  the  defensive.  That  is  your  best  defense.  If  you  keep  him 
engaged  parrying  your  attacks,  he  will  have  precious  little  time  to 
devote  to  planning  attacks  on  you. 

Remember  that  whatever  you  do  with  the  bayonet  must  be 
done  soon;  you  will  soon  be  tired,  and  then  it  will  be  too  late. 

Keep  cool.     Never  get  excited  or  lose  your  head. 

Never  engage  in  a  wrestling-match  with  your  opponent.  If  he 
tries  to  force  your  rifle  to  one  side  so  that  you  will  be  uncovered, 
do  not  meet  force  with  force;  simply  disengage. 

Never  make  your  parries  wild;  make  them  as  close  as  possible. 

Never  make  a  blind  attack  with  the  hope  that  it  may  go  home; 
wait  for  a  good  opening,  and  then  let  him  have  it  with  force  and  life. 

Don't  try  to  parry  with  your  left  hand;  make  your  parries 
with  the  rifle. 


80  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 

Practice  the  lunge  continually  and  make  it  as  long  as  possible. 
Remember,  every  inch  counts. 

Never  neglect  to  straighten  the  right  knee  in  thrusting  or 
lunging;  if  this  knee  is  bent,  it  will  shorten  your  lunge  from  4  to  6 
inches;  that  will  make  the  difference  between  a  hit  and  a  miss. 

In  thrusting  and  lunging  the  right  foot  must  be  flat  on  the 
ground;  this  is  very  important  and  is  frequently  neglected.  (I 
cannot  see  why  this  was  omitted  from  the  Manual.) 

Keep  your  bayonet  low.  It  is  better  to  have  it  too  low  than 
too  high.  I  believe  that  if  the  bayonet  point  is  held  at  the  height 
of  the  chin,  it  is  too  high.  The  height  of  the  second  button  on  the 
blouse  or  chest  is  better.  A  good  swordsman  or  a  man  using  the 
lock  guard  will  get  imder  your  guard  if  your  point  is  too  high. 

Circle  around  your  opponent  and  get  the  light  in  his  eyes,  then 
attack.  Do  not  let  him  do  this  to  you,  or  force  you  onto  bad 
ground. 

If  you  are  a  small  man,,  do  not  be  afraid  of  a  big  man;  he  may 
be  stronger  than  you  are,  but  you  make  up  for  that  by  being  more 
active.  Stay  at  a  distance  from  him  (bayonets  must  always  cross, 
however),  and  don't  allow  him  to  get  in  a  position  where  his  superior 
strength  will  count.  If  you  are  a  large  man,  do  not  despise  a  small 
man;  he  may  be  as  quick  as  a  cat.  Try  to  close  with  him,  and 
get  in  a  position  where  your  superior  strength  will  tell. 

Use  your  head  always. 

The  class  was  formed  in  two  lines  facing  each  other^  about 
5  yards  apart. 

One  instructor  cannot  well  supervise  more  than  sixteen  men. 

Men  should  remain  in  the  position  given  until  ordered  to  return 
to  the  guard. 

Men  should  execute  each  movement  very  slowly  at  first  until 
they  thoroughly  understand  how  the  attack  or  parry  should  be 
made.  The  instructor  should  carefully  note  the  manner  in  which 
any  movement  is  executed.  Many  men  are  in  the  correct  position 
after  the  completion  of  a  movement,  but  their  manner  of  getting 
there  is  faulty.     (Especially  true  of  parries.) 

Bayonets  were  crossed  after  ten  hours'  instruction  (plastrons 
and  maskg  opt  used).    One  lijie  was  then  ordered  to  deliver  an 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


81 


attack  (the  othei  line  remaining  at  the  guard).  Care  was  taken 
that  the  bayonet  (fencing)  point  touched  the  point  attacked. 
These  attacks  weie  made  slowly  and  caiefuUy.  Later,  one  line  was 
ordered  to  attack  and  the  othei  line  was  ordered  to  parry.  These 
movements  taught  the  attacks  and  parries  foi  same.  Plasjtrons  and 
masks  weie  not  used  at  this  stage  of  the  instruction .  They  are 
not  necessary  if  the  movements  aie  executed  correctly.  Speed  was 
developed  later.  The  object  of  this  instruction  was  to  teach  at- 
tacks and  parries  only.  Do  not  hurry  through  this  stage  of  the 
instruction.  The  more  time  devoted  to  this  instruction  the  better 
the  result  later  on.  Give  frequent  short  regfts.  Make  your  in- 
struction sharp  while  it  lasts^  but  avoid  tiring  the  men.  Try  to 
hold  their  interest. 

All  the  movements  embraced  in  the  Manual  were  taught  and 
the  men  weYe  directejd  to  study  the  bobk  alsjo. 

The  following  exceptions  were  made  in  the  poisjitions  laid  down 
in  the  Manual  and  some  new  movements  taught. 

Guard. 


Guard  (Correct). 


82  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 

The  rifle  should  be  turned  to  the  left  until  the  bayonet  is  flat. 
The  position  laid  down  in  the  Manual  leaves  the  fingers  of  the  left 
hand  exposed.  By  turning  the  rifle  to  the  left  they  are  protected 
by  the  gun-sling  and  upper  sling  swivel.  From  the  engage  right, 
if  a  glancing  blow  is  struck,  the  swivel  and  gun-sling  will  catch  the 
rifle.  In  the  position  laid  down  in  the  Manual  (with  the  piecje  only 
slightly  turned  to  the  left)  the  fingers  will  be  stAick. 


Guard  (Incorrect). 

Some  difficulty  was  experienced  at  first  in  getting  the  men  to 
take  the  correct  position  of  guard.  Most  of  them  would  get  their 
rifles  too  far  to  the  rear — that  is,  the  right  hand  would  be  near  the 
right  hip,  instead  of  to  the  front  and  on  a  line  with  the  left  hip,  or 
in  froht  of  the  belt  buckle,  as  it  should  be.  In  order  to  correcjb  this 
defect,  and  to  explain  to  the  men  the  necei^ity  of  always  assuming 
the  correct  position  of  guard,  two  men  were  ordered  to  engage. 
Men  were  taught  that  in  the  engage  bayonets  should  cross  about  8 
inches  from  the  point.     No.  1  was  then  directed  to  move  his  rifle 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


83 


to  the  rear  until  his  light  hand  was  opposite  to  his  right  hip.  No.  2 
WAS  ordered  to  advance  slightly,  maintaining  the  coirect  position 
of  guard,  and  being  careful  to  see  that  bayonets  crosfsed  about  8 
inches  fiom  theii  points.  It  was  then  pointed  out  that  if  both  men 
weie  to  lunge  at  the  same  time,  No.  2's  bayonet  would  s,tiike  fiist, 
because,  paiadoxical  as  it  may  seem,  No.  2  is  closer  to  No.  1  than 
No.  1  is  to  No.  2.  It  will  be  found  that  theie  will  be  a  diffeience 
of  from  8  to  16  inches  in  the  distance  that  each  man's  bayonet  is 
fiom  his  opponent's  chest. 

After  this  demonstration,  little  difficulty  was  experienced  in 
getting  men  to  assume  the  correct  position  of  guard  with  the  rifle 
well  forward. 

Throw  Point. 


Being  at  guard :  1.  Throw,  2.  Point.  Throw  the  piece  straight 
to  the  front,  with  the  right  arm  fully  extended,  retaining  the  grasp 
of  the  piece  with  the  right  hand  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  at  the  same 
time  raising  the  right  arm  until  the  hand  is  in  front  of  the  shoulder, 
barrel  up,  edge  of  bayonet  down,  point  directed  at  the  point  to  be 
attacked;  at  the  same  time  drop  left  hand  to  left  thigh  with  a  slap. 


84  COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 

Recover  at  once  and  lesume  the  guard.  Do  not  try  to  hold  the 
lifle  up  with  the  right  arm  or  hand.  If  properly  executed,  the  mo- 
tion imparted  to  the  rifle  by  throwing  it  forward  and  raising  the  butt 
will  sustain  it.     Recovery  must  be  sharp. 

This  is  a  very  nasty  attack,  if  well  executed,  and  very  hard  to 
pairy.  It  is  not  difficult  to  teach,  if  men  do  not  try  to  hold  the 
lifle  up  with  the  right  arm.  It  must  be  executed  smartly  to  be 
effective. 


Stop  Thrust. 

Being  at  guard:  1.  Stop,  2.  Thrust,  3.  Guard.  Throw  the 
rifle  to  the  front  to  the  full  extent  of  both  arms,  barrel  up,  allowing 
the  left  hand  to  shde  along  the  stock,  right  hand  grasping  the  rifle 
at  the  small  of  the  stock,  both  hands  and  butt  in  front  of  and  at 
the  height  of  the  chin,  point  of  bayonet  directed  at  opponent's  face 
or  chest;  at  the  same  time  draw  back  left  foot  until  heels  touch,  left 
toie  pointing  straight  to  the  front.     Resume  the  guard. 

Useful  when  opponent  thiusts,  lunges,  oi  cuts,  and  is  veiy 
effective  if  made  smartly  and  with  life. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


85 


Being  at  guard,  to  attack  low  lines:  1.  Drop  point,  2.  Lunge, 
3.  .Guard.  Lowei  lifle  with  left  hand  until  hoii2ontal;  do  Hot 
move  light  hand;  lunge  at  the  point  to  be  attacked.  Resume  the 
guard. 


Lunge. 

Being  at  low  parry  right  oi  left,  to  letutn:  1.  Up,  2.  Lunge,  3. 
Guard.  Raise  the  point  with  left  hand  until  rifle  is  horizontal, 
barrel  to  the  left,  right  hand  at  about  the  height  of  the  neck;  lunge 
at  the  point  to  be  attacked.     Resume  the  guard. 

Being  at  parry  high,  to  return:  1.  Parry  high,  2.  Return,  3* 
Lunge,  4.  Guard.  Turn  rifle  to  the  front  with  the  left  hand,  rifle 
horizontal  (or  pointing  upward  if  attacking  cavalry),  barrel  down, 
right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  neck;  lunge  at  the  part  to  be  at- 
tacked.    Resume  the  guard. 

A  common  error  in  executing  this  movement  is  to  turn  the  rifle 
wlhife  lunging.  If  this  is  done,  the  man  may  be  in  the  coiiect  position 
when  the  movement  is  completed,  but  the  lunge  will  not  have  been 


86 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


piopeily  executed  and  will  not  go  home;  fuitheimoie,  theie  will  be 
QO  foice  back  of  it.  The  lifle  must  be  turned  fiist,  and  then  the 
limge  made. 


Left  Point  (1). 


Being  at  guard:  1.  Left  point,  2.  Two,  3.  Guard.  Atthefiist 
command  laise  the  piece  with  both  hands  so  that  the  light  aim  is 
fully  extended  to  the  light  on  a  Une  with  and  at. the  height  of  the 
shouldeis,  ban  el  down,  bayonet  point  pointing  to  the  left,  bat  i  el 
resting  on  the  left  arm  just  aboVe  elbow,  front  sight  to  the  left  of 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


87 


Left  Point  (2). 


left  aim  (not  inside).  Two. — ^Thiuatto  theleft  at  the  point  to  be 
attacked  to  the  full  extent  of  the  left  arm.  Guard. — ^Resume  the 
guard. 

This  movement  is  much  better  than  changing  fiont  and  then 
thiusting  and  gives  as  long  a  reach.  The  head  should  be  turned  to 
the  left  in  this  movement. 


88 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 


Being    at    guard : 

1.  Right  short  thrust, 

2.  Two,  3.  Guard.  At 
the  first  command 
throw  the  rifle  to  the 
rear  with  both  hands, 
barrel  up;  regrasp  it 
with  both  hands,  the 
left  hand  at  the  bayo- 
net grip,  thumb  over 
the  barrel,  edge  of 
bayonet  down,  left 
hand  directly  in  front 
of  the  light  hip  and 
touching  the  body; 


Right  Short  Thrust 
(2). 


right  hand  grasps  rifle  at  the  balance, 
thumb  along  the  piece.  Two. — ^Thrust  to 
the  front  to  the  full  extent  of  the  left 
arm.  Guard. — ^Resume  the  guard  in  the 
most  convenient  manner. 

This  movement  is  used  when  the  op- 
ponent is  so  close  that  ordinary  attacks 
carmot  be  us.ed.  It  is  useful  in  the  break- 
away or  in  mob-work. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


89 


Lock  Guard  Butt  Strike  (1). 


Being  at  the  engage  right  and  your  opponent  having  his  bayonet 
point  too  high:  1.  Lock  guard,  2.  Butt  strike,  3.  Guard.  At  the 
first  command  step  forward  with  the  right  foot  and  plant  it  so  that 
the  right  heel  will  be  about  30  inches  in  front  oif  and  about  6  inches 
to  the  light  of  the  left  heel;  tuin  on  ball  of  left  foot  until  left  toe  is 
pointing  to  the  left;  at  the  same  time  carry  the  piece  to  the  front  so 
that  the  left  hand  will  be  about  14  inches  in  front  of  the  chest  and  at 
the  height  of  the  second  button  on  the  blouse,  right  arm  close  to 
the  body,  right  hand  about  in  fiont  of  the  right  elbow,  barrel  to  the 
left  so  that  o^pponent's  bayotiet  is  securely  locked,  bayonet  guards 


90 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


Lock  Guard  Butt  Strike  (2). 


touching.  At  the  second  command  step  forward  with  the  left  foot 
and  plant  it  about  30  inches  in  front  of  and  6  inches  to  the  left  of  the 
light  toe,  which  should  now  be  pointing  straight  to  the  front;  at  the 
same  time  execute  butt  strike  at  opponent's  neck,  raising  on  the 
right  toe  when  blow  is  deliveied.    Resume  the  guard. 

Thig  is  a  very  nasty  attack  and  theie  is  only  one  guard  for  it, 
and  ihat  is  rear  pass.  If  executed  with  life,  it  is  very  difficult  to  get 
away  fiom  the  blow.  It  sjiould  never  be  allowed  in  fencing  combat; 
it  is  entire V  too  dangeious.  It  sihoXild  be  taught  and  diiUed  oftep, 
but  only  at  command.  It  is  impossible  to  execute  this  movement 
from  engage  left,  neither  can  it  be  done  if  bayonet  points  are  held  low. 

Impress  upon  the  men  at  every  opportimity  to  rely  on  the 
point.  The  edge  is  good  to  have  and  gives  you  an  advantage  over 
a  man  who  has  only  a  thrusting  weapon,  but  the  point  is  the  more 
dangerous  of  the  two. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  91 

Men  are  taught  to  always  lunge  (foot  movement)  when  de- 
livering a  cut.  Finish  the  cut  with  a  shaip  motion  like  ciacking  a 
whip,  and  then  draw  bayonet  to  the  rear  while  holding  it  against 
opponent's  part  attacked.  The  last  motion  of  the  cut  and  diaw 
must  be  executed  simultaneously  to  be  effective. 

Example. — ^Take  a  sharp  saber  and  deliver  a  straight  cut, 
without  drawing,  against  a  rug  or  blanket  i oiled  iand  suspended  from 
a  tree.  You  will  find  that  you  can  make  no  impiepsion  upon  it. 
Now  deliver  a  light  cut,  ending  with  a  sharp  ciack,  and  diaw  at  the 
same  time.  You  will  find  that  you  can  cut  the  lug  in  two  with  little 
force  or  effort.  Cuts,  to  be  effective,  must  be  delivered  in  this 
manner,  and  bayonets  should  be  sharpened  before  taking  the  field  • 
Dull  bayonets  aie  veiy  likely  to  stick  in  a  woimd;  Efhaip  ones  will 
cut  their  way  out. 

In  Samar,  P.  I.,  in  1900,  men  of  the  9th  Infantry  frequently 
had  to  place  their  foot  on  an  enemy  after  killing  him  with  a  bayonet 
before  they  could  withdraw  it.  This  will  not  happen  with  a  sharp 
bayonet.  I  know.  While  operating  in  Samar  in  1905-6-7,  I  re- 
quired my  men,  both  regulars  and  scouts,  to  sharpen  their  bayonets , 
and  we  had  no  difficulty  on  that  score. 

Being  at  guaxd,  at  engage  right:  1.  At  left  ann,  2.  Cut,  3. 
Guard.  Raise  point  over  that  of  your  opponent,  turning  rifle  at 
the  same  time  so  that  the  edge  of  the  bayonet  will  be  down;  lunge 
(foot  movement),  and  cut  down  at  opponent's  left  arm  or  hand. 
Resume  the  guard. 

Being  at  guard,  at  engage  left  or  right:  1.  At  left  hand,  2.  Cut, 
3.  Guard.  Dro^  point  of  bayonet  until  point  is  about  8  inches 
below  opponent's  left  hand,  turning  rifle  so  that  the  edge  will  be 
down;  limge  (foot  movement),  and  cut  with  false  edge  at  left  hand. 
The  guard  for  this  is  low  parry  right,  rear  pass,  lunge,  throw  point, 
or  stop  thrust. 

All  the  engagemesnts  laid  down  in  the  Manual  were  taught, 
and  the  cut  over  in  addition. 

Being  at  guard,  at  engage  right  oi;  Left :  1.  Cut,  2.  Over.  Raise 
your  point  until  it  clears  that  of  your  opponent,  then  drop  your 
point  to  the  other  engage.    Do  not  draw  rifle  to  the  rear. 

Practice  the  following:    Engage  right,  engage  right  and  lefts 


02 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 


cut  over  and  engage  left,  cut  over  and  engage  right,  engage  right 
and  left  and  cut  over,  etc.,  etc. 


Low  Parry  Right. 


Low  Parry  Left. 


Being  at  guard :  1.  Low  parry,  2.  Right.  Cany  the  point  of  the 
bayonet  about  6  inches  to  the  left,  then  diop  the  point,  desciibing 
a  quaitei-cucle  to  the  light  until  point  is  about  6  inches  to  the  right 
of  and  at  least  36  inches  in  fiont  of  light  knee.  Finisji  with  a  snap 
like  cracking  a  whip.  A  common  eiroi  in  executing  this  movement 
is  to  drop  the  point  to  the  front  and  right.  At  the  completion  of  the 
movement  the  man  will  be  in  the  coiiect  position,  but  his  opponent 
will  have  gotten  inside  of  his  pariy.  The  point  mus't  fiist  be  moved 
to  the  left  and  then  lowered  and  brought  to  the  right  to  catch  the 
other  rifle  and  parry  the  attack.  Another  common  error  is  to  have 
the  point  too  far  to  the  right;  6  inches  is  really  more  than  enough. 

Being  at  guard:  1.  Low  parry,  2.  Left.  Carry  point  of  bayonet 
6  inches  to  the  right,  then  diop  point  and  desciibe  a  quarter-circle 
to  the  left  imtil  point  is  12  inches  to  the  left  of  and  at  least  36 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


93 


inched  in  fiont  of  left  knee.  ,  Finish  with  a  sinap  like  cracking  a 
whip.  The  12  inches  to  the  left  of  the  left  knee  is  nfecessaiy  to 
protect  the  left  thigh. 

A  common  error  is  to  raise  the  point  and  desjcribe  a  circle  out- 
waid  and  to  the  left.  The  man  may  be  in  the  correct  position  at 
the  completion  of  the  movement,  but  his  opponent  will  have  gotten 
inside  of  his  parry.  Point  must  first  be  moved  to  the  right  (to 
coirect  this  tendency),  then  lowered  and  moved  to  the  left  to  catch 
opponent'?  lifle  and  paiiy  attack. 


High  Parry  Right. 


High  Parry  Left. 


Being  at  guard,  a  cavalryman  passing  you  on  your  right  flank 
and  delivering  a  right  low  cut:  1.  High  parry,  2.  Right.  At  the 
second  command  laise  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  until  vertical; 
at  the  same  time  carry  it  to  the  right  so  that  the  right  hand  will  be 
opposite  to  and  about  12  inches  fiom  the  light  hip,  left  hand  grasping 
the  piece  at  the  balance,  piece  about  14  inches  in  fiont  of  second 


94  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

button  on  the  blouse,  baiiel  towards  the  body,  piece  veitical.  (Body 
must  turn  slightly  to  the  light  on  hips.)  This  parry  covers  the 
whole  light  side  fiom  the  hips  above  the  head. 

Being  at  guard,  a  cavalrjonan  passing  you  on  your  left  flank 
and  deliveiing  a  left  low  cut:  1.  High  parry,  2.  Left.  At  the 
second  command  laipe  the  piece  with  the  left  hand  until  veitical;  at 
the  same  time  cany  it  to  the  left,  light  aim  close  to  body,  light 
foreaim  hoiizontal,  right  hand  in  fiont  of  left  hip,  ban  el  to  the  lear, 
left  elbow  between  lifle  and  body,  piece  suppoited  by  fingers  of  left 
hand,  thumb  pointing  to  the  fiont,  head  and  eyes  turned  to  the  left, 
body  facing  squaiely  to  the  front.  This  pairy  covers  the  whole  left 
side,  fiom  the  hips  to  above  the  head. 

Each  diill  should  alwaye  commence  and  end  with  at  least  five 
minutes  (by  the  watch)  being  devoted  to  thrust,  lunge,  and  throw 
point.  Five  minutes  of  each  diill  ^nould  always  be  devoted  to 
thiusting  at  rope  knots  (suspended)  about  5  inches  in  diametei. 

Do  not  allow  the  men  to  get  too  close.  Make  them  make  an 
effort  to  reach  the  knots;   otherwise  this  exercise  has  Uttle  value. 

The  volts  should  be  taught  and  frequently  practiced.  I  beiieve 
that  it  is  best,  in  making  the  volts,  to  turn  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot. 
Biing  the  rifle  to  port  arms  when  volting;  you  will  find  that  you 
pieseive  youi  balance  better. 

It  may  have  been  noticed  that  in  the  abpve  couise  no  time  was 
devoted  \jo  foot  movements.  Men  dhould  know  these  and  the 
Manual  before  taking  up  this  couis^e. 

It  must  be  understood  tnat  the  above  couise  can  only  be  given 
after  men  have  had  some  instiuction  in  bayonet  exercise;  otherwise 
it  will  take  at  least  foity  lessons  to  make  a  man  proficient,  and  this 
instruction  would  have  to  be  given  consfecutively. 

My  stihedule  was  arranged  as  follows: 
First  five  lessons,  attacks; 
Second  five  lessons,  parries; 

Third  five  lessons,  attacks  and  parries  in  combination; 
Fourth  five  lessons,  combat. 

Plastions  and  masks  weie  not  used  in  the  first  fifteen  lessons. 

All  movements  were  executed  at  command,  and  when  both 
lines  engaged,  movements  were  made  carefully,  so  there  was  no 
danger.    Plastrons  and  masks  were  always  used  in  combat. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  95 

When  men  have  been  through  the  above  couise,  they  will  be 
able  to  work  out  innumerable  combinations  and  will  have  a  good 
practical  working  kno\vledge  of  bayonet  fighting. 

Remarks  on  Fencing  Equipment. 

The  mask  is  good  and  strong  and  leaves  little  to  be  desired. 
It  would  be  better  if  the  mesh  were  a  little  coarser  and  the  wires  a 
little  laigei,  so  that  men  could  see  better. 

The  plasjbron  is  not  entirely  satisfactory.  The  sleeves  ehould 
come  to  the  wrists  and  the  chest  be  padded  a  little  more. 

The  gloves  are  not  s  atisfactory.  We  have  a  striking  weapon 
(cutting  bayonet),  yet  there  is  no  padding  oVer  the  wrists.  I  found 
it  necessary  to  have  my  men  pad  the^ir  wrists  to  skve  them  from 
mariy  nasty  blows.  The  leather  used  in  the  gloves  tears  too  easily 
and  is  not  thick  enough.  The  padding  in  the  gloves  is  not  thick 
enough.  Many  men  frequently  get  nasty  cuts  and  blows  due  to 
this  defect. 

The  fencing  bayonets  are  a  joke.  They  bear  abstplutely  no 
resemblance  to  our  bayonet,  break  at  the  Sjlightest  provocation,  and 
are  fastened  to  the  rifle  by  two  bands  cut  seven-eighths  through 
by  screw-holes,  and  break  at  the  first  blow  in  cons^equence.  I  de- 
vised a  reinforcement  for  holding  the  bayonet  to  the  rifle,  which 
cost  very  little  and  was  made  by  the  post  blacksmith  from  a  model 
furnislhed  by  me.  It  can  be  readily  made  from  the  drawing  shown. 
I  believe  that  the  bayonet  should  be  made  stiffer.  Many  men  are 
struck  fairly,  but  do  not  know  it.  The  bayonet  should  be  firm 
enough  to  give  a  blow  that  would  be  felt  without  injuring  a  man. 

The  rifle  is  satisfactory  and  leaves  little  to  be  desired.  Spare 
parts  and  extra  gun  stocks  should  be  isfeuedwith  each  rifle,  so  that 
repairs  could  be  made  in  the  company.  I  have  never  been  able  to 
get  extra  gun  stocks  or  spare  parts  for  my  fencing  iifles;  conse- 
quently it  has  always  been  necessjary  to  send  them  to  an  arsenal 
for  repairs,  which  wastes  a  lot  of  time  and  is  unnecessarily  ex- 
pensive. An  infantry  officer  of  experience  in  this  subject  should  be 
ordered  to  an  arsenal  and  permitted  to  experiment  with  the  fencing 
equipment  until  a  satisSfactory  one  was  developed.  It  should  not 
cost  much,  nor  would  it  be  difficult  or  take  much  time;  thirty  days 
would  be  ample. 


m  COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 


CHAPTER  VI. 
PROPERTY. 

The  most  difficult  problem  that  govemois  of  States,  adjutant 
geneials,  and  National  Guard  officeis  generally  have  to  solve  is  the 
car 6  and  pieseivation  of  Fedeial  and  State  piopeity.  This  is  due 
to  many  causes^  among  which  may  be  mentioned  a  faulty  militia 
system,  lack  of  discipline,  and  ignorance  on  the  part  of  officeis  and 
men  in  regaid  to  accountability  and  responsibility. 

The  govemoi  of  a  State  is  responsible  and  accountable  to  the 
Federal  Government  foi  all  Fedeial  piopeity  issued  to  the  State. 
However,  the  governor  of  a  State  is  not  bonded,  and  the  only  way 
that  the  Fedeial  Government  can  recovei  fiom  a  State  for  propeity 
lost  of  damaged  is  to  withhold  the  amount  from  the  next  allotment 
due  such  State,  or  to  charge  it  against  a  current  allotment. 

The  adjutant  general  of  a  State  is  not  bonded  fo!r  the  Federal 
pioperty  which  is  practically  in  his  care,  although  he  is  diiectly  re- 
sponsible and  accountable  to  his  goveinoi.  The  position  of  the  ad- 
jutant general  in  the  State  is  practically  that  of  the  Secretary  of 
Wax  in  the  Federal  Government.  He  handles  the  property,  but 
cannot  be  held  responsible  foi  its  los^  ol  damage  in  a  pecuniaiy  way. 
Of  couise,  he  is  morally  responsible  to  the  governor. 

The  piactice  in  most  States  is  to  bond  the  company  com- 
mandeis  and  other  officeis  lesponsiible  for  State  and  Federal  prop- 
erty; but  this  bond  is  a  State  bond,  and  the  officer  is  responsible  to 
the  Stat^only. 

The  greatest  difficulty  encjounteied  in  caring  foi  Federal  and 
State  pioperty  is  to  get  officeis  and  men  to  thoroughly  leaUze  that 
when  an  article  is  lost,  it  must  be  accounted  for  and  paid  for  by 
some  one-^  usually  the  company  commander  or  other  officer  re- 
sponsible and  accountable.  Another  thing  that  they  do  not  thor- 
oughly appreciate  is  that  when  one  officer  is  *'long"  (or  ahead)  on 
property  some  other  officiei  or  man  is  boimd  to  be  "short"  (or 
behind)  and  this  man  is  the  one  who  is  "stuck"  for  it.  If  National 
Guard  officeis  and  men  would  cooperate  with  each  other ^  as  is  done 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  97 

in  the  rlegular  petvice,  and  when  they  find  that  they  are  *4ong" 
on  some  articje  would  help  other  officers  out  who  are  "shorit,"  it 
would  simplify  matters  greatly;  but  the  majority  will  not  do  this, 
as  they  have  the  ever-present  fear  that  they  too  may  be  "shoit" 
at  some  time. 

The  system  of  issuing  property  t^  enlis'ted  men  is  usually  faulty 
in  that  no  receipts  aie  taken  at  the  time  of  issue,  frequently  no 
record  is  kept  of  the  issue,  and  often  men  are  allowed  to  take  the 
property  home.  This  system  is  peimicious*,  and  will  invariably 
result  in  loss. 

Later  on  I  will  outline  a  system  which,  if  followed,  will  enable 
responsible  officers  to  keep  tracji  of  property  isbued,*  and  which 
should  prevent  loss  to  a  great  extent. 

Accountability  and  Responsibility. 

Much  misunderstanding  exists  in  the  minds  of  National  Guard 
officers  in  regard  to  resi)onsibility  and  accountability.  An  officer 
is  automatically  res^osible  for  any  property,  Federal  or  State,  which 
comes  into  his  possession  in  any  marmer  whatsbever.  An  officer  is 
accountable  fo!r  any  property  which  has  been  invoiced  to  him  and 
for  which  he  has  signed  receipts  and  for  which  he  makes  a  return. 
An  officer  can  be  respponslble  foi  property  without  being  accountable 
for  the  same.  An  officdr  can  be  accountable  for  property  without 
being  responsible  for  it.  For  example,  when  he  carries  prbperty  on 
his  returns  for  which  he  has  signed  receipts  and  which  he  has  issued 
on  a  memorandum  receipt.  The  officer  who  signs  the  receipt  be- 
comes responsible  for  the  property,  while  the  first  officer  is  still  ac- 
countable for  it,  as  he  still  carries  it  on  his  papers.  He  become  re- 
sponsible foi  it  only  if  the  memorandum  receipt  is  lost  or  destroyed 
or  in  case  he  has  allowed  it  to  leave  hisf  hands  without  taking  a  re- 
ceipt. If  he  issued  property  on  a  memorandum  receipt  without 
authority  for  so  doing,  he  retains  his  respohsibility.  However,  the 
other  officer  is  aisp  responsible  for  the  property  by  the  mere  fact  of 
it  having  come  into  his  possession.  It  does  not  matter  how  he  gets 
possession  of  Federal  or  State  property;  if  it  is  in  his  posgesfe5on,  he 
becomes  automatically  responsible  for  its  care  and  preservation. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  that  an  officer  can  be  responsible 


98  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

for  piopeity  without  being  accountjabie  foi  it;  he  can  be  accountable 
foi  pi operty  without  being  ies\)onsibe  foi  it;  and  lastly,  he  can  be 
both  lerponsible  and  accountable  foi  property  in  his  possession. 
He  will  abo  retain  hit  lesponsibility  and  accountabihty  foi  it  if  it  is 
lost  oi  destroyed  until  he  has  been  cleared  by  a  board  of  survey. 
If  he  is  cleared  by  the  surveying  officer  frpm  all  responsibility  foi  its 
loss  or  damaged  condition  and  the  proceedings  are  approved  by  the 
Secretary  of  War,  then  the  approved  proceedings  are  a  voucher  by 
which  the  officer  can  drop  the  property  from  his  return;  or,  if  he  is  re- 
sponsible for  it  only,  then  the  approved  proceedings  will  clear  him 
from  lesponsibility.  The  approval  of  the  governoi  will  allow  him 
to  drop  State  property. 

Property  Responsibility. 

Any  officer  or  enHsted  man  who  has  Federal  or  State  property 
in  his  possession  is  responsible  for  it,  its  care  and  preservation,  so 
long  as  the  property  is  in  his  hands.  There  are  no  exceptions  to 
this  rule  whatsoever.  He  has  no  light  to  sell,  give,  or  otherwise 
dispo  Sfe  of  this  propel ty;  if  he  does,  he  is  guilty  of  a  Federal  offense, 
foi  which  he  can  be  severely  punished  by  a  United  States  courlt;  and 
there  are  usually  State  laws  which  cover  State  property. 

It  is  the  duty  of  any  officer  or  man  who  acquires  Federal  or 
State  property,  except  by  regular  issue  or  purchase  (when  expressly 
allowed  by  law),  to  immediately  report  the  fact  to  his  superior  offi- 
cer and  turn  the  property  over  to  him,  so  that  it  can  be  taken  up 
on  returns  and  properly  accounted  foi. 

It  is  the  duty  of  any  officer  who  receives  property  under  the 
above  conditions  to  immediately  take  the  same  up  on  his  returns 
with  appiojpiiate  remarks,  such  as  "Found  at  si/ation,"  "Turned 
in,"  etc.  An  officer  who  fails  to  do  this  is  guilty  of  a  geiious  offense, 
for  which  he  can  and  should  be  punis^hed. 

Property  Accountability. 
An  officei  who  is  accountable  fo!r  piopeity  s)hould  make  regular, 
correct,  and  pi^ompt  returns  for  the  same.  This  is  woefully  neg- 
lected in  the  National  Guard,  and  the  avoidable  loss  of  much 
property  results.  Thouslands  of  dollars'  worth  of  property  is  an- 
nually lost  through  this  cause  alone.      In  leality  the  propeity  is 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  99 

not  actually  lost,  but  all  record  of  its  whereabouts  is  lost,  which 
amounts  to  the  same  *jhing.  I  have  known  of  cases  where  an  active 
campaign  of  piopeity-hunting  bi^ught  to  light  two  oi  three  thousand 
dollars'  woith  of  propeity  in  a  single  State. 

Few  company  commandeis  in  the  National  Guard  leally  know 
just  how  much  propeity  they  are  accoimtable  for.  They  usually 
depend  upon  the  quarteimastei  seigeant,  and  he  ia  either  caieiess 
and  loses  tiack  of  the  piopeity  oi  he  goes  to  the  othei  extreme  and 
attaches  himself  to  any  aiticle  that  happens  to  come  within  leach, 
thereby  making  some  othei  quaiteimastei  seigeant  and  accountable 
office!  "short."  This  is  usually  treated  as  a  joke,  when  in  reality 
it  is  a  i-eiious  offense,  which  should  be  rigidly  surpiessed. 

Frequently  accountable  officers  are  ignorant  of  the  method  to 
pursue  to  clear  themselves  from  responsibility  for  property  lost, 
damaged,  or  worn  out  through  fair  wear  and  tear  in  the  service. 
This  is  another  cause  of  f hortage.  Property  becomes  unserviceable 
through  fair  wear  and  tear,  and  this  fact  is  not  reported  to  the  ac- 
countable officer  by  the  quartermaster  s^eigeant.  The  property 
lies  around  the  store-room,  becoming  more  worthless  and  un- 
sightly from  day  to  day,  and  finally  the  quartermaster  seigeant,  or 
the  aitificei,  oi  the  armorei,  oi  someone  else,  concludes  that  it  is 
an  eye-soie,  of  no  value  any  way,  and  he,  whoevei  he  may  happen 
to  be,  puts  it  in  the  ash-can.  When  a  check  is  made,  the  accountable 
officei  is  "short,"  and  no  one  remembeis  what  became  of  the  article, 
or  if  he  does  he  holds  his  peace,  because  he  finds  that  he  has  done 
wrong  and  does  not  want  to  be  "called  down."  If  a  survey  had 
been  asked  for  as  soon  as  the  article  became  unserviceable,  and  it 
was  examined  and  acted  upon  at  once,  this  would  not  happen, 
and  the  officei  would  not  be  "short." 

It  may  be  taken  as  a  rule  that  more  piopeity  is  misplaced  in 
the  National  Guaid  than  is  actually  stolen  or  lost. 

When  piopeity  is  lost  or  stolen,  the  lesponsible  officei  should 
immediately  lequest  a  survey  to  investigate,  repoit  upon,  and  fix 
the  responsibility  for  the  loss.  If  an  officer  neglects  to  do  this  at 
once,  he  may  be  pietty  sure  that  he  will  be  "shoit"  in  his  piopeity 
and  will  have  great  difficulty  in  dealing  himself  later,  as  it  is  then 
difficult  to  get  affidavits,  and  the  people  coiicerned  forget  the  cir« 


100  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 

cumstances  oi  have  left  the  State  or  locality  and  cannot  be  leached. 
Under  these  circumstances  it  is  veijy  difficult  foi  the  suiveying 
officer  to  ascertain  the  facts  and  arrive  at  a  definite  conclusion.  He 
usually  has  but  one  course  open,  and  that  is  to  find  the  accountable 
officer  responsible,  when,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  the  property  may  have 
been  lost  through  circumstances  over  which  the  accountable  officer 
had  no  control;  but  his  failure  to  take  prompt  steps  to  clear  himself 
lesults  in  his  having  to  pay  for  the  property.  Under  these  circum- 
stances he  has  no  one  to  blame  but  himself. 

Causes  Which  Produce  Avoidable  Loss. 

Carelessness  in  making  out  property  returns. 

Carelessness  in  checking  property. 

Carelessness  in  iss^uing  property. 

Carelessness  in  marking  property. 

Lack  of  system  in  caring  for  property  in  store-rooms. 

Permitting  unauthoiiz,ed  persons  to  have  access  to  store-rooms. 

Permitting  unauthotrized  persons  to  have  Government  property 
in  their  possession. 

Allowing  officers  and  enlisted  men  to  take  property  to  theii 
homes,  instead  of  keeping  it  in  the  armory  at  all  times  (when  not 
actually  in  use),  as  required  by  law. 

Failure  to  check  property  periodically. 

Failure  to  apply  for  surveys  promptly  when  property  If  lost, 
damaged,  or  worn  out. 

Failure  to  carefully  check  property  when  issued  prior  to  going 
to  camp. 

Lack  of  discipline  and  failure  to  hold  squad-leaders  responsible 
foi  property  while  in  camp. 

Failure  to  carefully  check  property  after  the  return  from  camp. 

Lack  of  system  in  packing  and  storing  property  in  going  to  and 
coming  from  camp. 

Ignorance  on  the  part  of  officers  and  men  in  caring  for  property 
generally. 

And  last,  but  not  least,  lack  of  discipline. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INPANTI^'Y}.''  101 

Causes  Which  Produce  Unavoidable  Loss. 

Theft. 

Deseition. 

File. 

Bui^laiy. 

Insecure  stoie-iooms.  (Fault  of  spmepne,  but  not  always 
responsible  officei.) 

Lack  of  stoiage  facilities.  (Fault  of  someone,  but  not  always 
I  esponsible  officer.) 

Loss  of  piopeity  in  field  seivice.     (Not  smnmei  camps.) 

Method  of  Applying  for  Board  of  Survey. 

Read  caiefully  Paiagiaphs  105  to  127,  "Regulations  of  the 
Wai  Depaitment  foi  the  Oiganiz^d  Militia,"  1910. 

Read  caiefully  Paiagiaphs  710  to  726,  "U.  S.  Aimy  Regula- 
tions," 1913. 

National  Guard  officeis  aie  not  peimitted  to  submit  ceitificates 
in  place  of  affidavits',  as  is  done  in  the  Regular  Seivice. 

Officeis  and  enlisted  men  of  the  Organized  Militia  must  submit 
affidavits  containing  what  they  know  about  the  los^,  damage,  oi 
destiuction  o^  Fedeial  pippeity.  •  ' 

Some  States  have  special  legulations  in  legaid  to  State  property. 

Write  a  letliei  to  the  adjutant  general  of  the  State,  requesting 
that  a  surveying  officer  be  appointed,  in  the  following  form: 

Origanization, 

Place, 
Fiom:    Officer  making  appUcation.  Date. 

To:    The  Adjutant  General,  State  of  — ^— . 

Subject:  Request  that  emveying  officei  be  appointed  to  act 
on  (state  class  of  piopeity).  Request  that  a  suiveying  officei  be 
appointed  to  examine  into,  xepoit  upon,  and  fix  the  lesponsibility 
foi  (heie  state  loss,  destruction,  or  damaged  condition  of)  toe  fol- 
lowing (heie  state  class  of  piopeity,  oidnance,  quaiteimastei, 
medical)  ai tides,  the  piopeity  of  the  United  States  oi  of  the  State 
of  — ,  which  was  issued  to  (heie  state  individual  oi  organiza- 
tion), and  for  which  I  am  lesponsible  and  accountable  oi  (respon- 
sible) or  (accountable)  (as  the  case  may  be),  and  which  has  (here 
state  briefly  the  circumstances  of  the  case)  lost,  destroyed,  or  has 
become  unserviceable  thiough  fail  wear  and  tear  in  the  State  Service. 

Fill  out  D.  M.  A.  Form  No.  16c  and  forward  it  with  letter.  (For 
Federal  property  only.)  Signature. 


102  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 

Befoie  making  this  application,  cariefully  investigate  the  cii- 
clumsltances  yourself  and  s  ecuie  all  the  evidence  that  you  can  in  the 
foim  of  affidavits,  30  that  when  the  auiveying  officei  ai  lives  you  will 
have  a  complete  cas  e  to  present  to  him.  Don't  put  this  off  until 
he  aiiive^,  becjausfe  men  may  tell  you  one  thing  and  tell  the  suiveying 
officei  an  entiiely  diffieient  stoiy. 

You  should  have  a  supply  of  Division  of  Mihtia  Affaiis  Foim 
16c  on  hand.  If  you  have  not  got  them,  wiite  to  the  adjutant 
geneial  of  the  State  foi  them  befoie  you  lequest  the  suivey. 

When  the  sjuiveying  officei  has  completed  his  repoit  and  it  has 
been  appioved  01  dislappioved  by  the  Secietaiy  of  Wai  (in  case  of 
Federal  property)  or  by  the  governor  (in  the  case  of  State  property), 
you  will  be  notified  by  the  adjutant  general  and  will  then  know 
whethei  you  have  been  cleaied  01  not,  and  what  disposition  to  make 
of  the  plopeity,  assuming  that  it  has  not  been  lost.  Until  you  le- 
ceive  this  notification  you  aie  still  lesponsible  01  accountable,  01 
both,  and  the  property  ihust  be  caiijied  on  youi  letuins  (if  you 
make  any). 

Remembei,  a  sepaiate  smvey  lepoit  must  be  made  in  the  case  • 
of  each  class  of  piopeity.  Foi  example,  don't  place  oidnancte  and 
quartermaster  property  on  the  same  survey  repoit.  If  you  have 
oidnance,  quaiteimaatei,  and  medicpl  supplies  to  be  acted  upon,  it 
will  lequiie  thifee  sepaiate  suivey  lepoits.  Some  States  peimit  dif- 
ferent cesses  of  piopeity  to  be  placed  on  the  same  lepoit,  but  this 
applies  to  piopeity  owned  by  the  State  only.  It  can  never  be  done 
with  United  States  piopeity  under  any  circumstances.  This  rule 
holds  good  in  making  out  lequisitions  foi  United  States  piopeity,  if 
you  evei  entei  the  Fedei  al  Sei  vice.  A  stepai  ate  i  equisition  is  required 
foi  eadh  class  of  piopeity.  Much  of  the  conf\isjion  and  delay  in 
getting  piopeity  duiing  the  Spanish  Wai  was  due  to  the  fact  that 
National  Guaid  and  Volimteei  officei s  did  not  know  this.  I  know 
of  one  casle  which  occuiied  duiing  this  wai  in  which  an  officei  made 
out  a  1  equisition  foi  a  horsje,  saddle,  blankets,  clothing,  and  com- 
mi-  saiy  sjupplies  all  on  one  i equisition,  and  then  damned  the  Gov- 
ernment because  he  did  not  get  them. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 


103 


K  o 

•  a 


H 

O 
Pi 


6. 

Manner  in  which  Articles  were  Lost,  Destroy- 
ed, Damaged,  or  have  become  Unserviceable 
or  Unsuitable  for  Service,  and  Particulars  in 
which  Unserviceable  or  Unsuitable. 

1  !  1  !  !  i  !  !  1  !  !  !  1  !  !  !  !  1  !  !  1  1  1  !  1 

1     1     1     1     1     t     1     i     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1     1 

I  1  '  '  I  1  1  '  '  I  '  I  '  I  '  1  1  I  I  I  !  !  1  I  ! 

6. 

Existing 

Condition  of 

Property. 

!  !  ;  !  !  !  :   ;  1  ;  !  !  !  !  !  !  !  1  1   !  !  !  !  !  i 

i  !  i  i  ;  !  i  !  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  !  i  i  i  i  i  i  i  i 

4. 

Condition  of 

Property  when 

Received. 

2.                     3. 

When  Re- 
Quantity,   ceived  by  Or- 
1    ganization. 

-; 

i 

< 

13 

0 

r-(r-lr-lr-t^,-lrHrH^r-.r«l(NC^(N(N(N 

OQ  B 
O    (U 


a>  (u 
2  o 


^S 


if  J 


0,==     ; 

t.«^  i 

«*^  r  a>  oQ 

f»  <u  d  "^ 
JeS.2  2 

^    IV   U   <i) 


1:?  O 


09    M 

03  O 

:'3  Is** 

«  S  ft  a> 
^  «^-J^  d 


104  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


INSTRUCTIONS. 

1.  Officeis  lesponsible  foi  piopeity  to  be  surveyed  will  list 
s;ame  on  Foim  No.  16c,  Division  of  Militia  Affaiisj,  and  complete 
the  affidavit  at  the  bottom  of  Md  foim.  To  this  affidavit  should 
be  attached  the  affidavits  of  all  peisons  having  knowledge  of  ma- 
terial facts  bearing  on  the  loss  of,  damage  to,  or  condition  of  the 
property,  and  all  evidence  on  which  the  responsible  officer  relies 
for  reUer  from  accountability.  When  all  evidenre  is  complete,  it 
will  be  forwarded  to  the  quaijter master  general  of  the  State  (or  the 
adjutant  general,  depending  upon  State  regulations). , 

2.  Property  to  be  surveyed  will  be  considered  under  three 
headings,  viz.:  "Unserviceable  through  Fair  Wear  and  Tear  in 
Service,''  "Lost,  Destroyed,  or  Damaged  on  Account  of  Fire,"  and 
"Lost.  Destroyed,  or  Darnaged  thiou^  Other  Causes."  Affidavits 
should  cover  but  one  class  of  property. 

3.  When  received  at  the  State  arsenal,  affidavits  of  respon- 
sible officers  will  be  attached  to  Form  No.  16,  Division  of  Mihtia 
Affaiis,  and  the  total  quantities  of  the  several  articles  Usted  thereon, 
together  with  the  total  value  of  the  property  as  shown  by  current 
pi  ice  lists. 

4.  Each  report  of  survey  should  cover  but  one  of  the  classes 
of  property  detailed  in  Paragraph  2. 

5.  When  completed,  all  papers  will  be  forwarded  to  the  adju- 
tant general,  who  will  appoint  an  officer  to  survey  the  property. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  105 

Following  is  a  sysjbem  to  be  followed  to  prevent  pi  opeityfiom 
being  lost  or  misplaced,  and  the  method  to  be  usjed  In  oaiing  foi 
unseiviceable  piopeity  until  ^jame  is  piopeily  disposM  of.  The 
caie  of  piopeity  is  pietty  well  coveied  by  a  previous  chaptei  in  this 
book,  but  f 01  convenience  and  leference  the  piopei  system  to  be 
followed  will  be  outlined  again  in  this  chapter: 

1.  Eveiy  article  of  Goj^einment  piopeity  should  be  piopeily 
marked,  as  lequiied  by  oideis  an(|  regulations.  Read  Pa^agiaphs 
281,  290,  292,  2^,  294,  aud  especially  295,  "United  States  Aimy 
Regulations,"  1910.  It  is  not  necess^iy  to  maik  lifles,  as  each  lifle 
has  a  numbei.  Gun-pliags  and  all  othei  leathei  equipments  can 
and  should  be  marked.  Regulations  do  not  lequire  clothing  to  be 
marked  in  the  Regular  Service,  but  it  is  usually  maiked  on  the  inside 
with  the  letter  of  the  company  and  numbei  of  the  legiment  and  the 
man's  company  individual  numbei.  In  the  National  Guaid  I  con- 
sider it  absolutely  necessary  to  mark  clothing.  If  this  is  not  done, 
it  is  practically  impossible  to  fix  responsibiUty  for  the  lo^  of  clothing 
or  keep  track  of  it.  For  instancte.  Brown  los'es  his  blouse;  it  is  not 
maiked;  he  picks  up  Smith's,  of  his  own  or  another  company,  and 
Smith  is  "shy'*  a  blouse  and  so  is  his  company  commander,  and 
theie  is  no  way  of  fixing  the  responsibility.  If  clothing  is  properly 
marked,  this  cannot  be  done,  because  an  irispection  will  reveal  the 
real  culpiit.  This  fact  will  make  enlisted  men  decidedly  moie 
caieful  in  the  caie  of  piopeity.  It  is  the  same  way  with  canteens 
and  haversacks  and  othei  oidnance  piopeity.  If  they  aie  pibpeily 
maiked,  they  will  not  get  lost,  or  be  stolen;  but  if  they  aie  not,  they 
will  almost  certainly  be  lost  or  at  least  rni^aid,  which  will  amount 
to  the  same  thing,  as  far  as  the  accountal3le  officer  is  concerned. 
The  only  safe  rule  to  follow  is  to  mark  everything  that  is  movable. 

2.  Keep  an  acduate  Record  in  the  company  of  every  article 
that  you  are  accountable  oi  iesi)onsible  foi.  Keep  this  lecoid 
youiself  and  lequue  the  quaiteiinas'tei  seigeant  oi  aiknoi'ifei  to  keep 
a  duplicate  of  it. 

3.  See  that  youi  stoie-ioom  is  secuie  and  that  no  unauthoiized 
peisons  have  access  to  it.  The  piactice  of  taking  enlis]ted  men  into 
the  stoie-ipom  to  be  fitted  to  clothing  oi  to  have  aims  and  equip- 
ments issued  to  them  is  wrong.    Theie  should  be  a  half-dooi,  and 


106  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

ai^icles  slhould  be  pa^Ssed  out  to  the  men  when  necessiary.  They 
should  nevei  be  peimitted  to  entei  the  sJtoie-ioom,  even  when  the 
quaiteimastei  sergeant  is  present.  He  may  tuin  his  back.  Tiust 
eveiybody,  but  don't  take  any  chances. 

4.  Have  articles  systematically  arranged  in  the  store-room. 
It  does  not  matter  what  system  you  use,  provided  you  have  some 
system.  Have  all  ordnance  in  one  part  of  the  room  and  each  article 
in  a  place  by  itself.  For  instance,  don't  mix  knivesj,  forks,  spoons, 
and  oiler  and  thong-cases.  Have  all  clothing  arranged  in  another 
part  of  the  room  and  keep  the  different  articles  separated — ^blousies 
in  one  place,  breeches  in  another,  hats  in  another,  etc. 

5.  Have  boxes  with  locks  arranged  in  which  to  store  un- 
serviceable property — one  for  ordnance,  another  for  quartermaster 
property,  etc.  Just  as  soon  as  an  article  becomes  .unserviceable, 
place  it  in  its  proper  box  and  lock  the  box.  It  Sjhould  remain  there 
until  it  has  been  properly  acted  upon  by  a  surveying  officer  and 
properly  dispos'ed  of.  If  you  use  this  system,  it  won't  be  placed  in 
the  ash-can. 

6.  Have  a  special  gim-rack  for  disabled  rifles  and  place  a  rifle 
in  this  rack  as  sjoon  as  it  needs  repairs.  Tag  it  so  that  you  can  see 
at  a  glance  j  usjb  what  is  the  matter  with  it  and  what  it  needs. 

7.  Have  a  special  box  with  compartments  in  which  to  keep 
spare  parts  for  rifles  and  other  equipment.  The  practice  usually 
followed  is  to  have  one  box  and  dump  everything  into  it.  The 
result  of  this  practice  is  that  you  never  can  find  what  you  want,  and 
more  than  half  the  time  you  don't  know  exactly  what  you  have  or 
what  you  need.  I  know  of  one  company  that  had  a  third  of  its 
rifles  out  of  commifi|s)ion  and  had  plenty  of  spare  parte  to  repair 
them,  but  these  parts  were  in  a  box  with  old  buttons  and  other 
perfectly  useless  junk,  and  no  one  in  the  company  knew  that  they 
were  in  the  store-room  at  all.  You  may  think  that  this  was  an 
exceptional  casp,  but  my  experience  has  been  that  it  is  not  the 
exception,  but  the  normal  case  in  the  National  Guard. 

8.  Keep  a  book  in  which  is  entered  every  article  of  clothing 
and  equipment  issued.  Make  the  man  sign  a  receipt  in  this  book 
when  he  gets  the  property.  This  is  a  better  system  than  slips,  be- 
cause they  get  lost  and  misplaced;  a  book  does  not.     Never  under 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  107 

any  circumstances  let  anything  get  out  of  the  store-room  without 
taking  a  receipt  for  it.  Now  this  may  seem  like  a  lot  of  woik, 
but,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  it  is  much  easier  than  periodically  having 
to  hunt  for  lost  and  strayed  property  and  will  not,  in  the  long  nm, 
take  a  quarter  of  the  time. 

9.  Nevei  let  youi  men  take  and  keep  property  in  their  home. 
It  is  contrary  to  law  in  the  first  place,  and  you  will  almost  surely 
have  to  pay  foi  the  property  if  you  do. 

10.  See  that  each  man  has  a  lockei  with  a  lock  on  it,  in  which 
he  can  place  piopeity  issued  to  him.  If  you  have  his  leceipt  and  he 
loses  the  property,  you  can  usually  collect  foi  it  by  means  of  the 
delinquency  comt.  Thi^  of  course,  is  covered  by  State  law,  but 
most  States  have  fi^me  way  of  recovering. 

11.  Make  periodical  inspections,  slay  every  three  months,  and 
check  up  your  property, 

12.  I  have  found  that  it  is  much  better  and  muqh  simpler  to* 
have  the  blanket-rolls  made  up  at  all  times.  If  you  have  to  turn 
out  in  a  hurry,  you  are  prepared.  These  rolls  should  be  made  up 
under  the  supervision  of  an  officer,  and  you  will  find  that  blankets, 
pins,  poles,  ropes,  etc.,  will  not  nearly  so  readily  get  lost  or 
misplaced. 

13.  Keep  your  haversacks  complete  the  same  way,  with  knife, 
fork,  spoon,  tin  cup,  bacon  bag,  and  skit,  coffee,  and  sugar  sack. 
Inspect  them  frequently,  and  thesip  small  articles  will  not  get  lost. 
Theie  shotild  be  a  peg  under  the  blanket-roll,  upon  which  should  be 
hung  the  packed  haversack  and  the  canteen.  If  yoii  habitually  u^  ^ 
gaiiison  belts  for  drill,  the  field  belt  and  suspenders  can  be  hung 
on  this  peg,  and  your  entire  field  equipment  will  be  together. 

14.  Never  remove  the  suspenders  from  the  field  belt;  they 
belong  to  it  and  it  is  required  by  Regulations,  and  this  will  prevent 
them  from  getting  lost  or  mislaid,  as  they  most  surely  will  if  you 
allow  them  to  be  removed. 

15.  Intrenching  tool^,  identification  tags,  and  first-aid  pouches 
and  packets  should  never  be  issued  until  you  are  ordered  to  go  out 
on  sbrvice.  These  articles  will  surely  be  lost  if  you  is^ue  them 
before.  Some  experienced  National  Guard  officers  advocate  the 
keeping  of  front-eight  covers  in  the  atore-room  also. 


108  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

16.  Oilei  and  thong-cases,  biushes,  and  thongs  should  always 
be  kept  in  the  lifles  and  fiequent  inspections  made  to  see  that  they 
aie  theie. 

17.  Nevei  take  ai tides  of  equipment  apart  to  clean  them 
until  you  are  leady  to  do  so;  then  leassemble  them  at  once. 

18.  Follow  the  above  rules,  and  you  should  have  no  difficulty 
in  taking  care  of  youi  property;  neglect  them,  and  you  will  surely 
be  "short." 


WAR  DEPARTMENT, 

OFFrCE  OF  THE  ChIEF  OF  StAFF,        '        '     • 

CrRCULAR  \  Division  of  Mimtia  Affairs, 

No.  7.     /  Washington,  Apiil  30, 1915. 

1.  Information  having  been  requesjted  as  to  whether  or  not 
a  stoppage  can  legally  be  made  against  an  office!  or  enlisted  man  of 
the  Organized  Mihtia  for  loss  or  damage  to  United  States  property 
issued  for  the  use  of  the  Organized  Militia  of  a  State,  and  rf  so, 
whether  or  not  such  6;toppage  can  be  made  against  any  pay  that 
may  be  due  or  become  due  fi'om  allotments*  to  a  State  under  the 
provisions  of  Section  1661,  Revised  Statutes,  or  from  the  Federal 
appropriation  for  "Encampment  and  Maneuvers,  Organized  Mil- 
itia," the  following  opinion  of  the  Judge-Advocate  General  of  the 
Army,  which  has  received  the  approval  of  the  Secieta^y  of  Wa*, 
and  the  pxoceduxe  necessary  to  make  the  stoppages  in  question,  a^e 
published  fox  the  infoiniation  and  guidance  of  the  Organized  Militia 
of  the  United  States! 

The  views  of  this  office  are  desired  on  the  question  whether  or 
not  a  stoppage  can  legally  be  made  against  an  ojBBcer  or  enlisjbed  man 
of  the  Organized  Militia  under  the  provisfions  of  Section  1766  of  the 
Revised  Statutes  for  loss  of  United  States  property,  such  stoppage 
being  made  against  any  pay  that  may  be  due  him  from  Federal 
allotments  to  a  State  under  the  provisions  of  Section  1661  of  the 
Revised  Statutes^  or  from  Federal  appropriations  for  ^'Enckmpment 
and  Maneuvers  of  the  Organized  Militia"  under  the  Act  of  March 
4,1915. 

The  question  arises  on  a  request  fd^  information  "as  to  what 
pro^cedure  is  necessary  to  put  a  stoppage  against  an  officer  of  the 
Organized  Militia  upon  the  United  States  pay-roll,  'Encampment 
and  Maneuvers,'  who  has  lost  Federal  or  State  proper tv." 

Undei  Section  13  of  the  Militia  Act  of  January  ^1,  1903  (32 
Stat.  775),  as  amended,  all  property  issued  to  the  Organized  Mihtia 
remains  "the  piopeity  of  the  United  States"  and  must  be  armually 
"aecoimted  foi  by  the  governor  of  the  State    *    *    *    as  required 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  109 

by  law";  and  the  State  is  theiefoie  responsible,  as  bailee  of  the 
piopeity,  to  the  United  States,  foi  damage  to  oi  loss  of  the  piopeity, 
unless  lelieved  of  such  lesponsibiUty  in  the  mannei  piesiciibed  by 
the  statute.  It  is  theiefoie  the  duty  of  the  State  authoiities,  wheie 
any  officei  oi  soldiei  to  whom  such  piopeity  is  issued  oi  in  whose 
custody  it  is  placed  is  les^onsible  foi  the  loss  theieto  by  theft, 
damage,  etc.,  to  take  such  steps  to  have  the  les^oiisibility  foi  the 
loss  01  damage  fixed  by  a  suiveying  officei  of  the  Militia,  whose  le- 
poit,  when  appioved  by  the  goveinoi,  will  deteimine  whethei  oi 
not  the  State  is  to  be  lelieved  of  ileoponsibihty  foi  the  piopeity. 
See  Section  4,  Act  of  June  22,  1906  (34  Stat.  449).  The  piopeity, 
howevei,  as  stated  above,  lemains  the  piopeity  of  the  United 
States;  and  while  the  Government  lobks  to  the  State  as  bailee  of 
the  piopeity  fox  the  caie  of  the  piopeity,  and  holds  the  State  re- 
sponsible foi  any  loss  oi  damage  theieto,  except  siioh  loss  oi  damage 
as  ie£ults  fi|om  a  cause  with  lespect  to  which  the  State  is  entitlSi 
to  be  relieved;  I  am  cleaily  of  the  opinion  that  the  statutes  do  not 
pieclude  an  officei  or  soldier  of  the  MUitia  who  is  lesponsible  me- 
diately foi  the  loss  01  damage  of  the  piopeity  fiom  being  charged 
therewith. 

Under  the  pi  o visions  of  Section  1766  of  the  Revised  Statutes, 
the  pay  of  any  peison  "who  is  in  aiieais  to  the  United  States" 
may  be  withheld  until  he  has  accoimted  foi  and  paid  into  the 
Tieasuiy  all  s!ums  foi  which  he  may  be  liable;  but  thif  section  has 
appUcation  wheie  theie  aie  transactions  of  a  pecuniary  nature  be- 
tween the  officer  and  the  Government.  Independent  of  thiti  section, 
the  pay  of  any  peison  may  be  withheld  to  make  good  a  lodis  for 
which  he  is  legally  responsible,  unless  there  is  a  statute  which  would 
preclude  such  action.  Under  the  regulations  respecting  the  care  of 
public  property  any  officer  who  has  the  custody  of  Government  prop- 
erty is  responsible  for  it,  regaidless  of  wheie  the  accoimtability  or 
responsibility  might  otherwise  rest  on  paper;  and  thie  general  rule 
is,  that  all  officers  are  responsible  for  any  Government  property  of 
which  they  have  the  custody,  and  the  mere  fact  that  an  officei  has 
not  receipted  foi  any  given  article  olaimot  be  assigned  as  a  warrant 
for  his  failurte  to  exercise  the  utmost  diUgence  under  all  circumstances 
to  see  thatsuch  property  is  properly  safe-guarded.  He  will,  of  course, 
be  liable  only  where  a  losjis  has  been  incurred  and  wheie  it  is  due  to 
his  failure  to  exeicise  that  degree  of  care  which  the  circumstances 
require.  (Dig.  Op.f  J.  A.  G.,  1912, 908F.)  I  see  no  reason,  therefore, 
why  a  regulation  may  not  be  adopted  with  respect  to  Militia  prop- 
erty which  shall  provide  that  wheie  an  officei  oi  enlisjted  man  of  the 
Organized  Mihtia  is  found  by  a  surveying  officer  to  be  responsible 
for  the  loss  of  any  Government  property  isslied  to  him  oi  placed  in 
his  custody,  and  the  lepoilt  of  the  surveying  officei  is  appioved  by 
the  governor  of  the  State,  the  proper  disbur^Qg  officei  shalli  upon 


110  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

request  of  the  goveinoi,  entei  the  value  of  the  piopeity  so  lost  as  a 
stoppage  against  any  pay  that  may  be  due  suSi  officer  oi  enlisted 
man  fiom  Federal  allotments  to  the  State  under  the  provisions  of 
Section  1661  of  the  Revised  Statutes,  oi  from  Federal  appropriations 
for  *'Enciampment  and  Maneuvers  of  the  Organized  Mrlitia"  under 
the  Act  of  March  4,  1915. 

2.  In  conformity  with  the  approved  opinion  of  the  Judge- 
Advocate  General  ^ven  above,  if  an  article  of  United  States  property 
issued  to  the  Organized  Militia  of  a  State,  Ter^ritory,  or  the  District 
of  Columbia  be  lost  or  damaged  by  the  negUgence  or  fault  of  any 
officer  or  enlisted  man  thereof,  he  sjhould  pay  the  value  thereof  or  the 
cost  of  repairs  neces^^ary  to  place  the  article  in  s  erviceable  condition. 
The  amount  so  charged  the  officer  or  enUsted  nian  should  be  entered 
on  the  pay-roll  against  any  pay  that  may  be  due  him  or  may  subse- 
quently become  due  him,  the  said  amount  being  entered  on  the  roll 
opposite  the  name  of  the  officer  oi  enhsted  man  so  charged,  but  the 
amount  sb  charged  should  not  excjded  the  value  of  the  article  or 
cost  of  repaus,  and  only  on  conclusive  prjoof  and  never  without  a 
survey,  the  officer  or  enlisted  man  being  informed  at  the  time  of 
signing  the  roll  that  his  signature  will  be  regarded  as  an  acknowl- 
edgment of  the  justice  of  the  charge. 

3.  In  case  of  charges  on  pay-rolls  (War  Department  Form  No. 
368)  covering  payments  made  by  United  States  disbursing  officers 
appointed  under  the  provisjLons  of  Section  14  of  the  Mihtia  Law, 
credit  will  be  taken  m  column  8,  "Amount  Paid,''  for  the  total 
amount  of  pay  due,  and  the  amount  collected  on  account  of  such 
charges  will  be  deposited  with  the  Trieasurer  of  the  United  States 
to  the  credit  of  the  appropriation  "Arming  and  Equipping  the 
Militia."  The  disbursing  officer  will  notify  the  Chief,  Division  of 
Militia  Affairs,  of  the  fact,  stating  the  name  of  the  depository,  the 
amount  of  deposit,  the  allotment  to  which  the  money  pertains,  and 
that  the  amount  represents  collections  on  pay-roll  for  United  States 
property  lost,  damaged,  or  destroyed,  and  the  number  of  the  cer- 
tificate of  deposit  (Paragraph  165,  Regulations  for  the  Organized 
Militia,  1910).  Upon  receipt  of  notification  froni  the  Treasurer 
that  the  amount  has  been  deposited,  it  will  be  credited  against  the 
allotment  of  the  State  concerned  under  Section  1661,  Revised 
Statutes. 

4.  In  case  of  charges  on  pay-rolls.  War  Department  Form 
No.  367,  covering  payments  made  from  the  Fedeial  appropriation 
"Encampment  and  Maneuvers,  Organized  Mihtia,'*  the  entry  on  the 
pay-roll  will  be  made  as  indicated  in  Paragraph  2  of  this  circular. 
The  collection  will,  however,  be  made  by  the  quarter maeteli  of  the 
Regular  Army  making  the  payment,  and  disposed  of  as  required  by 
Army  Regulation^ 

5.  The  approved  sluvey  report  covering  the  charges  for 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  Ill 

piopeity  lost  oi  destioyed  will  Constitute  the  piopei  vouchei  foi 
diopping  the  aiticle  fiom  the  piopeity  letuiin  affected.  The  ap- 
pioved  suivey  lepoit  coveiing  ohaiges  foi  damages  will  be  letained 
as  a  pait  of  the  State's  lecoids,  the  date  of  the  appioval  being  in 
eveiy  case  enteiled  upon  the  pay-ioll  on  which  the  chaige  is  made. 

6.  Attention  is  invited  to  the  provisions  of  Paragraphs  121, 
122,  and  123,  Regulations  of  the  Organized  MiUtia,  1910,  governing 
the  procedure  to  be  followed  when  charges  for  United  States  prop- 
erty lost  or  damaged  are  collected  from  payments  made  to  officers 
and  enlisted  men  fiom  State  funds.     (D.  M.  A.,  55614.) 

By  01  del  of  the  Secietaiy  of  Wai : 

H.  L.  Scott, 
Official:  Brigadier  General,  Chief  of  Staff. 

A.  L.  Mills, 

Brig.  Gen.,  Geneial  Staff, 

Chief,  Division  of  Militia  Affairs. 


112  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


LECTURE  No.  1 

Of  a  Series  of  Ten  Delivered  to  the  Officers  and  Sergeants 
OF  THE  National  Guard  of  Arizona. 

This  paper  is  the  first  of  a  series  of  ten  lectures  which  I  de- 
livered to  the  officers  and  sergeants  of  the  National  Guard  of  Ari- 
zona. This  course  deals  with  the  following  subjects  in  their  logical 
order: 

1.  Camps; 

2.  Security  of  Camps  or  Outposts. 

3.  Marches  and  Advance  Guards. 

4.  Reconnaissance  and  Patrolling. . 

5.  Contact  and  Deployment  foi  Action. 

6.  The  Attack. 

7.  The  Defense. 

8.  Intrenching  and  Intrenchments. 

9.  Defense  of  Houses  and  Locahties. 
10.     Training  foi  Battle. 

CAMPS. 

When  the  oider  is  received  foi  mobilization,  the  first  thing  that 
you  gentlemen  will  have  to  do  is  to  place  youi  commands  in  camp. 
It  is  essential  that  the  camp  be  made  sanitary  and  comfortable. 
Men  must  never  be  made  to  undergo  more  h^rdsliip  than  is  una- 
voidable. They  must  be  well  housed,  well  fed,  and  amusied.  A 
contented  camp  is  a  healthy  one.  The  moment  men  become  dis- 
contented youi  sick  repoit  begins  to  creep  up. 

Great  care  must  be  exeicised  in  training  new  men;  they  must 
not  be  woiked  too  hard  at  first,  ox  you  will  break  down  many  men 
who,  if  handled  intelligently,  would  soon  develop  into  hardy  soldiers. 
The  best  way  to  harden  men  is  to  go  about  it  gradually-^^nothing  is 
gained  by  forcing  them.  It  is  like  training  a  colt;  if  you  run  him 
too  far  oi  work  him  too  hard,  you  will  luin  him  completely  and  he 
will  never  be  any  good. 

Many  men  upon  going  to  camp  have  trouble  with  their  feet. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  113 

This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  they  have  been  wearing  civilian  shoes, 
which,  in  the  majority  of  cases,  have  been  too  tight  and  too  short. 
When  they  commence  to  wear  the  Government  shoe  their  feet  com- 
mence to  expand  and  resiime  their  normal  shape;  this  throws  more 
strain  on  the  arches),  and  as  a  result  the  men  complain  that  their 
sjhoes  do  not  fit  and  that  they  cannot  wear  the  Government  shoe. 
No  attention  whatever  should  be  paid  to  these  complaints,  and  men 
must  be  required  to  wear  the  Government  shoe,  whether  they  like  it 
or  not.  The  new  shoe  is\  without  question,  the  best  military 
marching  shoe  in  the  world.  The  Shoe  Board  worked  on  it  for  two 
years,  and  examined  all  marching  shoes  in  use  in  the  armies  of  the 
leading  powers. 

Troops  upon  going  into  mobilization  camps  should  be  given  three 
periods  of  setting-up  exercises,  of  ten  minutes  each,  three  times  daily, 
Sundays  included.  A  very  important  part  of  these  exercises  is  the 
foot  exercise,  in  which  men  raise  on  the  toes,  keeping  the  heels  to- 
gether, with  hands  on  hips,  thumbs  to  the  rear  and  touching.  If 
this  is  carried  out  without  fail,  it  will  do  more  to  harden  men  and  get 
them  in  shape  than  any  other  mode  of  training.  This  exercise  (foot 
exercise)  will  strengthen  the  arches  and  muscles  of  the  feet  to  such 
an  extent  that  in  three  weeks  your  men  will  have  no  trouble  with 
their  feet,  and  will  be  able  to  make  marches  that,  had  this  exercise 
not  been  given,  would  lay  half  of  your  men  by  the  roadside. 

Another  thing:  Every  company  should  be  amply  provided 
with  foot  powder  and  adhesive  plaster  for  treating  blisters.  It  may 
be  taken  as  a  rule  that  at  least  90  pei  cent  of  all  blisters  can  be 
treated  with  adhesive  plastei  in  such  a  way  that  the  men  can 
continue  to  march  from  day  to  day  until  the  blister  has  healed.  I 
have  repeatedly  seen  blisters  2  inches  long  and  about  1  inch  wide 
fixed  up  with  adhesive  plaster  so  that  a  man  could  make  a  fifteen- 
mile  march  without  discomfort.  But  remember,  every  blister  must 
be  treated  at  once,  and  not  allowed  to  go  until  the  man  is  disabled. 

Foot  inspection  should  be  held  every  night  in  camp  and  at  the 
completion  of  every  march.  If  you  neglect  this  piecaution,  you  will 
lose  at  least  50  per  cent  of  your  men  in  the  first  fifty  miles  that 
you  march. 

Men  must  be  required  to  ditch  theii  tents  and  gather  hay  or 


114  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

grass  or  branches  for  a  bed.  They  will  not  do  this  unle&s  you  i  equire 
it ;  old  soldiers  will,  but  reci  uits  will  not.  A  hollow  should  be  scraped 
in  the  ground  for  the  hipS;.  You  must  see  that  this  is  done;  don't 
tell  the  men  to  do  it,  but  sfee  that  they  do  it.  A  neglect  of  this 
simple  precaution  will  spoil  a  man's  sleep  and  wiU  in  consequence 
render  him  unfit  foi  the  following  day's  work.  No  man  can  march 
and  drill  from  day  to  day  and  s'tand  the  other  hardships  of  a  cam- 
paign unlesb  he  gets  a  good  night's  rest.  New  troops  break  down 
in  campaign  because  they  neglect  these  simple  precautions. 

Watch  your  kitchens  like  a  hawk.  They  mutt  be  as  clean 
as  a  pin. 

Watch  youi  cooks  and  see  that  they  bathe  daily  and  always 
have  on  clean  clothesi  Do  not  tolerate  any  excuse  whatever  in 
this  respect. 

Pits  must  be  dug  under  your  kitchen  fire?  and  filled  with  stones 
so  that  all  liquid  matter  can  be  poured  on  these  stones  under  the 
file  and  evaporated.  Solid  matter  can  be  burned  on  the  fire  or 
buried  in  pits  and  immediately  covered  with  dry  earth  like  the 
rears.  Whenever  food  or  slop- water  is  dro|)ped  on  the  ground,  it 
must  be  immediately  covered  with  earth  oi  ashee  to  prevent  it  from 
attracting  flies:  You  cannot  delegate  these  things  to  the  cooks  or 
to  a  sergeant.  You  must  see  to  it  yourself  until  your  men  are 
trained.  Watxih  your  cooks  and  kitchen  police  and  gee  that  all 
pans  and  cooking  utensils  are  carefully  scrubbed  and  rinsed.  Most 
cooks  are  careless  in  this  respect  and  fail  to  was  h  all  sbap  from  the 
pans  and  kettlest  As  a  result,  men  are  given  a  daily  dosjie  of  sipap 
with  meals,  whici  will  soon  give  the  entire  company  dysentery. 

You  must  have  two  kettles  in  which  the  men  can  wash  their 
mess-kits:  one  with  boiling  s.oapy  water  and  a  hand  mop,  in  which 
to  wash  them,  and  one  with  boiling  clean  water  and  a  hand  mop, 
in  which  to  rinse  them.  A  reliable  non-commissioned  officer  should 
be  detailed  to  stand  by  and  see  that  every  man  properly  washes  his 
mess-kit.    Simply  telling  him  to  do  it  is  not  sufficient. 

During  the  Spanisli  War  an  officer  of  Volunteer  Artillery  came 
to  me  one  day  and  stated  that  about  75  per  cent  of  his  men  were 
sick  with  diarrhoea,  and  that  he  could  not  find  out  what  had  caused 
it.    He  asked  me  if  I  would  not  come  over  and  inspect  his  camp. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  115 

I  told  him  that  I  would  be  glad  to  do  so,  and  I  immediately  went  to 
his  battery  kitchen,  watched  the  cooks  washing  their  cooking  uten- 
sils, and  watched  the  men  wash  their  messrkits.  I  found  that  they 
were  doing  exactly  what  I  had  surmised  they  were  doing — namely, 
not  washing  the  soap  from  kitchen  utensils  and  mess-kita.  I  told 
him  what  the  trouble  was,  gave  him  instiuctiouF  how  to  correct  the 
defect,  and  as  a  result  the  diarrhoea  stopped  in  about  three  days. 
This  is  always  a  serious  matter,  but  in  this  case  it  was  doubly  so  be- 
cause we  were  in  the  face  of  the  enemy. 

Now  you  must  pay  special  attention  to  your  rears;.  They  must 
be  properly  conttructed,  and  it  will  be  necessary  to  post  a  sentinel 
over  the  rear  to  see  that  men  cover  their  deposit  at  once.  They 
won't  do  this  unless  there  is  someone  standiug  over  them  to  see 
that  they  do  it.  You  must  secure  toilet  paper;  no  matter  how  you 
get  it,  but  you  must  have  it.  Tjiis  is  a  proper  charge  against  the 
company  fund.  If  you  don'i  do  this,  men  will  use  newspaper,  or 
more  frequently  will  not  use  any  paper  at  all,  none  being  available. 
This  method  will  soon  produce  piles,  and  you  will  have  men  on  sick 
report  as  a  result.  Reais  must  be  made  comfortable;  otherwise 
men  will  not  use  them  and  will  get  in  the  habit  of  going  off  in  the 
bushes  and  defiling  the  camp-site. 

Urinal  cans  must  be  placed  in  the  company  streets  at  su,ndown 
and  whitewashed.  Lime  or  ashes  must  be  sprinkled  where  they  are 
placed,  and  their  use  enforced.  ^ 

Neglect  the  above  precautions,  and  in  a  few  days  your  men 
will  all  be  sick  and  unfit  for  field  service. 

Selection  of  Camp-Sites. 

The  first  and  most  important  requirement  for  a  camp  is  an 
abundance  of  good,  pure  water.  This  overshadows  all  other  con- 
siderations. The  next  requirement  is  good  ground,  which  will  not 
become  muddy  in  wet  weather  or  very  dusty  in  dry  weather.  The 
worst  place  that  I  can  think  of  for  a  camp-ground  is  a  plowed  field. 
You  warnt  gi^avel  or  grass.  The  best  place  for  a  camp  is  a  grove  of 
tre^ — trees  not  too  close  together. 

Always  pitch  your  tents  in  the  sun,  so  that  they  will  get  thor- 
oughly aired  out  and  dried.  But  you  must  have  shade  within  at 
least  two  hundred  yards  of  the  tents,  so  that  the  men  can  go  to  it 


116  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

during  the  heat  of  the  day.  If  no  shade  is  available,  have  yout*  men 
place  their  blankets  and  ponchos  on  top  of  the  shelter-tents.  This 
will  keep  out  the  heat  of  the  sun,  air  the  blankets,  and  render  the 
tent  very  much  cooler — cool  enough,  at  least,  for  the  men  to  find 
shelter  from  the  excessive  heat. 

Bathing-places  must  be  provided  for  the  men  and  they  must  be 
recluired  to  bathe  at  least  three  times  per  week.  You  have  got  to 
see  that  they  do  this;  lice  will  develop  if  you  don't,  and  any  officer 
that  allows  his  command  to  get  lousy  should  be  tried.  To  get  rid 
of  lice,  boil  all  clothing;  have  men  scrub  themselves  with  strong 
laundry  soap;  cut  the  hair  close;  and  pick  over,  sun,  and  beat  the 
blankets.  They  are  not  (difficult  to  get  rid  of  if  you  go  after  them 
in  a  determined  manner.  Another  method  is  to  pack  the  blankets 
in  boxes  and  spray  them  with  formaldehyde.  Do  this  at  reveille* 
and  in  twelve  hours  everything  in  the  blankets  will  be  killed.  The 
ammonia  preparation  used  for  cleaning  your  rifles  is  even  more 
effective  if  used  in  this  manner. 

Flies. 

The  worst  pest  of  a  camp  and  the  most  dangerous  enemy  is  the 
simple  house  fly.  Fight  them  continually.  Fly-traps,  purchased 
or  improvised,  are  extremely  useful  around  kitchens  and  rears,  al- 
though these  may  not  be  screened.  You  will  be  surprised  at  the 
nuinber  of  flies  that  can  be  caught  in  the  open  by  fly-traps,  and  it 
wiU  astonish  you  what  a  difference  they  will  make  in  a  camp. 

I  could  write  a  book  on  camps,  but  I  have  endeavored  to  bring 
out  the  most  important  points  and  the  ones  that  are  most  frequently 
neglected.  If  you  gentlemen  will  take  dare  of  the  above,  the  rest 
will  take  dare  of  itself. 

Horses. 

Horses  must  not  be  allowed  in  camp,  and  th^  corral  should  be 
at  least  five  hundred  yards  from  the  men's  tents,  if  possible.  All 
horse-droppings  mufet  be  policed  up  immediately  and  burned,  as 
flies  breed  in  manure  in  a  short  time. 

Mounted  officers  and  orderlies  are  prone  to  tie  their  horses  in 
camp.    This  should  not  be  permitted. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  117 

LECTURE  No.  2. 
OUTPOSTS  AND  CAMP  GUARDS. 

In  the  previous  lecture  you  gentlemen  were  told  something 
about  placing  your  men  in  camp  upon  mobilization  and  how  to  care 
for  them.  This  lecture  will  deal  with  the  guards  that  will  be  nec- 
essary in  order  to  preserve  order  in  your  camp  and,  if  in  the  presence 
of  the  enemy,  secure  your  camp  from  surprise. 

Upon  arrival  at  the  camp,  the  first  thing  to  do  is  to  place  a 
guard  over  your  water  supply.  Set  apart  a  place  from  which  to  get 
drinking  water,  then  lower  down  a  place  for  the  animals  to  drink, 
and  then  still  lower  down  a  place  for  the  men  to  bathe  and  wash 
clothes. 

You  will  have  to  place  a  sentinel  over  the  rears,  which  should 
be  dug  immediately  after  the  tents  have  been  pitched  (nothing 
should  be  allowed  to  interfere  with  this).  It  is  essential  that  the 
ground  be  not  defiled  in  the  slightest  degree. 

Sentinels  will  also  be  necessary  over  the  corral,  store  tents, 
forage,  etc. 

These  details  having  been  made,  you  will  have  to  estabUsh  the 
outpost,  relieving  the  advance  guard  if  the  camp  is  at  the  completion 
of  a  march.  Never  place  any  more  men  on  outpost  than  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  accomplish  the  object — ^namely,  to  protect  your 
camp  from  surprise.  Outpost  duty  is  very  trying  and  wears  the 
men  out.  On  the  other  hand,  the  outpost  must  be  strong  enough 
to  hold  the  enemy,  if  he  attacks,  long  enough  to  allow  your  men  to 
form  and  deploy  to  meet  thfe  attack.  It  is  not  necessary  to  surround 
you*r  camp  with  a  cordon  of  outposts  imless  operating  against  sav- 
ages in  minor  warfare.  In  civilized  warfare  it  is  usually  sufficient 
if  the  lines  by  which  an  enemy  is  likely  to  advance  are  covered. 
Remember,  the  outpost  lines  must  always  be  convex — ^never,  under 
any  circumstances,  concave;  that  is,  the  flanks  must  always  be 
refused  (thrown  back),  so  that  the  enemy  cannot  work  around 
them.  It  makes  absolutely  no  difference  what  the  formation  of  the 
ground  is,  this  rule  m^jst  be  followed. 

You  mufet  always  have  patrols  out  in  front  of  your  sentinels. 
Do  not  rely  upon  sentinels  alone.     Patrols  should  go  about  two 


118  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

miles  beyond  the  line  of  sentinels.  You  must  patrol  day  and 
night.  The  neglect  of  this  simple  precaution  caused  the  surprise  of 
General  Grant's  army  at  Shiloh.  Communication  must  be  main- 
tained between  the  different  parts  of  the  outpost  at  all  times;* 
signal  flags,  telegraph  lines,  mounted  messengers,  and  infantry 
patrols  being  some  of  the  means  used.  Everything  must  be  re- 
ported to  the  outpost  commander.  It  is  infinitely  better  to  report 
too  much  than  too  little.  Experience  will  soon  teach  you  the  correct 
method.  New  troops  are  prone  to  neglect  this  very  important 
duty.  Never  relax  your  vigilance.  Simply  because  you  do  not 
see  the  enemy  is  no  sign  that  he  is  not  there.  The  Confederates 
formed  their  battle-line  within  1,000  yards  of  the  Union  sentinels  in 
broad  daylight,  at  the  battle  of  Shiloh,  without  being  discovered. 
The  mere  fact  that  cavalry  is  out  in  front  is  no  excuse  for  not  being 
constantly  on  the  alert.  The  enemy  may  have  defeated  your 
cavalry  or  driven  it  off  at  a  flank,  so  there  may  be  no  cavalry  there 
at  all.  It  is  a  wise  precaution  to  place  a  few  men  with  signal  equip- 
ment on  any  adyalntageous  point  from  which  a  good  view  of  the 
country  may  be  obtained  and  too  far  to  the  front  to  be  included  in 
the  outpost  liuip. 

A  good  way  to  remember  the  formation  of  an  outpost  line  is  to 
compare  it  to  a  hand  with  the  fingers  extended.  Let  the  finger-nails 
represent  the  sentinels  or  line  of  Cossack  posts,  the  second  joints 
the  pickets  or  supports,  the  knuckles  the  reserve,  and  the  wrist  the 
camp.  In  small  commands  the  reserve  is  usually  omitted  as  being 
unnecessary,  the  main  body  taking  its  place. 

There  are  two  general  systems  of  outposts — one  in  which  the 
entire  front  is  covered  by  a  line  of  sentinels  and  the  other  in  which 
only  the  main  avenues  of  approach  are  guarded  by  small  bodies  and 
the  intervening  space  patrolled.  The  best  results  will  usually  be 
obtained  by  a  combination  of  both  systems.  These  systems  are 
usually  referred  to  in  military  works  as  the  Cordon  System  and  the 
Patrol  System.  There  are  two  methods  of  establishing  the  Cordon 
System.  The  first  method  is  to  post  small  bodies  of  about  twenty- 
five  men  each  along  the  entire  front  at  suitable  intervals  (these  are 
called  "pickets"),  who  send  out  sentinels  to  their  front  from  100 
to  200  yards.     (Distances  always  depend  upon  circumstances,  how- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  119 

ever.)  These  pickets  are  backed  up  by  larger  bodies,  called  ''sup- 
ports," posted  from  600  to  800  yards  in  their  rear,  one  support  for 
'  three  or  four  pickets  (depending  upon  circ^imstances),  and  in  rear 
of  the  supports,  at  about  800  or  1,000  yards,  the  reserve.  The  camp 
would  ordinarily  be  about  1,200  yards  in  rear  of  the  reserve.  These 
distances  apply  to  a  regiment  as  outpost  for  a  division.  For  smaller 
commands  the  distances  should,  of  course,  be  much  less;  but  the 
distance  from  the  Cossack  posts  to  the  supports  or  from  the  pickets 
to  the  support  cannot  safely  be  less  than  400  yards,  and  from  the 
supports  to  the  reserve  about  the  same  distance.  The  main  body 
in  the  above  case  could  be  about  600  yards  in  rear  of  the  reserve. 

Cavalry  should  never  be  used  as  an  outpost  for  infantry,  if  it 
can  possibly  be  avoided.  This  duty  is  much  harder  on  cavalry 
than  on  infantry,  and  soon  ruins  the  horses.  Cavalry  is  too  valuable 
for  scouting  and  reconnaissance  to  be  frittered  away  in  this  manner. 
This  does  not  mean  that  cavalry  patrols  cannot  be  sent  out  in  front 
of  the  line  of  sentinels;  on  the  contrary,  this  should  be  done;  but  the 
pickets  and  supports  should  be  composed  of  infantry.  In  the  first 
two  years  of  the  Civil  War  the  Union  Army  wasted  its  cavalry 
shamefully  in  this  manner.  It  was  due  entirely  to  the  ignorance  of 
the  generals  in  the  proper  use  of  cavalry.  They  learned  better  later 
on.     Don't  make  the  same  mistake. 

Single  sentinels  can  be  used  in  the  day-time,  but  it  is  always 
better  to  use  double  sentinels  at  night,  especially  with  new  men. 
They  see  an  advancing  enemy  in  every  bush  and  even  in  blades  of 
grass.  This  is  not  so  likely  to  happen  if  you  place  two  men  on 
guard.  They  have  more  confidence,  and  perform  their  duties  better 
in  consequence. 

There  are  three  systems  of  posting  sentinels : 

The  Cossack  Post  System,  in  which  small  groups,  consisting  of 
an  old  soldier  or  corporal  and  three  men,  are  sent  out  from  the  sup- 
ports about  400  yards.  The  sentinel  is  posted  direct  from  this 
small  post,  which  is  in  concealment  about  30  or  40  yards  in  rear  of 
him.  These  small  groups  are  usually  relieved  every  twelve  hours. 
These  posts  are  of  American  origin,  notwithstanding  their  Russian 
name,  and  were  evolved  by  the  Continental  Army  in  our  Revolu- 
tionary  War.     Our  troops  found   that  in   operating  in   wooded 


120  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

country,  where  the  picket  and  sentinel  system  was  used,  the  reUefs 
frequently  lost  their  way  at  night  and  in  the  woods;  so  the  system 
was  devised  of  having  every  sentinel  backed  up  by  his  own  reliefs. 
This  system  has  many  advantages  and  has  more  resisting  power 
than  appears  at  first  sight.  Sentinels  are  not  timid,  knowing  that 
they  are  closely  backed  up  by  a  friendly  post,  and  an  additional 
advantage  is  that  it  takes  fewer  men  than  does  the  picket  and  sentinel 
system. 

In  the  Picket  System  sentinels  are  furnished  directly  from  the 
pickets  and  must  be  relieved  from  the  picket.  This  requires  that 
the  picket  be  strong  enough  to  furnish  three  reliefs  for  every  sentinel 
posted.  An  additional  strength  must  be  allowed  for  patrols.  These 
patrols  reconnoiter  in  front  of  the  line  of  sentinels  and  maintain 
communication  with  the  supports  and  neighboring  pickets. 

Another  system  is  to  use  what  are  called  ''sentry  squads. '* 
The  system  is  the  same  as  the  Cossack  post,  but  your  sentinels  are 
double,  and  an  entire  squad  takes  the  place  of  the  group  of  four 
men.  This  is  stronger  than  the  Cossack  system,  being  able  to  offer 
more  resistance,  but,  of  course,  requires  more  men. 

Fretjuently  the  best  results  will  be  obtained  by  a  combination 
of  all  three.  The  nature  of  the  ground  will  usually  indicate  what 
system  to  use. 

I  will  now  illustrate  the  different  systems  on  the  blackboard, 
and  will  be  glad  to  answer  any  questions  that  you  gentlemen  may 
care  to  ask. 

I  am  going  to  issue  to  each  one  of  you  a  little  card  containing 
the  orders  for  a  sentinel  on  outpost.  Retain  these  cards  and  look 
them  over  occasionally  until  you  have  committed  the  orders  to 
memory.     This  is  very  important. 

Sentinel^s  Outpost  Orders. 

The  po^  fumishfed  by  each  picket  are  numbered  from  right 
to  left,  thus:  Post  No.  4,  Picket  No.  1;  Post  No.  1,  Picket  No  2, 
and  so  on. 

Sentinels  should  watch  and  listen  without  betraying  their  own 
presence,  but  observation  is  the  first  consideration  and  concealment 
is  of  secondary  importance.    A  sentinel  must  expose  himself  to  see, 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  121 

rather  than  limit  his  observation  for  the  purpose  of  remaining 
concealed. 

Sentinels  must  not  smoke,  and  such  conversation  as  may  be 
necessary  between  them  must  be  conducted  in  a  "wfhisper.  The  sen- 
tinel must  not  have  about  him  any  glittering  accouterments;  and, 
except  in  foggy  weather  or  on  a  dark  night,  must  keep  his  bayonet 
in  its  scabbard. 

Each  sentinel  should  clearly  understand  the  following: 

1.  The  countersign. 

2.  The  number  of  his  own  post. 

3.  The  number  and  position  of  his  own  picket  and  the 

name  of  its  comm^a^der. 

4.  The  position  of  the  neighboring  sentinels  and  of  the 

examining  post,  when  there  is  one. 

5.  The  direction  of  the  enemy  and  the  probable  line  of 

his  advance. 

6.  The  points  to  which  all  roads,  paths,  and  railroads  in 

sight  lead. 

7.  The  names  of  all  villages  and  rivers  in  view. 

8.  The  signals  by  which  he  should  communicate  with  the 

pickets  or  detached  posts. 
The  mistake  of  giving  sentinels  too  many  instructions  and 
orders  should  be  avoided.  If  his  mind  is  burdened  with  many  de- 
tails, the  sentinel  is  likely  to  become  hesitating,  timid,  and  confused. 
The  principal  thing  is  that  he  should  know  where  to  look  for  the 
enemy  and  what  to  do  if  he  sees  him. 


LECTURE  No.  3. 

MARCHES  AND  ADVANCE  GUARDS. 

Marching  constitutes  the  principal  occupation  of  troops  in 
campaign,  and  is  one  of  the  heaviest  causes  of  loss.  This  loss  may 
be  materially  reduced  by  proper  training  and  by  the  proper  conduct 
of  the  march.  A  successful  march,  whether  in  peace  or  war,. is  one 
that  places  the  troops  at  their  destination  at  the  proper  moment 
and  in  the  best  possible  condition.  With  new  or  imtrained  troops, 
the  process  of  hardening  the  men  to  this  work  must  be  gradual.    Im- 


122  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

mediately  after  being  mustered  into  tjhe  service,  physical  exercises 
and  marching  shbuld  be  begim.  One  march  should  be  made  each 
day  with  full  equipment,  beginning  with  a  distance  of  two  or  three 
miles  and  increasing  the  distaiice  daily  as  the  troopfe  become  hard- 
ened until  a  full  day's  march  under  full  equipment  may  be  made 
without  exhaustion.  A  very  good  method  is  to  march  the  men 
some  distance  from  camp  for  drill,  lay  c^  the  packs,  complete  the 
drill,  and  then  put  on  packs  and  return  to  camp.  If  necessary, 
troops  may  be  marched  around  the  camp  for  a  mile  or  two  before 
the  drill  commences,  in  order  to  cover  the  desired  distance. 

A  practice  march  conducted  once  a  week  has  little,  if  any, 
value  for  untrained  or  unhardened  troops.  A  practice  march  once 
or  twice  a  month  is,  in  my  opinion,  absolutely  worthless.  Its  only 
result  is  to  disgust  the  men,  produce  sore  feet,  and  waste  time  that 
might  with  proj&t  be  devoted  to  something  else.  The  marching  effi- 
ciency of  an  organiztition  is  judged  by  the  amount  of  straggling  and 
elongation  and  the  condition  of  the  men  at  the  end  of  the  march. 

The  drinking  of  water  on  the  march  should  be  avoided  as  much 
as  possible.  If  a  mstfn  commencete  to  drink  early  in  the  march,  he  is 
almost  always  sure  to  suffer  from  lack  of  water  and  thirst  before  the 
march  is  half  over.  Your  non-commissioned  officers  must  bfe  in- 
structed to  see  that  men  do  not  commence  to  drink  from  their  can- 
teens early  in  the  march.  I  have  found  that  a  very  good  scheme  to 
prevent  the  men  from  drinking  water  is  to  require  them  to  place 
their  canteens  where  they  are  hard  to  get  at;  this  will  frequently 
deter  the  men  from  drinkuig  unless  they  are  really  in  need  of  water. 
With  the  new  infantry  pack,  the  canteen  can  be  carried  on  the  back 
in  the  center  of  the  pack  in  such  a  way  that  a  man  will  have  to  get  a 
comrade  to  get  his  canteen  for  him,  as  he  cannot  reach  it  himself. 
Many  men  will  go  without  water  in  preference  to  getting  some  man 
to  get  their  canteens  for  them.  In  any  case,  the  man  can't  get  at 
his  canteen  without  the  knowledge  of  his  squad  corporal. 

Closing  up  during  a  halt  or  changing  gait  to  gain  or  lose  dis- 
tance should  be  prohibited. 

Most  troops  make  the  mistakfe  of  marching  too  fast.  The  gait 
should  not  be  over  two  miles  per  hour  until  the  men  have  become 
thoroughly  hardened.    Officers  at  the  head  of  the  column,  setting 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  123 

the  pace,  are  frequently  to  blame  for  this.  An  officer  leading  a 
march  should  frequently  turn  aroulnd  and  observe  the  column  to 
see  how  the  men  are  standing  it,  and  if  he  notices  that  the  column 
is  straggling,  he  should  immediately  reduce  the  pace.  Nothing  is 
gained  by  getting  into  camp  with  about  half  of  your  men. 

I  am  going  to  mention  another  thing  that  hardly  belongs  here, 
but  you  should  know  it.  Remember,  the  quartermaster  sergeant, 
artificer,  company  clerk,  and  the  two  cooks  always  march  with  the 
company  wagon  or  with  the  wagon  train. 

The  column  of  twos  should  never  be  resorted  to  on  the  march 
unless  the  road  is  bad  or  is  very  dusty.  It  doubles  the  length  of 
your  column  and  makes  it  just  that  much  harder  for  the  men  in  the 
rear  to  keep  up.  Always  march  in  column  of  squads,  if  possible. 
Allow  the  men  to  open  out  laterally,  but  make  them  keep  well 
closed  up.  If  this  method  is  followed,  it  affords  men  an  opportunity 
to  pick  their  way  to  some  extent,  gives  them  plenty  of  air,  and 
makes  the  march  very  mubh  easier. 

Two  yards  between  men  of  the  some  rank  is  not  too  much,  if 
the  road  space  allows  it. 

File-closers  should  be  directed  to  march  at  the  head  and  rear 
of  their  companies. 

An  officer  should  always  march  at  the  rear  of  his  company  to 
see  that  men  do  not  fall  out  and  keep  well  closed  up. 

I  have  never  beheved  that  the  ten-minutes  rest  prescribed  in 
Regulations  is  sufficient.  I  have  found  in  marching  troops  that  I 
have  always  gotten  better  results  by  prescribing  that  each  rest  will 
be  for  fifteen  minutes.  Every  man  in  the  command  knows  before- 
hand exactly  how  much  time  he  will  have  to  relieve  himself,  adjust 
his  eqfuipment,  fix  his  shoes,  etc.,  and  it  keeps  the  command  in  a 
much  better  humor.  It  is  very  important  to  keep  the  men  in  good 
humor,  and  carefully  avoid  anything  that  will  cause  the  slightest 
irritation.  Mental  worry  or  irritation  wears  a  command  out  much 
faster  than  physical  hardship.  A  happy  and  contented  column  will, 
without  difficulty,  march  twice  as  far  as  a  column  that  is  annoyed 
or  irritated  or  continually  nagged.  Whatever  y6u  do,  never  nag 
your  men.  If  necessary  to  speak  to  them  or  correct  a  defect,  do  it 
kindly  and  cheerfully.     Undue  severity  is  very,  very  seldom  nee- 


124  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

essary.  Now,  this  doesn't  mean  that  men  must  be  coddled,  or 
symtpathi^ed  with;  on  the  contrary,  this  must  be  studiously  avoided; 
but  don't  nag  them  or  annoy  them  continually. 

Another  thing,  never  hurry  your  men  in  getting  their  break- 
fast or  in  breaking  camp.  Frequently,  if  this  is  neglected,  the 
command  will  start  out  in  a  humor  that  will  stay  with  the  column 
all  day  and  very  materially  affect  its  marching  and  fighting.  If 
they  are  a  little  late,  make  up  the  time  on  the  march  by  going  a 
little  faster  or  by  marching  five  minutes  longer  than  you  would 
have  had  they  been  on  time.  Now,  this  doesn't  mean  that  troops 
must  "not  be  taught  to  be  prompt ;  but  use  judgment. 

I  never  plrescribe  the  hour  for  starting.  I  prescribe  the  hour 
for  breakfast,  loading  wagons,  and  breaking  camp,  but  I  always 
reserve  the  right  to  say  when  the  column  will  be  placed  in  march. 
Frequently  troops  will  be  ready  to  start  out  ten  or  fifteen  minutes 
before  the  time  you  have  prescribed  if  you  place  it  in  orders.  Take 
advantage  of  this,  and  move  out  when  you  have  observed  that 
everything  is  ready.  If  you  hurry  them,  wagons  will  not  be  prop- 
erly loaded,  and  this  will  cause  delay  later  on  by  the  loads  slipping, 
etc.;  so  you  gain  nothing  after  all,  and  put  the  command  in  a  bad 
humor  in  the  bargain. 

General  Sherman  once  said:  '*No  man  can  get  the  best  out  of 
his  troops  unless  he  commands  their  spirits  as  well  as  their  legs." 
In  order  to  do  this,  you  must  be  in  sympathy  with  your  men  and 
observe  them  continually.  Take  care  of  them,  and  they  will  not 
fail  you  when  you  want  them. 

Now  you  officers,  upon  getting  into  camp,  must  see  that  your 
men  are  comfortable  first  and  that  their  wants  are  attended  to,  then 
have  your  own  tent  pitched  and  look  after  yourself.  But  remem- 
ber, the  men  must  always  come  fir^t.  They  are  the  ones  that  do 
the  work;  you  can  do  nothing  without  them.  When  they  reaUze 
that  you  have  their  interests  at  heart,  they  will  meet  every  demand 
that  you  make  upon  them  without  a  murmur,  and  will  never  fail 
you  when  you  need  them. 

Advance  Guards. 

If  troops  could  march  to  the  battle-field  unmolested  like  the 
knights  of  old  repaired  to  their  tournaments,  nine-tenths  of  the 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  125 

difficulties  of  the  art  of  war  would  be  eliminated.  Protection  on 
the  march  is  absolutely  necessary,  and  the  neglect  of  this  very  simple 
thing  has  caused  coubtless  defeats. 

Had  General  Braddock  (in  the  French  and  Indian  War)  cov- 
ered his  advance  with  an  advance  guard,  or  even  a  few  patrols,  he 
would  never  have  walked  into  the  ambush  that  he  did  and  was' 
defeated. 

General  St.  Clare,  of  our  Army,  was  sent  by  President  Wash- 
ington into  the  Northwest  Territory  in  1796,  after  the  Indians.  He 
was  especially  cautioned  by  Washington  to  cover  his  advance  and 
be  careful  of  ambuscades.  Notwithstanding  this  fact,  he  marched 
his  column  without  an  advance  guard  or  without  even  advance 
skirmishers,  and  was  struck  by  the  Indians  wheh  crossing  a  river 
and  his  column  was  badly  defeated.  Up  to  the  time  of  the  engage- 
ment, like  Braddock,  he  had  seen  no  signs  of  the  enemy,  and  con- 
sequently thought  that  there  was  none  near. 

In  1876  General  Crook  conducted  a  march  of  1,000  miles 
through  a  country  infested  with  10,000  Indians  and  never  saw  one. 
However,  he  had  an  advance  guard,  and  was  not  attacked  or  sur- 
prised. The  Indians,  however,  had  his  column  under  constant 
observation. 

I  mention  these  few  instances  to  show  you  what  will  happen  if 
you  neglect  this  important  precaution,  and  also  what  may  happen 
even  when  you  do  have  an  advance  guard.  Simply  because  you 
don't  see  the  enemy  is  no  sign  that  they  are  not  there.  Never,  under 
any  circumstances  whatever,  neglect  to  cover  your  march  if  there  is 
the  slightest  chance  of  encountering  the  enemy. 

Napoleon  once  said:  "Always  place  your  best  troops  in  the 
advance  guard.  These  troops  must  be  well  drilled  and  instructed, 
and  will  be  required  to  maneuver  continually." 

Poor  troops  in  the  advance  guard  are  a  constant  source  of  irri- 
tation and  embarrassment  to  a  column  commander,  and  will  delay 
the  advance  of  the  column  instead  of  facilitating  it  as  they  should  do. 

It  is  the  business  of  the  advance  guard  to  provide  for  the  se- 
curity of  the  column  on  the  march,  remove  obstructions  on  the  line 
of  march,  repair  bridges,  brush  asi(le  small  bodies  of  the  enemy,  and 
in  general  to  facilitate  in  every  way  the  march  of  the  column. 


126  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

The  advance  gUard  provides  for  its  own  security  by  suitable 
formations,  and  not  by  a  cautious  and  timid  advance.  This  is  a 
common  error  committed  by  new  troops  in  the  field  and  also  at  drill. 
Instead  of  advancing  briskly,  they  stroll  along  at  about  one  and  one- 
half  miles  per  hour  when  they  should  be  going  three  at  least.  The 
advance  guard  continually  meets  with  checks,  due  to  the  necessity 
of  reconnoitering  points  some  distance  from  the  line  of  march, 
clearing  the  road,  fixing  bridges,  etc.;  consequently  they  must  main- 
tain a  good  gait,  so  as  not  to  delay  the  main  body.  Remember  this 
and  watch  it  at  drill. 

Frequently  a  marching  column  will  have  to  protect  itself  from 
many  directions.  This  object  is  secured  by  the^means  of  advance 
guard,  flank  guards,  and  a  rear  guard.  Remember,  on  a  retreat 
the  advance  guard  is  usually  called  ''leading  troops."  The  rear 
guard  in  this  case  is  the  important  body,  being  next  to  the  enemy ; 
but  leading  troops  are  always  necessary  to  repair  and  clear  the  road, 
prevent  a  hostile  population  from  damaging  bridges,  obstructing 
the  road,  etc. 

The  principle  upon  which  an  advance  guard  is  formed  is  this: 
The  enemy  must  first  be  met  by  a  small  body,  called  a  ''point," 
usually  a  squad;  this  is  backed  up  by  a  still  larger  body,  and  so  on 
until  the  main  body  is  reached. 

Each  fraction  or  subdivision  must  be  large  enough  to  hold  the 
enemy  long  enough  to  allow  the  supporting  fraction  ample  time  for 
deployment.  The  names  of  these  different  fractions  are  as  follows : 
point,  support,  and  reserve. 

A  company  usually  sends  forward  only  a  point — about  one 
squad — about  400  yards. 

A  battalion  should  send  forward  a  company,  which  would  form 
the  support,  and  it  in  turn  would  send  forward  a  point.  Distance 
of  point  from  company,  about  300  yards;  distance  of  company  from 
battalion,  about  500  yards.     (This  with  war  strength  companies.) 

A  regiment  should  place  a  battalion  in  the  advance  guard  if  the 
enemy  is  close  and  liable  to  be  met.  If  the  enemy  is  not  close  and 
active,  two  companies  would  be  sufficient,  but  this  has  the  dis- 
advantage that  I  spoke  about  in  a  previous  lecture,  of  breaking  up 
tactical  units,  which  should  always  be  avoided. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  127 

A  brigade  would  usually  place  a  regiment  in  the  advance  guard, 
although  two  battalions  would  usually  be  sufficient;  but  here,  again, 
we  don't  want  to  break  up  tactical  lipits,  so  we  send  the  entire 
regimrent. 

The  reserve  usually  marches  with  as  much  comfort  as  the 
main  body. 

Service  with  the  point  and  with  the  support  is  usually  very 
trying,  owing  to  the  necessity  of  sending  out  patrols,  clearing  the 
road,  etc. 

Normally,  flankers  are  not  sent  out  to  habitually  march  abreast 
of  the  column.  This  was  the  old  method  and  has  given  way  to  the 
method  of  sending  out  patrols  to  examine  important  points,  or  take 
station  on  some  high  point  and  observe  until  the  column  has  passed 
or  there  is  no  sign  of  danger.  Flankers  sent  out  150  yards  from  the 
column  are  practically  worthless;  400  or  500  yards  is  the  minimum 
distance  at  which  they  can  be  of  any  use.  Remember,  we  are  not 
trying  to  find  a  few  men  or  a  scout  or  two,  but  we  are  trying  to  guard 
the  column  from  a  force  large  enough  to  do  it  some  damage. 

Flank  patrols  are  sent  out  from  the  support  and  also  from  the 
reserve.  They  will  be  left  behind  and  must  not  attempt  to  rejoin 
their  own  subdivision.  They  rejoin  the  column  when  their  mission 
has  been  accomplished  and  then  join  the  nearest  unit,  reporting  to  its 
commander.  They  rejdin  their  own  uiiit  at  the  first  opportunity. 
Cavalry  and  mounted  scouts  or  orderlies  can  save  the  infantry  very 
materially  if  detailed  for  this  work. 

If  you  have  any  mounted  men  with  the  column,  it  is  a  good 
plan  to  send  a  mounted  point  about  600  yards  in  advance  of  the 
infantry  point. 

Advance  guard  patrols  are  conducted  like  other  patrols.  I 
will  explain  the  conduct  of  patrols  in  a  later  lecture. 

When  the  column  halts  at  the  end  of  the  march  or  for  any 
length  of  time  before  the  end  of  the  march,  the  advance  guard  forms 
what  is  called  a  ''march  outpost. '^  The  march  outpost  is  not  as 
complete  as  a  regular  outpost,  but  endeavors  to  cover  all  important 
points  and  avenues  by  which  an  qnejny  might  advance.  They  are 
responsible  for  the  safety  of  the  column  until  relieved  by  the  regular 
outpost.     Outposts  are  usually  relieved  in  the  evening,  in  which 


128  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

case  the  organisation  forms  the  advance  guard  the  following  day. 
In  large  commands  troops  are  usually  detailed  on  this  duty  for 
several  days  at  a  time,  in  which  case  they  form  the  necessary  Out- 
posts until  their  tour  is  finished.  In  the  Japanese-Russian  War  it 
was  the  custom  in  the  Japanese  Army  to  detail  troops  on  this  duty 
for  two  weeks  at  a  time.  The  Japanese  officers  told  our  military 
attache  that  the  system  was  very  satisfactory.  This  was  with  large 
forces,  of  course.  With  small  commands,  it  is  usually  better  to 
change  the  outpost  and  advance  guard  daily.  When  changing  the 
outpost,  it  is  usually  best  to  relieve  them  early  in  the  morning  or  at 
evening.  If  the  enemy  attacks,  he  will  usually  attack  at  this  time, 
so  you  will  have  double  strength  on  the  outpost  line  at  that  time. 

Under  some  circumstances  a  skirmish-line  witii  wide  intervals 
furnishes  a  very  good  formation  for  the  protection  of  the  column. 
In  this  case  the  support  can  follow  in  column  of  squads  in  one  or  two 
columns,  as  may  be  necessary. 

Rear  guards  are  formed  and  maneuvered  like  advance  guards, 
only  the  formation  is  reversed. 

A  flahk  guard  should  always  throw  out  patrols,  well  out  on  the 
exposed  flank.  Flank  guards  will  usually  need  a  small  point.  The 
advance  guard  commander  should  also  command  the  flank  guard  # 
unless  circumstances  render  it  not  advisable. 

Advance  cavalry  will  usually  be  under  the  command  of  the 
advance  guard  commander  and,  of  course,  will  be  several  miles  in 
advance  of  the  infantry  point.  Independent  cavalry  is  under  the 
orders  of  the  commander  of  the  force  and  is  not  under  the  control 
of  the  advance  guard  commander. 

This  is  a  very  large  subject  to  cover  in  one  small  lecture,  but  I 
have  endeavored  to  bring  out  the  principal  points. 

I  will  be  glad  to  answer  any  questions. 


LECTURE  No.  4. 

RECONNAISSANCE  AND  PATROLLING. 

"How  can  any  man  tell  what  to  do  when  he  is  ignorant  of  what 
his  enemy  is  about?"  This  remark  was  made  by  a  celebrated 
French  general. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  129 

.  Military  information  may  be  considered  under  two  general 
heads — ^namely:  (1)  that  collected  by  the  general  staff  in  time  of 
peace;  (2)  that  obtained  by  troops  in  the  field  after  the  outbreak 
of  hostilities.  The  former  relates  to  the  geography,  resources,  and 
military  strength  of  the  various  nations,  and  enables  the  War  De- 
partment to  decide  upon  the  siiie  of  an  army  or  expedition,  the  pro- 
portion of  the  different  arms,  character  of  clothing,  equipment,  etc., 
that  may  be  necessary  in  the  event  of  war.  The  latter  relates  to 
the  theater  of  operations  and  to  the  position,  strength,  intentions, 
etc.,  of  the  enemy  in  the  field,  and  is  absolutely  essential  to  enable 
a  commander  properly  to  estimate  the  situation.  With  the  first 
this  paper  has  nothing  to  do;  I  will  discuss  the  latter  under  "Recon- 
naissance and  Patrolling.' ' 

Information  in  the  field  is  obtained  from  various  sources — 
higher  commanders,  adjoining  troops,  inhabitants,  newspapers, 
letters,  telegraph  files,  prisoners,  deserters,  spies,  maps,  and  re- 
connaissance by  scouts  and  patrols. 

Knowledge  of  the  terrain,  always  essential  to  a  correct  under- 
standing of  the  situation,  is  obtained  from  a  careful  study  of  availa- 
ble maps,  supplemented  by  thorough  reconnaissance.  This  is  why 
it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  every  officer  and  non-commissioned 
officer  know  how  to  re&,d  a  map  intelligently.  Very  few  military 
persons  are  required  to  make  maps,  but  all  military  men  will  be 
required  to  read  them,  if  they  are  going  to  play  the  game  with  any 
chance  of  success. 

Reconnaissance  begins  as  soon  as  the  theater  of  possible  oper- 
ations is  entered,  and  continues  throughout  the  campaign.  No 
matter  what  other  sources  of  information  may  be  available,  recon- 
naissance must  be  depended  upon  to  obtain  the  information  upon 
which  all  tactical  movements  of  troops  should  be  based.  Recon- 
naissance preceding  deployment  for  action  is  of  vital  importance. 
Reconnaissance,  remember,  is  continued  throughout  the  action;  it 
does  not  cease  when  contact  is  established. 

Patrols  should  always  be  sent  out  to  the  front  and  flanks  to  try 
to  locate  the  enemy's  line,  to  find  out  where  his  flanks  are,  and  to 
report  upon  the  nature  of  the  ground  over  which  the  attack  will 
have  to  be  delivered.    A  neglect  of  this  precaution  has  caused 


130  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

numerous  defeats.  The  failure  in  this  respect  at  the  battle  of 
Waterloo  in  1815  caused  the  French  cavalry,  who  were  ordered  to 
charge  the  British  lines,  to  ride  into  and  fill  up  a  sunken  road  which 
was  in  their  front  and  was  not  known  to  be  there.  Of  course,  the 
charge  failed,  and  many  men  were  lost  needlessly.  A  swamp  or 
marsh  in  y6ur  front  not  reported  may  sto^)  the  most  determined 
infantry  attack. 

Patrols  sent  out  to  reconnoiter  the  ground  are  usually  called 
''ground  scouts.'* 

It  is  absolutely  essential  that  the  enemy's  position  be  located 
before  the  deployment  commences;  otherwise  you  are  very  liable  to 
start  your  line  against  the  enemy  in  the  wrong  direction,  and  this 
spells  ''defeat." 

It  may  be  taken  as  a  rule  that  troops  deployed  and  under  fire 
cannot  change  front.  Therefore  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  your 
line  be  started  in  the  proper  direction  at  the  comrnencement  of  the 
action.  Even  a  slight  error  in  this  respect  is  apt  to  cause  defeat. 
Your  attack  will  not  go  home  where  you  want  it  to,  and  thus  may 
fail.  Even  after  your  attack  has  been  launched  in  the  proper  di- 
rection, it  is  difficult  to  keep  it  going  in  the  same  direction.  There 
is  always  a  tendency  to  oblique,  which  must  be  guarded  against. 
Frequently  it  will  be  necessary  to  halt  the  entire  line  and  start  the 
attack  over  again  by  sending  a  fraction  of  the  line  forward  in  the 
correct  direction  and  requiring  the  remainder  of  the  line  to  guide 
on  them. 

Reconnoitering  patrols  must  be  careful  to  neglect  nothing  in 
gaining  information.  Remember,  in  questioning  civilians  it  is  better 
to  avoid  using  military  terms  with  which  they  are  not  familiar. 
Don't  ask  them  if  they  have  seen  cavalry,  infantry,  or  artillery;  but 
ask  them  if  they  have  seen  soldiers  on  foot,  or  on  horseback,  or  with 
guns  on  wheels.  Don't  ask  them  how  many  men  they  have  seen 
because  estimates  of  civilians  in  this  respect  are  almost  sure  to  be 
worthless;  but  ask  them  when  the  soldiers  commenced  to  arrive 
when  the  last  of  them  got  in,  etc.  You  will  then  be  able  to  calculate 
the  time,  and  thus  estimate  the  number  of  men. 

Be  careful,  in  your  messages,  to  separate  what  you  have  seen 
yourself  from  what  you  believe  or  have  been  told.     Don't  say, 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  131 

"  The  enemy  is  at  X, "  unless  you  have  seen  them  there  yourself;  but 
say,  ^'A  civilian  reports  that  the  village  of  X  is  full  of  soldiers/'  or 
you  may  say,  '[1  believe  that  the  village  of  X  is  occupied  by  the 
enemy,  because  I  have  seen  the  following  indications''  (here  mention 
what  you  have  seen). 

In  questioning  civilians,  try  to  enter  into  a  conversation  with 
them,  and  frame  your  qaiestions  so  that  they  will  think  they  are 
prompH^ed  by  natural  cutiosity.  Don't  let  them  think  that  you  are 
trying  to  extract  military  information,  because,  if  you  do,  they  will 
likely  shut  up  Hke  a  clam,  unless  you  are  in  friendly  territory.  Re- 
member, the  average  town-bred  civilian  knows  little,  if  anything, 
of  the  surrounding  country.  Country  doctors,  peddlers,  and  any 
man  who  is  in  the  habit  of  traveling  is  more  apt  to  have  the  informa- 
tion that  you  desire.  Frequently  valuable  information  can  be  ob- 
tained by  looking  through  letters  in  the  post-office  and  by  exam- 
ining telegrams  on  file  in  the  telegraph  office.  Prisoners  are  always 
a  valuable  means  of  gaining  information,  but  the  best  person  to 
question  them  is  the  guard  over  them,  who  can  enter  into  conversa- 
tion, and  thus  extract  valuable  information.  Treat  your  prisoners 
well,  and  you  will  usually  be  able  to  get  more  information  from  them 
than  you  would  if  you  abuse  them. 

Be  careful,  if  you  are  captured,  not  to  give  any  information 
whatever.  Don't  attempt  to  give  false  information,  because  you 
may  unwittingly  give  real  information. 

In  reconnoitering,  remember  it  is  information  that  you  are 
after  and  that  you  must  get  it.  Don't  be  afraid  to  take  any  risk 
in  order  to  accomplish  your  mission.  If  the  safety  of  your  men  were 
the  only  consideration,  they  could  be  left  off  the  battle-field,  and 
then  no  one  would  get  hurt. 

Napoleon  once  said,  *'You  can't  make  an  omelette  without 
breaking  eggs."  Frequently  you  will  not  be  able  to  get  information 
without  running  risks  and  losing  some  men,  but  it  is  all  in  the  game. 
It  is  team-work  that  counts,  and  we  want  our  team  to  win,  no  matter 
what  it  costs. 

Infantry  reconnoitering  patrols  rarely  go  more  than  two  miles 
in  advance  of  supporting  troops.  If  it  is  necessary  to  reconnoiter 
beyond  tliat  distance,  it  is  better  to  send  cavalry  or  mounted  men* 


132  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Information,  to  be  of  any  value,  must  be  immediately  commu- 
nicated to  your  commanding  officer.  An  hour  or  a  few  minutes' 
delay  may  render  important  information  worthless.  If  information 
is  very  valuable,  send  it  by  different  messengers,  who  will  return  by 
different  routes,  so,  if  one  man  is  captured,  the  other  man  may 

get  through. 

Patrols, 

Patrols  are  roughly  divided  into  two  classes- — small  patrols  and 
strong  patrols.  A  small  patrol  consists  of  from  three  to  nine  men. 
A  strong  patrol  consists  of  from  ten  men  to  a  company. 

Patrols  are  classified  as  reconnoitering,  harassing,  expeditionary, 
visiting,  and  combat  patrols.  In  special  cases  patrols  may  be  given 
missions  different  from  the  above. 

A  patrol  is  a  detachment  sent  out  from  the  command  to  gain 
information,  or  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  gaining  information,  or 
to  harass  the  enemy's  outposts  or  columns  on  the  march,  or  to  blow 
up  a  bridge,  or  capture  prisoners,  or  for  any  special  mission  where  a 
small  force  is  sufficient. 

In  general,  it  may  be  said  that  the  formation  of  a  patrol  con- 
forms to  the  formation  of  a  large  body  of  troops;  that  is,  it  should 
have  an  advance  guard,  rear  guard,  and  flank  guards.  The  patrol 
must  always  be  formed  so  as  to  faciUtate  the  gaining  of  information, 
or  to  enable  it  to  accomplish  its  mission  and  secure  the  escape  of 
at  least  one  man  should  it  be  cut  off  or  captured. 

The  usual  mistake  is  to  form  the  patrol  so  that  the  men  cannot 
see  more  than  one  man  can.  This  is  the  result  of  not  having  the 
proper  formation  or  sufficient  intervals. 

Patrols  must  always  have  an  advance  and  rear  guard.  If  the 
patrol  is  large  enough,  it  should  also  have  flank  guards.  It  is  usually 
sufficient  if  these  bodies  are  represented  by  one  man,  although  with 
strong  patrols  three  or  four  men  might  be  placed  in  each  guard. 

When  the  patrol  leader  receives  his  instructions,  he  should  be 
careful  to  explain  them  in  detail  to  all  the  men  of  his  patrol,  and 
be  sure  that  each  man  thoroughly  understands  them.  This  is  nec- 
essary in  tli*e  event  of  Uis  being  killed,  captured,  or  becoming  sep- 
arated from  his  patrol.  This  is  very  important.  Don't  forget  it. 
He  inspects  his  patrol  and  sees  that  every  man  is  properly  armed, 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  133 

equipped,  and  has  good  shoes  on,  and  that  his  feet  are  in  good  con- 
dition, so  that  he  can  march  and  not  delay  the  patrol.  No  man 
should  be  taken  along  who  has  a  cough,  because  it  might  betray 
the  presence  of  the  patrol  to  the  enemy.  Of  course,  no  man  should 
be  taken  who  is  intoxicated  or  sick. 

The  patrol  leader  should  be  careful  to  see  that  equipments  do 
not  rattle  or  glisten  in  the  sun. 

The  patrol  leader  should  be  sure  that  he  thoroughly  under- 
stands his  orders,  and  knows  exactly  what  he  should  accomplish 
and  just  what  he  is  expected  to.  Don't  make  the  mistake  of  giving 
the  patrol  leader  too  many  instructions.  This  has  a  tendency  to 
confiise  him  a»nd  make  him  slight  his  work,  or  he  may  try  to  ac- 
complish too  much. 

Patrols  should  be  sent  out  to  accomplish  one  or  at  most  two 
objects.  If  you  desire  to  have  three  or  four  things  accomplished, 
it  is  better  to  send  out  three  or  four  patrols,  instead  of  entrusting 
them  all  to  one  patrol. 

The  patrol  leader  should  be  careful  to  be  sure  that  he  knows 
where  he  is  to  go,  how  far  he  is  to  go,  whom  messages  are  to  be  sent 
to,  and  where  they  are  to  be  sent,  also  when  he  is  to  return.  It  is 
always  better  to  return  by  a  different  route  from  the  one  followed 
on  going  out,  so  that  your  patrol  cannot  be  ambushed. 

Patrols  advance  cautiously,  but  not  timidly.  Note  well  the 
difference.  They  should  endeavor  to  keep  concealed  as  much  as 
possible,  but  concealment  must  not  interfere  with  the  accomplish- 
ment of  their  mission. 

Hills  should  be  carefully  reconnoitered,  and  from  the  tops  of 
them  a  good  view  of  the  surrounding  country  can  usually  be  ob- 
tained. This  should  never  be  neglected.  The  man  detailed  for 
this  work  should  work  his  way  carefully  to  the  top,  remain  in  con- 
cealment while  reconnoitering,  and  should  withdraw  with  the  same 
caution  that  he  exercised  in  going  up,  whether  anything  is  seen  or 
not.  The  other  fellow  may  be  a  better  scout  than  you  are  and  may 
keep  concealed.  Remember,  just  because  you  don't  see  the  enemy 
is  no  sign  that  they  are  not  in  the  vicinity. 

I^  reconnoitering  exposed  places,  it  is  better  for  the  patrol  to 
remain  in  concealment  for  some  time  and  observe  the  house  or 


134  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

village  before  sending  anyone  in  to  complete  the  reconnaissance. 
Thep  send  in  two  or  three  men,  while  the  patrol  remains  in  con- 
ppalment,  ready  to  support  them,  if  necessary. 

Small  patrols  should  never  enter  a  house  or  enclosure  without 
carefully  reconnoitering  it  beforehand. 

Never  trust  the  inhabitants  of  a  hostile  country.  The  neglect 
of  this  precaution  has  caused  the  capture  of  countless  patrols  and 
detachments. 

Now,  don't  try  to  fi^ht  every  chance  you  get.  This  is  a  frequent 
mistake  made  by  new  troops.  Remember  this:  A  patrol  sent  out 
to  gain  information  differs  from  one  sent  out  to  prevent  the  enemy 
from  gaining  information  in  this  respect:  the  first  one  never  fights 
unless  forced  to;  the  other  one  fights  every  time  it  has  an  oppor- 
tunity. One  avoids  trouble,  and  the  other  is  looking  for  a  row 
all  the  time.  Be  sure  you  know  to  what  class  you  belong  before 
you  start  out. 

The  patrol  leader  (and  the  men,  if  possible)  should  be  familiar 
with  the  enemy's  uniforms,  so  that  they  can  report  intelligently 
upoii  what  they  see. 

The  number  of  a  regiment  in  your  front  may  seem  a  small 
matter  to  you,  but  it  may  be  of  vital  importance  to  the  commander. 
For  example :  Headquarters  has  information  that  the  27th  Infantry 
Regiment  belongs  to  the  7th  Brigade  of  the  3d  Division;  they  know 
that  two  days  ago  that  division  was  sixty  miles  from  the  battle- 
field. Now  a  patrol  sends  in  information  to  the  effect  that  a  dead 
soldier  belonging  to  the  27th  Infantry  Regiment  was  found  in  the 
bushes.  You  see  what  that  means  to  headquarters;  it  means  that 
the  3d  Division  has  arrived  on  the  line,  or  at  least  the  7th  Brigade 
has  arrived;  that  means  that  the  enemy  has  received  reinforce- 
ments— a  very  important  thing  for  headquarters  to  know. 

If  you  are  familiar  with  the  enemy's  uniform  and  see  a  soldier 
in  a  certain  uniform  on  outpost  or  on  patrol  and  report  this  fact,  it 
may  amount  to  the  same  thing  as  in  the  previous  case. 

Be  careful  not  to  report  mounted  infantry  as  cavalry,  or  horse 
artillery  as  field  artillery,  for  the  same  reason.  In  horse  artillery 
every  one  in  the  battery  is  mounted ;  in  field  artillery  the  cannon- 
eers ride  on  the  limbers  and  caissons.     You  can  tell  mounted  in- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY).  135 

fantry  from  cavalry,  because  they  will  not  have  sabers.  All  these 
little  things  are  important. 

Before  the  armies  come  into  actual  contact,  it  is  very  important 
that  the  first  sight  of  the  enemy  should  be  immediately  reported. 
After  the  first  detachment  is  reported,  if  you  happen  to  see  other 
small  detachments,  it  is  not  necessary  to  report  their  presence. 

In  writing  messages,  take  plenty  of  time  and  make  your  message 
clear  and  of  some  value.  It  is  better  to  take  ten  minutes  to  write  a 
message  that  is  of  some  value  than  it  is  to  write  one  in  thirty  seconds 
that  means  nothing.  Always  put  the  time  that  the  message  was 
written  on  it.  Time  means  everything  in  war.  If  you  neglect 
this,  your  message  has  Uttle  value,  if  any. 

When  friendly  patrols  are  met  with,  always  exchange  informa- 
tion with  them.  You  or  they  may  never  get  back  to  your  lines,  and 
if  you  neglect  this,  much  valuable  information  may  be  lost. 

I  am  going  to  issue  you  little  cards,  which  contain  things  that 
every  patrol  leader  (and  private,  for  that  matter)  should  know  by 
heart.     Study  them  and  commit  their  contents  to  memory. 

I  will  now  illustrate  on  the  blackboard  the  formation  of  patrols. 

Instructions  for  Patrols. 

A  patrol  is  a  detachment  sent  out  from  a  command  to  gain  in- 
formation of  the  country  or  of  the  enemy,  ,or  to  prevent  the  enemy 
from  gaining  information. 

In  special  cases  p,atrols  may  be  given  missions  other  than  these. 

A  patrol  sent  out  to  gain  information  differs  from  one  sent  out 
to  prevent  the  enemy  gaining  information  in  this  respect:  a  patrol 
sent  out  to  gain  information  does  not  fight  unless  absolutely  un- 
avoidable; one  sent  out  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  gaining  in- 
formation attacks  every  small  body  or  patrol  of  the  enemy  that  it 
encounters.  The  first  avoids  trouble  and  hides  when  bodies  of  the 
enemy  are  met  with,  and  the  other  is  hunting  for  trouble  all  the  time. 

Patrols  are  roughly  divided  into  two  classes — small  and  strong. 
A  small  patrol  consists  of  from  three  men  to  a  squad.  A  strong 
patrol  consists  of  from  nine  men  to  a  full  company. 

Small  patrols  are  better  for  gaining  information  than  large  ones. 

An  infantry  patrol  rarely  goes  more  than  two  miles  in  advance 
of  the  outpost  sentinels. 


136     .  COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 

A  patrol  should  always  be  formed  so  as  to  permit  the  escape 
of  at  least  one  man,  if  suddenly  surprised  or  attacked. 

A  patrol  should  be  formed  as  follows:  main  body,  advance 
guard,  rear  guard,  right  flank  guard,  and  left  flank  guard.  If  a 
patrol  is  very  small,  some  of  these  will  have  to  be  omitted,  but  it 
must  always  have  an  advance  and  rear  guard. 

With  a  patrol  of  four  or  five  men  the  distances  may  vary  from 
25  to  50  yards;  with  a  larger  patrol  they  may  be  as  great  as  100  yards. 

At  times  a  column  or  files  or  a  thin  skirmish-line  with  suitable 
distances  or  intervals  may  be  a  satisfactory  formation. 

In  very  open  country  distances  may  be  as  great  as  300  yards 
without  danger. 

When  ordered  to  prepare  for  patrolling,  the  patrol  leader  as- 
sembles his  men,  inspects  their  arms  and  ammunition,  and  sees  that 
no  man  is  sick,  intoxicated,  or  has  a  cough,  or  has  any  papers  or 
maps  on  his  person  that  might  betray  information  to  the  enemy  if 
captured.  He  sees  that  their  accouterments  do  not  glisten  or  rattle 
when  they  march.  He  repeats  his  instructions  to  his  men,  and  must 
be  sure  that  every  man  thoroughly  understands  them. 

Besides  his  arms  and  ammunition,  the  patrol  leader  should 
have  a  compass,  a  watch,  a  pencil,  a  note-book,  and,  when  prac- 
ticable, field  message  blanks  and  a  map  of  the  country. 

Before  sending  a  message,  written  or  verbal,  make  the  mes- 
senger repeat  it. 

Written  messages  should  state  the  place,  date,  hour,  and  minute 
of  their  dispatch. 

In  friendly  territory,  send  one  messenger;  in  the  enemy's 
country,  two. 

Before  starting  out,  be  sure  that  you  know  what  is  expected 
of  you — where  you  are  to  go,  how  far  you  are  to  go,  and  when  you 
are  to  return. 

Be  sure  you  know  where  your  messages  are  to  be  sent. 

Be  careful,  in  your  messages,  to  separate  what  you  know  from 
what  you  have  heard  or  what  you  believe. 

State  whether  you  will  remain  where  you  are  or  where  you 
intend  to  go. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  137 

Combat  Patrols. 
A  combat  patrol  is  o;iie  which  is  always  sent  out  from  a  de- 
ployed line  to  guard  its  flanks  from  surprise  and  attack.  It  must  be 
well  out  to  the  flank  and  slightly  in  advance  of  the  line,  never  in 
rear  of  it.  If  attacked,  it  must  resist  to  the  last  man  until  the  line 
has  been  warned  and  has  had  time  to  prepare  for  the  attack  against 
its  flank. 


LECTURE  No.  5. 
CONTACT  AND  DEPLOYMENT  FOR  ACTION. 

Usually  an  action  opens  by  the  advance  guards  coming  in  con- 
tact, or  the  advance  guard  may  nm  into  the  enemy's  outposts. 

Whether  an  action  will  commence  at  once  under  the  above  con- 
ditions will  depend  entirely  upon  the  intentions  of  the  commanders 
and  the  orders  given  to  the  outpost  and  advance  guard  commanders. 
An  advance  guard  commander  may  have  orders  to  halt  when  he 
encounters  the  enemy,  or  he  may  have  been  instructed  to  attack  at 
once,  or  reconnoiter  the  enemy's  Une  and  develop  his  position.  In 
any  case  the  attack  should  not  be  ordered  until  careful  reconnais- 
sance has  been  made. 

I  spoke  to  you  in  a  previous  lecture  of  the  danger  of  attacking 
an  enemy's  position  before  carefully  locating  his  line.  If  you  butt 
right  in  and  deploy  a  large  percentage  of  your  men  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  action,  and  your  guess  has  not  been  correct,  you  will 
be  defeated. 

An  action  is  usually  preceded  (after  contact  has  been  obtained) 
by  cavalry  combats  and  engagements  between  patrols  until  the 
entire  line  has  been  reconnoitered  and  you  have  found  the  weak  point 
in  the  enemy's  line,  or  the  most  favorable  ground  over  which  to 
deliver  your  attack. 

The  commander  of  the  troops  should  always  get  as  far  to  the 
front  as  he  can  do  so  with  safety,  and,  if  possible,  reconnoiter  the 
ground  himself  before  he  orders  an  attack.  He  should  decide  on  a 
plan  of  attack  and  carry  it  through.  It  is  very  difficult,  if  not  im- 
possible, to  change  your  plan  after  you  have  once  started  the  attack; 


13S  Company  training  (Infantry). 

so  decide  just  what  you  are  going  to  do,  and  then  do  it.  Don't 
haggle,  don't  vacillate— decide  on  a  plan,  and  then  stick  to  it. 

The  difficulty  of  reconnaissance  increases  in  proportion  to  the 
measures  adopted  by  an  enemy  to  screen  himself.  You  must  expect 
this,  so  don't  be  disappointed  when  you  find  that  it  is  difficult  to 
obtain  any  information.  Frequently  it  will  be  necessary  to  send 
forward  thin  Unes  of  skirmishers  to  make  the  enemy  show  himself 
and  disclose  his  position.  Sometimes  it  is  impossible  to  obtain  sat- 
isfactory information  until  after  the  action  has  begun,  and  that  is 
why  you  want  to  avoid  a  premature  deployment. 

Remember  that  each  separate  column  moving  forward  to  the 
attack  or  to  deploy  for  action  reconnoiters  to  its  front  and  iflanks, 
irrespective  of  the  fact  that  they  know  friendly  troops  are  on  their 
flanks.     They  must  maintain  communication  with  these  bodies. 

BattaUon  commanders  in  the  first  line  establish  patrols  to  ob- 
serve and  report  the  progress  or  conduct  of  adjbiniiig  troops  when 
these  cannot  be  seen. 

Always  commence  an  action  by  deploying  a  fraction  of  your 
command;  you  can  then  control  the  progress  of  the  action  by 
sending  in  the  supports  and  prolonging  your  hne  to  the  right  or  left 
as  the  case  may  require.  For  example:  A  company  would  usually 
place  one  platoon  in  the  firing-line;  a  battalion,  one  company;  a 
regiment,  two  companies;  a  brigade,  one  battalion.  As  the  fight 
opens  and  you  come  under  fire,  you  can  then  tell  where  to  put  in 
your  supports  and  whether  the  line  should  be  prolonged  to  the  right 
or  left  or  in  an  oblique  direction.  If  the  first  small  fraction  has  not 
been  deployed  in  the  correct  direction,  no  great  amount  of  harm  has 
been  done,  and  you  can  rectify  your  mistake  before  it  is  too  late. 

Deployment  for  Action. 

After  contact  has  taken  place  and  the  reconnaissance  has  com- 
menced, troops  must  be  moved  up  to  the  front  under  cover  and 
massed,  preparatory  to  deployment. 

Battalions  in  close  column,  regiments  in  column  or  line  of 
masses,  etc.,  or  troops  can  assume  the  formation  of  a  line  of  columns. 
A  regiment  in  line  of  colutnus,  with  appropriate  intervals  between 
battalions;   each  battalion  in  column  of  squads,  or  the  formation 


COMPANY  TkAtNiNG  (JNFANtRY).  m 

may  be  a  line  of  company  columns;  the  head  of  each  company  on 
tfie  same  line,  with  proper  intervals  between  companies,  each 
company  in  column  of  squads,  etc.  The  terrain  and  the  conditions 
of  the  action  will  govern  this.  You  might  have  three  lines,  each 
battalion  in  line  of  comp!any  columns. 

Now,  don't  forget  your  combat  patrols,  well  out  on  each  flank. 
They  should  be  sent  out  as  soon  as  the  deployment  commences.  A 
deployment  commences  as  soon  as  the  regiment,  battalion,  or  com- 
pany breaks  from  the  column  of  march. 

When  moving  forward  to  the  attack  or  to  take  up  a  position 
from  which  to  deploy  for  action,  remember  to  leave  your  wagon 
trains  well  to  the  rear,  where  they  will  be  in  no  danger  and  where 
they  will  not  be  in  the  road.  If  you  are  victorious,  the  trains  can 
couae  up;  and  if  you  are  defeated,  word  can  be  sent  to  them  to  retreat, 
and  they  will  be  sent  out  of  the  way  before  your  troops  want  to  use 
the  road.  A  neglect  of  this  simple  precaution  has  turned  many  re- 
pulses into  routs  and  caused  the  loss  of  numerous  wagon  trains 
that  sho\4d  have  been  saved. 

Remember,  each  battalion  is  provided  with  two  escort  wag- 
ons, called  ''combat  wagons'^;  these  wagons  follow  the  battalion 
wherever  it  goes,  and  are  loaded  with  two  bandoliers  of  cartridges 
for  every  rifle  in  the  battalion.  This  is  called  the  ''extra  ammuni- 
tion.'' This  ammunition  is  issued  just  before  the  battalion  com- 
mences its  deployment,  two  bandohers  to  each  man;  a  soldier  will 
thus  go  into  action  with  220  rounds,  which  should  last  him  through 
any  ordinary  action. 

The  ammunition  supply  of  troops  on  the  firing-line  is  supple- 
mented by  the  ammunition  collected  from  the  dead  and  wounded. 
Company  commanders  are  charged  with  this  duty.  The  major 
orders  the  issue  of  the  extra  ammunition. 

These  combat  wagons,  when  empty,  immediately  return  to  the 
rear,  refill,  and  then  move  forward,  halt  under  cover,  and  endeavor 
to  locate  their  battalion,  inform  its  commander  where  they  are,  and 
await  orders.  They  are  not  part  of  the  regimental  train,  and  are 
not  supposed  to  be  used  for  any  other  purpose.  The  company  hand- 
litters  are  carried  on  them  when  going  into  action.  It  is  forbidden 
to  place  any  other  articles  on  these  wagons. 


140  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Remember  that  troops  going  into  action  cannot  expect  to  have 
that  day  more  ammunition  than  they  can  carry  into  the  action  with 
them,  supplemented  by  that  collected  from  the  dead  and  wounded . 

The  combat  wagons,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  higher  au- 
thority, march  directly  in  rear  of  their  battalion. 


LECTURE  No.  6. 
THE  ATTACK. 


Modem  combat  requires  the  highest  order  of  training,  disci- 
pline, leladership,  and  morale  on  the  part  of  the  infantry.  Compli- 
cated maneuvers  are  impracticable.  Efficient  leadership  and  a 
determination  to  win  by  simple  and  direct  methods  must  be  de- 
pended upon  for  success. 

The  duties  of  infantry  are  many  and  difficult.  All  infantry 
must  be  fit  to  cope  with  all  conditions  that  may.  arise.  Modern 
war  requires  but  one  kind  of  infantry — good  infantry.  In  local 
combats,  which  make  up  the  general  battle,  the  better  endurance, 
use  of  ground,  fire  efficiency,  discipline,  and  training  will  win.  It  is 
the  duty  of  the  infantry  to  win  the  local  successes  which  enable  the 
commanding  general  to  win  the  battle. 

The  successful  advance  of  one  company  allows  the  battalion 
to  advance;  the  advance  of  the  battalion  lets  the  regiment  forward; 
the  advance  of  the  regiment  lets  the  brigade  forward;  and  this  in 
turn  lets  the  division  advance,  pierce  the  enemy's  line,  and  thus 
win  the  battle.  You  can  thus  see  the  responsibihty  which  rests  up- 
on the  company  commander.  One  company  may  win  or  lose  a  bat- 
tle by  the  maimer  in  which  it  is  handled. 

Infantry  must  be  trained  to  expect  and  bear  the  heaviest  losses 
in  combat  and  on  the  march  without  becoming  discouraged.  It  is 
your  work.  Play  the  game  for  all  it  is  worth.  Good  infantry  can 
defeat  an  enemy  greatly  superior  in  numbers,  but  lacking  in  training, 
discipUne,  and  morale. 

After  the  mechanism  of  extended  order  drill  has  been  learned 
with  precision  in  the  company,  every  exercise  should  be,  as  far  as 
practicable,  in  the  nature  of  a  maneuver  (combat  exercise)  against 
an  imaginary  outlined  or  represented  enemy.     Company  extended 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  141 

order  drill  may  be  conducted  without  reference  to  a  tactical  situa- 
tion, but  a  combat  exercise,  whatever  the  si^e  of  the  unit  employed, 
should  be  conducted  under  an  assumed  tactical  situation. 

Self-reliance,  initiative,  aggressiveness,  and  a  conception  of 
team-work  constitute  the  fundamental  characteristics  of  successful 
leadership. 

A  good  plan,  once  adopted  and  put  into  execution,  should  not  be 
abandoned,  unless  it  becomes  clear  that  it  cannot  succeed.  After- 
thoughts are  dangerous,  except  as  they  aid  in  the  execution  of  the 
original  plan. 

Combats  that  do  not  promise  success  or  some  real  advantage 
to  the  general  plan  should  be  avoided.  Don't  fight  just  for  the 
sake  of  fighting. 

Complicated  maneuvers  are  not  likely  to  succeed  in  war. 

Officers  must  show  themselves  true  leaders.  They  must  exact 
of  their  troops  the  strictest  discipline  on  the  battle-field.  Lax  dis- 
cipline and  slipshod  methods  will  never  succeed. 

Constant  efforts  must  be  made  to  spare  the  troops  all  unnec- 
essary hardship  and  fatigue,  so  as  to  conserve  their  energies  for  the 
supreme  test. 

A  commander  takes  full  and  direct  charge  of  the  firing-line 
only  when  the  line  has  absorbed  his  entire  command. 

Commanders  should  tell  their  subordinates  what  they  want 
done,  but  not  how  it  is  to  be  done.  If  you  can't  trust  the  man  to 
do  the  work,  detail  someone  else. 

Subordinates  must  be  loyal  to  their  commanders  and  strive  in 
every  way  to  carry  out  their  wishes.  A  great  deal  of  latitude  is 
necessarily  allowed  subordinates,  but  this  must  not  become  license 
on  their  part. 

Remember,  when  the  men  of  two  or  more  units  intermingle  on 
the  firing-line,  all  officers  and  men  immediately  submit  to  the  senior. 

Officers  and  platoon  guides  seek  to  fill  vacancies  caused  by 
casualties.  Each  seizes  any  opportunity  to  exercise  the  fimctions 
consistent  with  his  grade,  and  all  assist  in  the  maintenance  of  order 
and  control. 

Any  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  who  becomes  sep- 
arated from  his  proper  unit  and  cannot  rejoin  it  must  at  once  place 


142  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

himself  and  his  command  at  the  disposal  of  the  nearest  higher  com- 
mander. Remember,  this  is  team-work,  and  team-work  is  what 
wins. 

Soldiers  must  be  taught  the  necessity  of  remaining  with  their 
companies,  but  those  who  become  detached  must  join  the  nearest 
company  and  serve  with  it  until  the  battle  is  over  or  reorganization 
is  ordered. 

Long-range  fire  is  permissible  in  pursuit  on  account  of  the  moral 
effect  of  any  fire  under  the  circumstances;  at  other  times  it  is  of 
doubtful  value. 

In  attack,  the  desire  to  open  fire  when  losses  are  first  felt  must 
be  repressed.  The  attack  which  halts  to  open  fire  at  long  ranges 
will  seldom  succeed.  You  should  endeavor  to  work  up  to  within  800 
yards  before  opening  fire — 1,000  yards  at  most. 

The  men  must  be  impressed  with  the  fact  that,  having  made  a 
considerable  advance  under  fire  and  having  been  checked,  it  is  sui- 
cidal to  turn  back  in  dayUght.  You  must  stay  where  you  are  until 
supported  or  until  you  can  retire  under  cover  of  darkness. 

Confidence  in  their  ability  to  use  the  bayonet  gives  the  attacking 
troops  the  promise  of  success.     Remember,  only  the  offensive  wins. 

The  best  protection  from  the  enemy's  fire  is  a  well-directed  and 
delivered  fire  from  your  own  line. 

Always  keep  out  a  formed  reserve  and  don't  throw  it  in  until 
the  charge  is  ordered. 

Thirty  rounds  in  the  right  pocket  section  of  the  belt  will  be 
held  as  a  reserve  to  be  expended  only  when  ordered  by  an  officer. 
Men  continue  to  fire  until  they  get  down  to  this  reserve,  when  they 
cease  firing.  If  asKed  why  they  are  not  firing,  they  report  that  they 
are  down  to  the  reserve  thirty  rounds. 

Men  are  never  sent  back  from  the  firing-line  for  ammu"nition , 
Men  sent  forward  with  ammunition  remain  with  the  firing-line. 

At  the  formation  of  the  company,  squads  and  platoons  are 
designated.  These  assignments  and  designations  are  never  changed 
in  battle.  Losses  in  the  platoon  are  filled  from  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  of  the  platoon  or  from  reinforcements  arriving 
on  the  firing-line.  A  reinforcement  of  less  than  a  platoon  has  little 
value.     It  will  be  avoided.     The  original  platoon  divisions  of  the 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  143 

companies  in  the  firing-line  should  be  maintained  and  should  not  be 
broken  up  by  the  mingling  of  reinforcements. 

Men  joining  the  firing-Une  should  go  forward,  when  a  rush  is 
ordered,  with  the  men  on  their  right. 

In  general,  the  company  when  acting  alone,  is  employed  accord- 
ing to  the  principles  applicable  to  the  battalion;  the  captain  using 
his  platoons  like  the  major  uses  his  companies,  making  due  allow- 
ance for  the  difference  in  strength. 

Five  or  six  officers  and  men,  selected  from  the  most  accurate 
estimaters  in  the  company,  are  designated  as  range-finders,  and  are 
specially  trained  in  estimating  distances. 

Volley  firing  has  limited  application.  In  defense  it  may  be 
used  in  the  early  stages  of  an  action,  if  the  enemy  presents  a  large, 
compact  target.  It  may  be  used  to  get  the  range  if  the  strike  of  the 
bullets  can  be  observed.  It  may  be  used  by  troops  using  fire  of 
position  and  supporting  the  attack. 

Fire  at  will  is  the  class  of  fire  usually  employed  in  attack  and 
defense. 

Clip  fire  has  limited  application.  It  is  principally  used:  (1) 
In  the  early  stages  of  the  action  to  steady  the  men  by  habituating 
them  to  brief  pauses  in  the  firing;  (2)  to  produce  a  short  burst  of  fire. 

All  parts  of  the  target  are  of  equal  importance.  Care  must  be 
exercised  that  the  men  do  not  slight  its  less  visible  parts  to  fire  at  a 
part  that  can  be  plainly  seen.  A  section  of  the  target  not  covered 
by  fire  represents  a  section  of  the  enemy's  line  which  you  are  per- 
mitting to  fire  with  peace-time  accuracy. 

Troops  must  get  used  to  the  idea  that  they  must  learn  to  shoot 
at  a  locality,  and  not  at  a  visible  target.  If  the  enemy  knows  how  to 
play  the  game,  you  won't  see  him  at  all;  that  is  why  you  must  shoot 
at  the  place  where  he  is  most  likely  to  be. 

In  combat  the  platoon  is  the  fire  unit. 

The  more  effective  the  fire  to  which  the  enemy  is  subjected  the 
less  effective  will  be  his  fire  and  the  less  you  will  suffer  from  his  fire 
in  consequence. 

The  distance  between  the  firing-line  and  the  supporting  group 
or  groups  will  vary  between  wide  limits.  When  cover  is  available, 
the  support  can  be  as  close  as  50  to  100  yards;  when  such  cover  is 


144  COMPANY  TRAINING  {INFANTRY). 

not  available,  it  should  not  be  closer  than  300  yards;  it  may  be  as 
far  as  500  yards  in  rear,  if  good  cover  is  available  and  is  not  ob- 
tainable at  a  lesser  distance.  But  it  is  where  it  can  support  the  line 
most  effectively;   remember  that. 

The  safety  of  the  men  is  of  a  secondary  consideration.  If  the 
safety  of  the  men  were  the  only  consideration,  leave  them  off  the 
battle-field,  and  then  no  one  would  get  hurt. 

In  the  absence  of  express  directions  from  the  major,  each  cap- 
tain of  a  flank  company  determines  when  an  advance  by  rushes  will 
be  attempted.  This  company  will  then  become  the  base  company, 
and  the  other  units  must  conform  to  its  advance. 

The  major  or  senior  officer  on  the  firing-hne  determines  when 
bayonets  shall  be  fixed  and  gives  the  signal.  The  Bulgarians  in  the 
late  war  habitually  fixed  bayonets  at  about  600  yards,  and  this 
seems  to  be  a  good  rule  to  follow.  The  support  always  fixes  bayonets 
when  the  firing-line  does. 

The  commander  of  the  firing-line  determines  when  the  charge 
shall  be  made — subject,  of  course,  to  control  of  higher  commanders. 
When  the  charge  has  commenced,  all  troops  must  join  in  it. 

When  officers  or  men  belonging  to  the  fighting  troops  leave 
their  proper  places  to  carry  back  or  care  for  the  wounded,  they  are 
guilty  of  skulking.  This  offense  must  be  repressed  with  the  utmost 
rigor. 

An  envelopment  of  both  flanks  should  never  be  attempted 
without  a  very  decided  superiority  of  numbers. 

Officers,  platoon  leaders,  guides,  and  musicians  are  equipped 
with  whistles.  Company  commanders  have  a  whistle  of  a  different 
tone  from  those  used  by  the  platoon  commanders,  guides,  and 
musicians. 

Should  the  major  (in  battalion)  or  the  captain  (in  company) 
fail  to  order  out  combat  pajt;rols,  it  is  the  business  of  the  captains  of 
flank  companies,  or  lieutenants  of  flank  platoons,  to  send  them  out. 
Do  not  forget  this. 

I  believe  that  the  best  formation  for  a  company  or  battalion  to 
assume  in  deliveriiig  an  attack  is  to  form  in  four  echelons.  Place 
one  company  in  the  firing-line,  two  in  support  about  300  yards  in 
rear  and  uncovering  each  flank,  and  one  company  in  support  (re- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  145 

serve)  about  500  yards  in  rear  of  the  center  or  in  rear  of  the  exposed 
flank.  The  company  would,  of  course,  place  platoons  where  the 
major  uses  companies.  The  firing-line  should  be  deployed  at  about 
four  paces  interval,  the  supporting  echelons  at  two  paces  interval , 
and  the  support  directly  in  rear  (third  line)  at  one  pace  interval. 
If  this  formation  is  assumed,  your  flanks  are  secure,  because  the 
supports  in  rear  of  the  flanks  can  change  front  (platoon,  right  or 
left)  to  meet  the  unexpected  attack. 

You  can  reinforce  the  firing-line  by  coming  up  on  a  flank  or  by 
thickening  the  line  already  formed.  You  have  sufficient  strength 
in  reay  also.  The  firing-line  can  be  prolonged  with  facility  to  the 
right  or  left,  as  desired. 

You  do  not  commit  too  many  men  to  the  action  at  first  until 
you  know  where  you  want  the  attack  to  be  delivered. 

See  diagram  on  following  page. 

Don't  forget  your  combat  patrols — ^well  out  on  the  flank  and 
slightly  in  advance  of  the  firing-line;  never  in  rear  of  it. 

The  platoon  guide  is  on  the  left  of  the  platoon  commander 
when  the  platoon  is  deployed  and  at  a  halt;  when  advancing,  the 
platoon  commander  is  in  front  of  his  platoon  and  the  platoon  guide 
is  in  rear  of  it.  The  platoon  guide  watches  the  company  com- 
mander for  signals.  The  platoon  commander  must  watch  the 
platoon  and  receive  signals  from  the  company  commander  through 
his  guide. 

When  the  company  deploys,  the  first  sergeant  (unless  in  com- 
mand of  a  platoon)  and  the  two  company  musicians  immediately 
join  the  captain  and  remain  with  him  unless  he  sends  them  elsewhere . 

Losses  in  the  platoon  are  filled  from  the  officers  and  non- 
commissioned officers  of  the  platoon  and  from  those  arriving  with 
reinforcing  troops. 

The  original  squad  and  platoon  divisions  in  the  firing-line  must 
be  preserved,  and  must  not  be  broken  up  by  the  arrival  of  reinforcing 
troops.  The  original  squad  divisions  may  later  contain  enough  men 
to  make  it  advisable  to  handle  it  as  a  platoon,  in  which  case  new 
squads  may  be  created. 

It  is  the  business  of  all  officers  and  sergeants  to  continually 


146 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY), 


c3 

is 


o 
o 


B 


-sp^ 

ooc  -  - 

^ 

-   -s 

>^ 

--- 

-•spi^ 

009  --- 

spiC  005 


,^ 


o    >; 

Cu    CO 

C/2  pt^ 


>5^ 


_Q    03 

o 
Q 


c3 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY),  147 

keep  the  line  organized  and  under  control.     The  appoint  new  squad 
leaders,  etc.,  when  necessary. 

Every  opportunity  and  lull  in  the  fight  must  be  utilized  to  the 
utmost  to  reorganize  the  line,  create  new  squads  and  platoons,  and 
appoint  new  leaders  to  take  the  place  of  those  lost  in  action. 


LECTURE  No.  7. 
THE  DEFENSE. 


Only  the  offensive  wins,  but  there  are  times  when  it  is  abso- 
lutely necessary  for  troops  to  act  on  the  defensive. 

Frequently  in  war  it  will  be  impossibe  to  attack  with  new  or 
untrained  troops,  because  they  lack  the  ability  to  maneuver. 
Troops  that<Jannot  maneuver  are  totally  unfit  for  the  attack. 

One  of  the  most  potent  causes  of  the  defeat  of  Turkey  in  her 
late  war  with  Bulgaria  was  the  lack  of  ability  to  maneuver.  The 
Turkish  troops,  when  once  deployed  and  placed  in  positic>n,  had  to 
stay  there.  The  Bulgarians,  on  the  other  hand,  being  highly 
trained,  could  just  draw  circles  around  them  and  hit  them  when  and 
where  they  pleased.  It  is  a  very  good  thing  for  a  soldier  to  know 
how  to  shoot,  but  he  has  got  to  know  how  to  maneuver  also  or  you 
can^t  place  him  where  you  want  him  and  get  the  best  out  of  his 
abiUty  to  use  the  rifle.  Even  on  the  defense  it  is  frequently  nec- 
essary for  troops  to  maneuver,  in  order  to  meet  flank  attacks,  etc . 

The  first  requisite  of  a  good  defensive  position  is  a  free  field  of 
fire  in  its  front  and  flanks.  The  flanks  should  rest  on  some  natural 
obstacle  which  will  render  them  secure  from  being  turned — a,  swamp , 
a  lake,  a  large  river,  or  a  mountain,  for  example.  The  next  thing  is 
that  there  must  be  no  commanding  ground  within  good  rifle  range, 
which  the  enemy  might  occupy  and  enfilade  your  line.  There  must 
be  good  means  of  communication  between  all  parts  of  your  line.  A 
position  for  defense  in  which  you  r  line  is  sei)arated  by  a  lake,  a  river, 
a  hill,  or  a  deep  ravine  is  faulty.  Half  of  your  line  may  be  defeated 
before  the  other  half  can  come  to  its  assistance. 

Troops  on  the  defensive  always  intrench.  New  troops  donH 
like  the  fatigue  incident  to  this,  but  the  officers  must  insist  upon  it 
and  see  that  it  is  done.     New  troops  frequently  fail  to  appreciate 


148  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

the  advantage  of  intrenchments,  and  will  almost  invariably  slight 
the  work  if  not  carefully  watched.  Intrenchments  are  of  no  value 
unless  properly  constructed.  It  is  manifest  that  if  the  minimum 
thickness  of  earth  required  to  stop  a  bullet  is  2}^  feet,  it  is  folly  to 
throw  up  a  parapet  1}^  feet  thick;  but  this  is  just  what  new  troops 
will  do  if  you  do  not  watch  them.  After  they  have  been  in  service 
for  some  time,  they  learn  the  value  of  intrenchments  and  will  con- 
struct them  properly  of  their  own  accord,  but  they  won't  do  it  at 
first.  They  are  prone  to  throw  away  their  intrenching  tools  in 
preference  to  carrying  them;  this  you  must  also  watch.  You  will 
be  sorry  some  day  if  you  don't. 

Another  thing:  in  choosing  a  defensive  position,  occupy  one  that 
the  enemy  cannot  avoid,  but  must  attack  or  give  up  his  mission. 
If  you  take  up  a  position  on  some  hill  that*  the  enemy  can  avoid  by 
marching  around  it  and  then  proceeding  on  his  mission,  what  have 
you  accomplished?  Nothing.  If  he  knows  his  business  and  can 
accomplish  his  mission  without  attacking,  he  certainly  will  not 
attack  you  simply  because  you  are  there. 

Deployment  for  the  Defense. 

To  a  certain  extent  the  rules  laid  down  for  deployment  in  the  at- 
tack hold  good  in  the  deployment  for  the  defense,  although  it  is  per- 
missible to  place  more  men  in  the  firing-Une  at  the  commencement  of 
a  defensive  action  than  in  the  attack;  but  you  must  be  careful  not 
to  commit  all  your  men  to  the  action  until  you  are  sure  just  where 
the  attack  is  going  to  be  deUvered.  Remember,  troops  under  fire 
can  do  only  one  of  two  things — advance  or  retire.  If  you  deploy 
too  many  men  at  first,  and  the  enemy  attacks  from  a  different  di- 
rection, you,  not  having  supports  to  throw  into  the  line  where 
needed,  will  have  to  withdraw  part  of  the  firing-line  to  the  rear,  as- 
semble them,  and  then  deploy  them  in  the  new  direction — a  very 
dehcate  operation  and  one  not  to  be  attempted  with  new  troops. 
It  is  much  safer  to  deploy  a  thin  line  at  first,  covering  the  desired 
front,  to  make  the  enemy  disclose  his  intentions,  and  then,  when 
you  are  sure  that  you  know  where  he  is  going  to  attack,  strengthen 
your  line  where  needed. 

Always  keep  out  a  formed  reserve  as  long  as  possible.  When  you 
throw  in  your  last  man,  you  can  no  longer  influence  the  action  or 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  149 

meet  unexpected  developments.  In  general,  don't  throw  in  your 
lagt  reserve  until  the  enemy  is  preparing  to  charge.  Of  course,  there 
may  be  exceptions  to  this  rule,  but  it  is  a  good  one  to  follow.  Na  - 
poleon  said:     ^* There  is  no  dogmatic  rule  in  war/' 

Don't  rely  on  fire  action  alone  to  stop  the  charge;  you  must  be 
prepared  to  stop  the  enemy  with  the  jbayonet  if  your  fire  doesn't 
stop  him.     Teach  your  men  this  and  impress  them  with  this  fact. 

The  distance  of  the  sup'ports  from  the  firing-line,  on  the  de- 
fensive, will  depend  entirely  upon  circumstances.  They  should  be 
as  close  to  the  firing-line  as  possible,  provided  they  can  secure  good 
cover,  so  as  not  to  suffer  from  the  enemy's  fire.  If  natural  cover  is 
not  available,  you  will  have  to  construct  artificial  cover  (trenches). 
If  there  is  no  natural  cover  for  the  reserve  available  and  there  is  not 
time  to  construct  cover,  it  is  better  to  throw  the  supports  into  the 
firing-line  at  once  than  to  allow  them  to  be  exposed  to  losses  without 
being  able  to  inflict  corresponding  losses  upon  the  enemy. 

When  deploying  for  defense,  sections  of  the  line  must  be  as- 
signed to  units,  companies,  or  platoons,  and  they  are  charged  with 
the  duty  of  covering  this  section. 

The  range  is  estimated  to  objects  in  the  front  (measured  pref- 
erably, if  time  permits),  so  that  the  defense  will  know  the  correct 
range  from  time  to  time  as  the  enemy  advances.  For  example:  we 
have  a  small  creek  in  our  front;  we  find  that  the  range  to  it  is  750 
yards.  Good.  When  the  enemy  arrives  at  the  creek,  we  know  ex- 
actly what  the  range  is  and  can  in  consequence  open  an  effective 
fire  upon  him.  Having  found  the  range  to  different  objects  in  your 
front  in  a  like  manner,  you  should  be  able  to  keep  the  enemy  under 
an  effective  fire  during  his  entire  advance. 

Where  important  dead  space  lies  in  front  of  one  section,  an  ad- 
joining section  should  be  instructed  to  cover  it  with  fire  when  nec- 
essary, or  machine  guns  should  be  concealed  for  like  purpose. 

Advanced  posts  or  any  form  of  unnecessary  dispersion  should 
be  avoided. 

Do  not  hesitate  to  sacrifice  the  command  if  the  result  is  worth 
the  cost.    The  defense  of  the  Li^ge  forts  is  a  good  example. 

When  the  line  to  be  occupied  is  somewhat  extended  for  the 
number  of  troops  which  are  to  occupy  it,  it  is  better  to  leave  gaps  in 


150  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

line,  between  subdivisions,  than  to  attempt  to  cover  up  the  entire 
line  by  a  continuous  thin  skirmish-line.     Your  fire,  if  properly 
distributed,  should  be  as  effective,  and  you  avoid  undue  dispersion 
and  consequent  loss  of  control. 
I  will  illustrate  what  I  mean. 

Defensive    Line. 


gap  gap 


Platoon  Platoon  Platoon 


•  Support 


Remember,  in  the  defense  as  well  as  in  the  attack  you  must 
assign  a  sector  of  the  front  to  each  subdivision,  which  it  must  cover 
with  its  fire.  Make  use  of  natural  objects  in  your  front  to  define 
the  limits  of  the  sectors  of  fire  assigned  to  subdivisions.  These 
objects  may  be  a  white  house,  a  lone  pine  tree,  a  stream,  a  pecuUar 
colored  rock,  etc.  This  is  absolutely  essential  to  provide  for  the 
entire  front  being  covered  by  fire. 

Your  men  must  be  taught  to  aim  and  fire  as  carefully  at  the 
crest  of  a  line  of  hills,  a  grove  of  trees,  or  at  a  fence  as  they  would  if 
firing  at  a  well-defined  and  clearly-seen  target.  Remember,  in  war 
you  will  rarely  see  the  enemy.     You  must  learn  to  shoot  at  ajocality. 

A  section  of  the  e^nemy's  line  not  covered  with  fire  is  a  sec- 
tion that  is  shooting  with  peace-time  accuracy.  You  cannot  stop 
an  advance  that  is  shooting  like  this.  In  the  attack  you  cannot  ad- 
vance against  a  fine  that  is  delivering  a  fire  of  this  kind.  You  must 
obtain  superiority  of  fire  before  you  can  advance  or  before  you  can 
stop  an  advance,  of  the  enemy  against  your  line.  You  will  never 
be  able  to  secure  superiority  of  fire  unless  the  target  is  carefully 
divided  among  your  subdivisions,  and  each  one  covers  its  sector 
with  a  well-directed  and  delivered  fire. 

You  have  all  heard  much  about  fire  discipline.  There  is  no 
such  thing  as  fire  discipline.  What  you  must  continually  strive  for 
is  discipline — discipUne  on  the  march,  discipline  in  camp,  and  dis- 
cipline everywhere  and  all  the  time.  T^en,  and  not  till  then,  will 
you  have  discipline  on  the  battle-field.    When  you  have  this,  you 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  151 

will  have  fire  discipline,  and  not  before.  If  your  men  are  not  disci- 
plined in  camp,  they  will  not  by  some  magical  change  acquire  it  on 
the  battle-field,  and  you  will  not  be  able  to  control  your  fire,  through 
lack  of  discipline.  Discipline  means  absolute  control  over  your  men 
at  all  times.  Strive  for  it  and  work  for  it  continually.  Your  com- 
mand is  worthless  without  it. 

The  supply  of  ammunition  will  usually  be  more  plentiful  on 
the  defensive  than,  when  you  are  attacking,  but  this  fact  will  not 
relieve  you  from  the  responsibility  of  carefully  watching  the  ex- 
penditure of  ammunition.  Officers,  sergeants,  and  especially  cor- 
porals, must  watch  this  continually. 

Remember,  it  is  the  number  of  hits  that  are  made  that  counts, 
and  not  the  number  of  rounds  that  are  fired.  A  bullet  that  hits 
3  feet  in  front  of  the  line  and  one  that  goes  about  6  inch6s  over  a 
man's  head  have  the  approximate  value  of  hits,  because  the  man 
who  hears  or  sees  this  bullet  will  not  be  quite  as  cool  as  he  was 
before  and  his  fire  will  not  be  as  well  directed  as  it  was  before . 
There  will  always  be  a  suspicion  in  his  mind  that  perhaps  the  next 
bullet  may  not  hit  in  front  of  the  line  or  go  over  his  head. 

You  can  frequently  gain  superiority  of  fire  without  hitting  a 
man,  if  your  fire  is  pretty  close  to  the  other  fellow.  When  his  fire 
begins  to  get  wild  from  this  cause,  his  bullets  will  go  higher  and 
higher  over  your  line,  and  the  morale  of  your  men  will  increase 
proportionally.  Under  these  circumstances  it  will  not  be  long 
before  your  line  begins  to  make  hits. 

Watch  your  flanks  continually.  They  are  specially  vulnerable 
in  defense,  uhless  resting  upon  natural  impassable  obstacles.  One 
platoon  on  the  flahk  of  a  regiment  will  cause  the  entire  line  to 
fall  back. 

At  the  battle  of  Gravelotte,  in  the  Franco-Prussian  War  of  1870, 
the  fire  of  one  Prussian  company  of  250  men  caused  a  whole  French 
division  to  fall  back  from  a  pbsition  that  they  had  successfully  held 
all  day  against  a  Prussian  corps,  attacking  them  in  front.  A  good 
disposition  is  to  place  your  supports  in  rear  of  tlie  flanks  to  guard 
against  this  very  maneuver;  they  can  usually  meet  a  flank  attack 
by  changing  front.  Remember,  you  can't  change  the  front  of  your 
firing-line  except  in  very  small  commands. 


152  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

Counter  Attacks. 

Counter  attacks  are  nearly  always  necessary,  but  it  is  very 
dangerous  to  attempt  them  with  troops  that  are  not  very  well  drilled 
and  disciplined.  You  must  have  excellent  control  over  your  line 
before  they  can  even  be  attempted.  Napoleon  said :  "The  passage 
from  the  defensive  to  the  offensive  is  one  of  the  most  difficult 
operations  in  war.*' 

I  would  not  advise  new  troops  to  attempt  counter  attacks  unless 
made  with  a  fraction  of  the  line,  or  with  supports  or  reserves,  which 
have  not  been  engaged. 

Combat  Patrols. 

Don't  forget  your  combat  patrols.  They  must  be  used  in  de- 
fense as  well  as  in  the  attack,  and  in  this  case  they  are  of  eqbal 
importance.     They  must  be  well  out  on  the  flanks. 

The  withdrawal  from  action  might  be  properly  taken  up  in 
connection  with  the  defensive,  but  I  prefer  to  devote  a  special 
lecture  to  this  subject  later. 


LECTURE  No.  8. 
INTRENCHING  AND  INTRENCHMENTS. 

The  history  of  all  modern  wars  has  been  that  at  the  com- 
mencement the  troops  do  not  take  kindly  to  the  pick  and  shovel 
until  they  have  learned  through  bitter  experience  and  severe  losses 
that  the  pick  and  shovel  are  quite  as  impbrtant  and  valuable  as  the 
rifle  and  bayonet.  You  must  therefore  insist  that  your  men  retain 
the  field  intrenching  tools  to  the  end.  Your  officers  and  sergeants 
must  impress  this  fact  upon  your  men  at  every  opportunity. 

Colonel  Carl  Reichmann,  U.  S.  Army,  military  attache  to  the 
Russian  Army  during  the  Russian-Japanese  War,  says  in  his  report: 
'*  It  may  be  truthfully  said  of  the  Russians,  and  probably  of  the  Jap- 
anese also,  that  when  they  do  not  fight  or  march,  they  dig.'' 

Colonel  J.  F.  Morrison,  U.  S.  Army,  military  attache  to  the  Jap- 
anese Army  in  the  Russian-Japanese  War,  says  in  his  report  on  the 
war:  "  Great  reliance  was  placed  on  field  intrenchments  and  their  use 
was  very  general.     Once  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy,  the  intrench- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  153 

ing  tool  seemed  next  in  importance  to  the  rifle  and  ammunition, 
'nie  rule  on  both  sides  seemed  to  be  to  always  cover  their  positions 
with  intrenchments  as  soon  as  taken  up,  even  when  held  only  for  a 
short  time." 

This  is  expert  testimony  from  eye-witnesses. 

Our  own  troops  in  the  Civil  War  learned  this  lesson  well,  and 
became  expert  iii  the  use  of  the  pick  and  shovel. 

The  Bulgarians  in  their  late  war  with  Turkey  were  experts  in  the 
use  of  intrenchments,  and  the  fact  that  the  Turks  were  careless  and 
ignorant  in  this  respect  had  not  a  little  to  do  with  their  defeat. 

Method  of  Locating  Trenches. 

Deploy  a  thin  skirmish-line,  with  five-pace  intervals,  and  move 
them  forward  to  the  position  that  it  is  desired  to  intrench.  Have 
the  men  then  halt  and  He  down.  Cause  each  man  to  crawl  forward 
or  back  until  he  finds  a  place  from  which  he  can  command  all  of  the 
ground  to  his  front,  being  careful  to  see  that  there  are  no  hollows 
in  which  an  enemy  might  conceal  himself  and  thus  be  safe  from  fire. 
Space  of  this  kind  is  knoWn  as  "dead  space." 

Trenches  should  never  be  located  on  the  crest  of  a  hill,  as  it 
brings  them  into  relief  against  the  sky-line,  which  renders  them  a 
good  target  and  enables  the  enemy  to  locate  them  easily.  Th^  best 
place  is  usually  some  distance  in  advance  of  the  true  crest  and  at  a 
point  from  which  all  of  the  ground  towards  the  enemy  can  be  cov- 
ered by  fire.  This  place  is  known  as  the  "military  crest."  Have 
the  men  then  mark  this  line  with  their  bayonets  or  preferably  with 
sticks  or  pfegs;  this  will  be  the  trace  of  your  work,  and  you  will  find 
that,  with  rare  exceptions,  this  line  will  not  be  straight,  but  will 
follow  the  contour  of  the  ground.  The  line  having  been  marked, 
commence  work  on  the  trenches,  and  be  careful  to  see  that  the 
men  follow  the  line  of  stakes. 

Sometimes  it  will  be  impossible  to  so  locate  your  line  that  all 
dead  space  will  be  covered  without  advancing  your  line  too  far  to 
the  front  and  thus  having  weak  angles  in  it.  In  this  case  it  will  be 
necessary  to  have  the  dead  spaces  covered  by  some  flank  section  of 
the  line,  and  the  troops  occupying  them  will  be  instructed  to  care- 
fully observe  these  dead  spaces  and  cover  them  with  fire  when  nee- 


154  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

essary.  Machine  guns,  carefully  concealed,  are  specially  valuable 
in  this  respect. 

Usually  infantry  trenches  are  laid  out  in  company  lengths. 
Remember  that,  except  in  permanent  fortification,  infantry  plans 
and  constructs  the  trenches  that  it  is  to  occupy. 

With  the  intrenching  tools  carried  by  the  infantry  soldier  troops 
can  qujickly  throw  up  a  low  parapet  about  3  feet  thick  that  will 
furnish  corisiderable  cover  against  rifle  fire,  but  scarcely  any  against 
shrapnel  fire.  This  form  of  trench  is  frequently  of  great  value  to^ 
the  attack  that  is  temporarily  unable  to  continue  its  advance. 

The  best  form  of  trench  is  a  deep  narrow  standing  trench,  with 
parapet  about  1  foot  high  and  about  5  feet  thick.  This  trench 
futTiisl^s  excellent  cover  against  artillery  an  d  rifle  fire,  and  should 
be  used  as  much  as  possible. 

Trenches  should  always  be  concealed  by  placing  sod,  grass, 
brufeh,  or  weeds  on  top  of  the  parapet  to  make  them  look  as  much 
as  possible  like  the  surrounding  ground.  Don't  neglect  this  very 
simple  precaution. 

Intrenchments  enable  a  commander  to  hold  a  position  with  the 
least  number  of  men  and  to  prolong  his  line  or  increase  his  reserve . 
They  are  constructed  with  a  view  to  giving  cover  which  will  di- 
minish losses,  but  they  must  not  be  so  built  or  placed  as  to  interfere 
with  the  free  use  of  the  rifle.     Fire  effect  is  the  first  consideration , 

An  excellent  form  of  trench,  and  one  much  used  by  the  Spanish 
troops  in  our  late  war,  was  a  deep  narrow  trench  without  any 
parapet.  In  this  case  the  earth  excavated  from  the  trench  must 
be  carried  away  from  the  trench  and  scattered,  preferably  to  the 
rear.     This  trench,  of  course,  requires  more  time  to  construct. 

Trenches  should  be  made  as  comfortable  as  time  permits, 
special  attention  being  paid  to  drainage. 

Returns  or  pockets  should  be  constructed  for  the  rears,  first-aid 
stations,  ammunition,  rations,  etc. 

When  trenches  are  constructed  for  the  supports  in  rear,  it  will 
be  necessary  to  construct  trenches  from  them  to  the  firing-trench, 
so  that  the  supports  can  reinforce  the  firing-line  without  exposing 
themselves.     These  are  caUed  "communicating  trenches."     Theses 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  155 

trenches  should  be  constructed  in  a  zigzag  or  obUque  form  to  escape 
b^ng  enfiladed  by  the  enemy's  fire  directed  at  the  firing- trench. 

Dummy  trenches  are  frequently  of  value  to  draw  the  enemy's 
fire  and  attention  and  thus  protect  the  true  trench. 

Officers  must  remember  that  the  trace  and  profile  of  trenches 
are  simple  matters  compared  with  their  correct  location  and  use. 
Effect  of  Weapons. 

The  rifle  and  machine  gun  shoot  a  bullet  whose  penetration  in 
earth  varies,  according  to  the  arm,  the  distance,  and  the  nature  of 
the  soil,  from  24  to  40  inches;  this  last  penetration  hardly  applies 
except  to  clay  at  very  short  ranges;  32  inches  can  be  considered  as 
the  normal  maximum. 

Shrapnel  from  field  guns  fired  with  a  time-fuse  has  no  effect 
upon  intrenchments  which  have  a  sufficient  thickness  to  resist  a 
rifle  bullet.  It  can  only  have  effect  upon  the  defenders  when  the 
latter  are  firing.  It  is  powerless  when  the  men  are  resting  behind  . 
the  parapet,  either  seated  or  lying  down  with  their  backs  to  the  mass 
or  protected  by  it  under  the  slope  of  about  1  on  4.  It  is  usual,  in 
indicating  the  slope  of  intrenchments,  to  use  this  method — that  is , 
1  on  4,  6  on  1,  etc.,  meaning  a  vertical  elevation  of  1  foot  on  a  hori- 
zontal base  of  4,  or  a  vertical  elevation  of  6  on  a  horizontal  base  of 
1,  etc.,  thus: 


^ 


The  same  shell  fired  with  a  percussion  fuse  penetrates  rather 
deeply  into  the  earth  of  a  recently  constructed  parapet  when  the 
projectile  falls  upon  the  exterior  slope.  Upon  bursting  it  may  form 
craters  as  large  as  60  inches  in  diameter  and  20  inches  in  depth. 
But  when  the  projectile  falls  upon  the  superior  slope,  it  cuts  out  a 
furrow  of  not  more  than  6  or  8  inches  in  depth  at  the  most,  and 
carries  awky  but  little  earth;  in  other  words,  it  ricochets.  Such 
shells  fired  against  men  placed  upon  the  banquette  of  an  intrench- 


156  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

ment  produce  but  little  effect.  At  2,000  yards  it  can  hardly  be 
hoped  to  get  more  than  one  man  wounded  for  each  shell,  even  with 
a  perfectly  regulated  fire.  If  the  men  are  seated  or  lying  down  with 
their  backs  to  the  parapet,  the  result  is  practically  nothing.  That 
is  one  of  the  reasons  why  you  cannot  shoot  an  enemy  out  of  a  posi- 
tion; that  is  also  why  you  have  to  launch  your  infantry  attack 
against  the  trenches  to  make  the  enemy  man  the  parapet  so  as  to 
give  you  an  opportunity  to  hammer  him  with  your  artillery. 

Good  troops  fear  artillery  fire  very  little,  if  they  are  in  proper 
formation.  They  say;  "It  makes  a  hell  of  a  noise  and  scares 
recruits."  But  may  the  Lord  help  you  if  they  catch  you  in  column 
or  in  any  compact  formation.  The  burial  squad  will  be  very, 
very  busy. 

You  can  see  from  the  above  discussion  that  your  trenches  must 
be  narrow  and  deep,  with  a  low,  gradual-sloping  parapet  to  make 
the  shells  ricochet  off  and  to  make  them  inconspicuous. 

The  lying-down  trench  offers  concealment,  but  no  cover  from 
shrapnel  fire.  It  has  been  found  by  experiment  that  a  man  prone 
offers  just  as  much  target  to  shrapnel  fire  as  one  standing.  He 
converts  his  target  into  a  horizontal  one  instead  of  a  vertical  one 
without  diminishing  it.  The  usefulness  of  the  prone  trench  is  lim- 
ited to  infantry  on  the  offensive  which  has  been  checked  and  must 
hold  out  under  the  enemy^s  fire.  In  this  case  any  form  of  cover  is 
valuable,  but  this  trench  should  be  deepened  as  soon  as  possible. 
This  may  be  done  under  fire. 

Colonel  Carl  Reichmann,  U,  S.  Army,  says  in  his  report  on  the 
Japanese-Russian  War:  "Whenever  practicable,  the  standing  trench 
was  employed,  as  being  the  best  protection  against  shrapnel  fire. 
The  kneeling  trench  was  not  employed  unless  lack  of  time  or  the 
character  of  the  ground  made  the  standing  trench  impracticable. 
The  lying-down  trench  I  never  saw." 

I  will  now  illustrate  different  forms  of  trenches,  which  you  gen- 
tlemen will  find  in  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  Field  Service 
Regulations,  and  the  book  "AppUed  Principles  of  Field  Fortifica- 
tions for  Line  Officers."  Every  officer  in  the  Guard  should  have  a 
copy  of  the  latter  book.     The  former  books  you,  of  course,  have. 

This  lecture  is  not  complete  by  any  means,  but  I  don't  want  to 
give  you  too  much  all  at  once,  or  you  won't  get  any  of  it. 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 


157 


'o6e^ai^cc^ 


Different  Forms  of  Trenches. 


158  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

LECTURE  No.  9. 
DEFENSE  OF  HOUSES  AND  LOCALITIES. 

When  on  the  defensive  with  comparatively  large  commands, 
such  as  a  regiment  or  brigade,  it  is  rarely  necessary  to  prepare  for 
attack  from  more  than  one  direction,  or,  let  us  say,  your  line  would 
be  prepared  to  receive  an  attack  over  an  arc  of  about  90  or  100  de- 
grees; This  kind  of  a  defensive  position  was  pretty  thoroughly  cov- 
ered in  Lecture  No.  7,  which  you  have  already  heard.  In  the  de- 
fense of  houses  and  localities,  however,  this  rule  would  not  hold 
good,  and  you  must  prepare  a  house,  a  farm,  a  small  village,  or  a  hill 
for  all-around  defense.  These  positions  are  usually  so  small  (com  - 
paratively)  that  they  are  easily  turned;  hence  the  necessity  for 
all-around  defense. 

An  isolated  position  of  this  nature  would  have  to  be  prepared 
for  all-around  attack,  so  some  of  the  trenches  and  emplacements 
(if  you  have  artillery  or  machine  guns)  would  be  required  to  face 
to  the  rear,  and  care  would  have  to  be  taken  to  avoid  the  possibiUty 
of  receiving  fire  in  reverse.  Shelters  for  the  reserves  would  be  nec- 
essary in  some  central  part  of  the  position,  and  these  should  be  bomb- 
proof, if  possible  and  artillery  fire  is  expected.  In  any  case  they 
should  be  well  concealed.  Shelters  for  supplies,  ammunition,  etc., 
would  be  necessary,  and  the  important  question  of  water  supply 
must  be  carefully  considered  and  provided  for.  The  position  se- 
lected for  defense  would  not  in  such  a  case  necessarily  contain 
within  itself  the  object  to  be  defended.  It  would  hardly  ever  be 
possible  to  find  a  position  that  could  be  defended  with  a  small  force 
immediately  around  the  object,  if  the  latter  were  a  bridge,  railway 
station,  water-tank,  ford,  etc.;  it  would  usually  be  sufficient  if  the 
position  commanded  the  object  and  approaches  at  short  range. 
Sometimes  it  might  be  necessary  to  make  the  defense  in  the  form  of 
two  positions  supporting  each  other  and  both  commanding  the 
object. 

If  the  enemy  is  uncivilized  or  unprovided  with  artillery,  it  is 
evidently  unnecessary  to  emploj;*  the  elaborate  methods  necessary 
against  civiliZicd  enemies.  Protection  against  rifle  bullets  is  easily 
obtained,  and  neither  concealment  nor  overhead  cover  are  in  such 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  159 

cases  necessary.  Block-houses  and  villages,  or  strong  buildings, 
make  good  defensible  positions  in  these  cases. 

For  a  fortified  post  in  a  savage  or  semi-civilizjed  country  a 
mafterial  obstacle  is  generally  essential;  so  if  the  work  itself  does  not 
provide  one  in  the  form  of  a  wall  or  stockade,  a  strong,  independent 
one  in  the  shape  of  barbed-wire  entanglements  or  abatis  should  be 
provided.  A  clear  field  of  fire  is,  of  course,  imperative,  and  flank 
defense  should  be  provided,  dead  angles  being  inadmissible.  Every 
fort  of  this  nature  should  be  self-contained;  that  is,  it  should  con- 
tain room  for  storage  of  supplies  and  ammunition  and  should  be 
possessed  of  its  own  water  supply. 

We  will  first  take  up  the  preparation  of  houses  for  defense,  and 
later  localities.  When  selecting  a  house  for  defense,  if  there  is  any 
choice  in  the  matter,  select  one  that  is  cross-shaped,  or  at  least  has 
wings.  A  cross-shaped  house  is  valuable,  because  there  are  no 
dead  angles  anywhere;  every  part  of  the  front  is  well  covered  with 
fire.  The  doors  in  such  houses  are  usually  located  in  the  re-entrant 
angles  (between  the  arms),  and  are  easily  defended  in  consequence. 

If  it  is  not  possible  to  secure  a  house  in  the  form  of  a  cross,  the 
next  best  shape  is  one  with  wings  or  outbuildings.  These,  when 
fortified,  will  provide  for  the  defense  of  dead  angles  and  the  flanks. 

A  perfectly  square  house  is  objectionable,  because  you  have 
four  dead  angles — one  at  each  corner.  Some  provision  will  have 
to  be  made  to  cover  these  dead  angles  with  fire.  This  may  be  done 
by  constructing  sunken  block-houses  outside  of  the  building,  with  a 
communicating  trench  from  the  house  to  the  block-house. 

Houses  which  have  flat  roofs  are  preferable  to  those  having 
slanting  roofs,  because  a  parapet  can  be  constructed  around  the  flat 
roof  by  using  sand-bags  or  boxes  filled  with  earth,  etc.,  and  this  will 
give  another  tier  of  fire  and  greater  command. 

The  ideal  house  for  defense  is  one  constructed  of  adobe.  The 
^alls  will  stop  bullets,  and  shells  going  through  will  make  a  com- 
paratively small  hole. 

The  next  best  material  would  be  reinforced  concrete,  then 
stone  and  brick.  The  disadvantage  of  brick  and  stone  houses  is 
that  when  a  shell  strikes  them  it  knocks  out  stones  and  bricks, 
which  become  projectiles.     However,  they  stop  rifle  bullets. 


160  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

The  poorest  house  for  defense  is  one  built  of  wood.  It  will 
rarely  stop  high-power  bullets,  offers  no  protection  against  shrapnel 
and  shells,  and  there  is  always  the  great  danger  of  fire. 

Galvanized ^iron  roofs  are  the  best,  although  they  offer  com- 
paratively little  resistance  to  rifle  bullets  or  shrapnel,  and  none 
against  shell.  However,  when  struck  there  is  nothing  to  fall,  and 
frequently  a  percussion  shell  will  go  through  without  exploding. 

A  tile  roof  is  the  least  desirable. .  It  is  always  heavy,  the  tiles 
frequently  become  projectiles  when  struck,  and  there  is  always  the 
danger  of  the  roof  falUng  in  on  you. 

Plank  roofs  covered  with  rubberoid  or  similar  material  are 
dangerous  on  account  of  splinters. 

Shingle  roofs  are  bad  on  account  of  the  danger  of  fire,  but  there 
is  little  danger  here  from  splinters. 

An  adobe  house,  then,  with  a  galvani/ed  iron  roof,  would  be  the 
ideal  house  for  defense.  However,  you  will  have  to  make  the  best 
of  what  you  have  and  take  your  chances. 

In  preparing  a  house  for  defense,  first  remove  all  window  frames 
and  glass  to  avoid  the  danger  of  splinters,  then  sand-bag  or  blanket 
the  windows.  (To  blanket  a  window,  cut  loop-holes  in  a  blanket 
and  nail  it  over  the  window.  This  is  done  to  prevent  the  enemy 
from  seeing  what  is  going  on  inside  of  the  house  and  to  prevent  the 
enemy  from  seeing  persons  who  may  pass  the  windows.  It,  of 
course,  offers  no  protection  against  fire,  but  is  valuable  in  that  it 
conceals  you  from  the  enemy.)  Close  and  barricade  all  doors 
(leaving  one  for  entrance  and  exit)  by  stacking  up  sand-bags  behind 
them,  or  boxes  filled  with  earth,  bedding,  etc.  If  artillery  fire  is 
feared,  shear  up  all  floors  with  timbers  and  cover  them  with  3  or  4 
inches  of  earth  to  prevent  sphntering.  Provide  barrels  with  water , 
in  the  cellar  or  on  the  ground  floor  preferably,  and  if  the  house  is 
one  that  will  not  stop  bullets,  pile  sand-bags  around  the  barrels  to 
prevent  them  from  being  pierced  by  rifle  bullets  and  thus  losing 
your  water.  Provide  rations,  medical  supplies,  ammunition,  etc. 
Sand-bags  will  have  to  be  piled  around  your  reserve  ammunition 
if  there  is  danger  of  its  being  struck  by  shells  or  bullets. 

Construct  trenches  outside  of  the  building.  These  should  be 
held  first,  and  you  should  not  retreat  into  the  building  except  as  a 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  161 

last  resort.     I  would  not  place  trenches  more  than  50  yards  from 
the  quilding  or  closer  than  50  feet. 

Set  aside  a  place  in  the  building  for  a  hospital,  and  rears  should 
be  provided  outside  and  inside  of  the  building;  the  one  inside  not 
to  be  used  except  in  the  last  extremity. 

A  covered  way  or  communicating  trench  should  connect  the 
building  with  the  outside  trenches. 

If  fire  is  feared  in  the  roof,  wet  it  or  cover  it  with  blankets 
soaked  in  water. 

No  cooking  or  fires  should  be  allowed  in  the  building  during  an 
attack.  If  fires  are  going  in  the  building  when  the  attack  com- 
mences, immediately  put  them  out  with  water,  and  be  sure  that 
they  are  out. 

Every  man  of  the  garrison  should  have  a  station  to  which  he 
would  repair  in  case  of  an  alarm,  and  he  should  clearly  understand 
just  what  he  should  do  and  what  is  expected  of  him. 

An  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  should  be  placed  in 
charge  of  the  different  parts  of  the  house  and  the  detachment  which 
is  to  defend  that  part,  and  should  clfearly  understand  what  he  is  to  do . 

Always  keep  a  small  reserve,  to  be  under  the  orders  of  the 
commanding  officer  only. 

Ranges  should  be  measured  to  natural  objects  outside  of  the 
house,  so  that  you  can  keep  the  attacking  troops  under  an  effective 
fire. 

Don't  hesitate  to  sacrifice  the  command,  if  the  object  to  be 
obtained  is  worth  the  cost. 

If  time  permits  and  the  material  is  available,  obstacles  can  b  e 
constructed  in  front  of  your  trenches,  using  barbed- wire  entangle- 
ments, broken  bottles,  and,  in  fact,  any  material  that  will  delay  or 
embarrass  the  enemy's  advance. 

In  the  PhiUppines  we  made  a  most  effective  obstacle  by  placing 
a  belt  of  broken  beer-bottles  stood  on  end,  about  4  feet  wide,  in 
front  of  houses  or  trenches  which  it  was  necessary  to  defend.  This 
belt  of  broken  glass  has  stopped  many  a  charge  and  has  enabled 
many  a  small  garrison  to  resist  successfully  an  attack  that  otherwise 
would  have  been  pushed  home.  It  cuts  their  feet  all  to  pieces,  and 
troops  simply  cannot  charge  over  it. 


162  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

An  excellent  method  of  using  barbed  wire,  and  one  much  em- 
ployed by  the  Spaniards,  is  to  unreel  four  or  five  lines  of  barbed 
wire  in  the  grass,  without  fastening  them  to  stakes  or  anything; 
these  Unes  should  be  about  3  feet  apart.  In  charging  over  this 
obstacle,  some  man  is  sure  to  get  his  foot  caught  in  a  strand  of  wire ; 
this  raises  it  and,  of  course,  everyone  else  immediately  gets  hung  up 
in  it.  The  wire  must  be  concealed  in  the  grass,  so  that  it  will  not  be 
seen  until  the  troops  get  right  on  it. 

High  and  low  wire  entanglements  are,  of  course,  formidable, 
but  they  require  a  certain  amount  of  skilled  labor  and  require  con- 
siderable time  to  construct  properly. 

Planks  filled  with  spikes,  small  pits  with  a  sharp  stick  at  the 
bottom,  and  many  other  forms  of  obstacles  may  be  constructed,  but 
ordinarily  they  would  only  be  used  in  semi-permanent  fortifications, 
on  account  of  the  time,  material,  and  skilled  labor  required,  so  I 
will  not  deal  with  them  here. 

In  defending  a  village,  employ  the  same  principles  that  I  have 
enumerated  above.  You  would  prepare  several  houses  for  defense 
at  commanding  points,  barricade  the  streets,  clear  the  ground  to 
secure  a  clear  field  of  fire,  and  locate  your  supports  and  reserve  so 
that  they  can  reinforce  the  line  as  required.  Unless  the  village  is  in 
the  general  line,  you  will  have  to  prepare  it  for  all-around  defense . 
Orchards  can  be  cut  down  and  abatis  constructed  from  the  felled 
trees.  To  construct  an  abatis,  fell  the  trees,  strip  them  of  all  leaves 
and  twigs,  sharpen  the  branches,  and  place  them  towards  the  enem;y . 
The  trees  should  interlock  and  be  staked  down,  so  that  the  enemy 
cannot  pull  them  out  of  the  way  easily.  An  abatis  is  of  little  value 
unless  it  is  about  4  feet  high  and  at  least  5  feet  thick.  This  form  of 
obstacle  is  very  effective,  but  requires  considerable  time  to  construct 
properly  and  it  is  of  little  value  unless  it  is  constructed  properly. 

In  defending  localities,  employ  the  general  principles  governing 
the  location  of  trenches  and  defensive  positions,  houses  and  villages, 
as  far  as  they  may  be  applicable. 

If  you  gentlemen  care  to  study  this  subject  further,  you  may 
find  what  you  want  in  the  Manual  of  Field  Engineering,  U.  S. 
Army,  and  the  Engineer  Field  Manual,  U.  S.  Army. 

I  neglected  to  mention  that  houses  which  have  porches  or  over- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  163 

hanging  galleries  are  specially  valuable  for  defensive  purposes,  as 
these  porches  can  be  sand-bagged  and  have  loop-holes  cut  in  the 
floor  of  the  porch  or  overhanging  gallery,  which  will  enable  you  to 
cover  the  dead  space  between  windows  and  doors  with  an  effective 
fire.  Nearly  all  Spanish,  Mexican,  and  Central  American  houses 
have  these  overhanging  galleries. 


LECTURE  No.  10. 
TRAINING  FOR  BATTLE. 

Paragraph  1,  Part  I.  of  the  Infantry  Drill  Regulations  says: 
"Success  in  battle  is  the  ultimate  object  of  all  military. training; 
success  may  be  looked  for  only  when  the  training  is  intelligent  and 
thorough ." 

You  gentlemen  of  the  National  Guard  have  a  very  limited  time 
in  which  to  give  your  men  this  training.  It  is  therefore  necessary 
that  you  devote  what  little  time  you  have  to  absolute  essentials . 
Now,  what  are  the  essentials?  That  is  a  question  that  has  been 
asked  me  by  scores  of  National  Guard  officers  and  they  have  doubt- 
less asked  themselves  the  same  question  hundreds  of  times.  The 
object  of  this  lecture  is  to  try  to  assist  you  in  answering  that  dif- 
ficult question.     I  believe  that  the  essentials  are: 

Precise  close  order  drill;  not  too  much,  but  what  you  have 
must  be  snappy  and  very  exact.  You  are  wasting  your  time  unless 
it  is  snappy  and  exact.  The  object  of  close  order  drill  is  to  impart 
discipline  to  your  command.  It  was  discovered  centuries  ago  that 
this  was  the  best  method  of  disciplining  an  army. 

The  next  essential  is  a  thorough  training  in  extended  order 
drill.  This  is  not  for  disciplinary  purposes,  but  it  is  to  teach  you 
and  your  men  how  to  maneuver  on  the  battle-field.  You  must 
know  this  thoroughly;  you  must  know  it  so  well  that  it  will  become 
a  firmly  fixed  habit.  When  a  command  is  given,  there  must  be  no 
hesitation,  no  delay;  the  movement  must  be  executed  instantly. 
There  mukt  be  no  confusion;  every  man  mu3t  know  where  he  be- 
longs, where  he  is  to  go,  aiid  exactly  how  he  is  to  get  there. 

The  basis  of  this  drill  is  the  squad.  This  is  the  little  group  upon 
which  the  whole  structure  is  built.    It  follows,  therefore,  that  your 


164  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

squad  training  must  be  thorough  and  your  corporals  must  be  ef- 
ficient. If  your  squads  are  efficient,  your  company  will  be  efficient ; 
if  they  do  not  know  their  drill  well,  you  cannot  maneuver  your 
company. 

The  tendency  in  all  National  Guard  organizations  is  to  try  to 
go  too  fast.  They  slight  squad  drill  because  they  do  not  appreciate 
its  importance.  If  men  can  get  around  fairly  well  in  the  squad,  they 
are  satisfied.  Now,  gentlemen,  this  won't  do.  There  must  be  no 
''fairly  well"  about  it.     It  must  be  done  exactly  right. 

Now,  don't  expect  the  same  precision  in  extended  order  drill 
that  you  have  in  close  order  drill;  we  don't  need  it;  it  is  not  nec- 
essary; but  what  we  do  need,  and  what  you  must  insist  upon  and 
continually  strive  for,  is  that  no  man  gets  lost.  He  must  know 
where  he  belongs  at  all  times  and  under  all  circumstances.  When 
you  have  attained  that  standard,  you  are  efficient;  until  you  do,  you 
are  not. 

Remember,  there  is  no  such  thing  as  confusion  in  extended 
order  drill  where  every  man  knows  exactly  where  he  belongs, 
without  asking  some  other  man  or  stopping  to  look  around.  A 
man  may  be  a  little  late  in  getting  into  his  place,  but  if  he  knows 
where  he  belongs  and  is  getting  there  as  fast  as  he  can,  that^is  all 
right.     Controlled  disorder  ceases  to  be  disorder. 

Your  company  must  be  so  well  drilled  that,  no  matter  what 
formation  they  are  in  or  how  they  are  facing  when  the  command  "As 
skirmishers,  gviide  right,  left  or  center"  is  given,  every  man  must 
know  where  he  belongs  and  he  must  proceed  to  get  there  as  soon 
as  he  can.  It  does  not  matter  whether  you  have  the  right  or  the 
left  or  the  flanks  in  the  center,  the  command  "Guide  right,  left  or 
center**  tells  you  where  the  base  squad  is  and  you  must  deploy  on  it. 
Your  men  will  never  know  where  they  belong  in  the  company  until 
they  know  where  they  belong  in  the  scfuad.  The  corporal  com- 
mands, ''Follow  me,"  and  he  will  lead  them  where  they  should  go ; 
when  they  arrive  there,  they  will  deploy  on  him. 

The  third  essential  is  target  practice.  Now,  this  doesn't  mean 
that  every  man  must  be  an  expert  rifleman;  it  is  sufficient  if  he 
is  a  first-class  shot.  An  expert  rifleman  who  is  not  disciplined  and 
not  well  trained  in  extended  order  drill  is  of  less  value  on  the  firing- 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  165 

line  than  a  third-class  shot  who  has  discipline  and  knows  his  drill, 
and  I  will  tell  you  why.  Fire  in  battle  must  be  directed  and  con- 
trolled. If  your  expert  rifleman  is  not  disciplined,  you  will  not  be 
able  to  get  him  to  shoot  where  you  want  him  to  and  you  can't  get 
him  to  use  the  kind  of  fire  you  want.  The  mere  fact  that  he  is  an 
expert  rifleman  does  not  endow  him  with  these  qualities.  The 
fire  of  an  entire  company  of  150  men,  all  expert  riflemen,  but  all 
firing  at  a  target  that  each  man  has  selected  for  himself,  and  each 
man  using  the  fire  that  he  thinks  appropriate  to  the  occasion  is 
less  effective  than  the  concentrated,  directed,  and  controlled  fire  of 
one  platoon  of  second-class  shots.  Now,  this  sounds  pretty  strong , 
but  let  us  see.  We  have  the  enemy  i)i  front  of  us,  but  we  can  only 
see  about  fifteeh  men  of  his  line.  All  your  imdisciplined  experts 
will  shoot  at  these  men;  they  will  probably  hit  them  all  in  a  few 
rounds,  but  the  men,  although  shot,  will  continue  to  lie  in  the  same 
place,  and  your  experts  will  continue  to  shoot  more  bullets  into 
these  fifteen  dead  men.  Now,  what  are  they  accomplishing?  Ab- 
solutely nothing.  In  the  meantime  that  part  of  the  enemy's  line 
that  cannot  be  plainly  seen,  and  consequently  is  not  having  a  shot 
fired  at  it,  is  lying  along  there  doing  target  practice  shooting.  You 
want  to  direct  your  fire  where  you  think  the  enemy  probably  is, 
but  you  cannot  because  your  men  will  not  do  as  they  are  told  be- 
cause they  have  no  discipline.  Now,  if  these  men  won't  obey  you 
in  the  armory,  they  will  not  do  it  on  the  firing-line. 

Now,  let  us  see  about  extended  order  drill:  After  much  effort, 
you  have  gotten  your  undrilled,  undisciplined  men  on  the  line,  and 
the  enemy  launches  an  attack  against  your  flank.  What  are  you 
going  to  do?  You  can't  maneuver,  because  your  men  are  not  well 
drilled.  I  will  tell  you  what  you  will  do :  You  will  all  ''beat  it."  Now, 
if  you  have  third-class  shots  who  are  disciplined  and  know  their 
drill,  you  will  be  100  per  cent  better  off  than  you  would  be  with  this 
bunch  of  experts  who  can't  drill  and  will  not  do  what  they  are  told . 
If  you  doubt  this,  assume  yourself  in  action  with  a  civilian  rifle  club . 
Now,  don't  misunderstand  me;  I  am  not  decrying  the  value  of 
musketry  training,  but  you  must  have  discipline  and  drill  in  order 
to  make  the  best  use  of  it  on  the  battle-field.  These  three  essen- 
tials go  together;  your  company  is  not  efficient  until  you  are  well 


166  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

trained  in  all  three,  but  don't  neglect  any  one  for  the  others.  You 
must  divide  your  time  between  all  three,  and  not  devote  too  much 
attention  to  any  one  because  it  is  your  hobby. 

Now,  I  have  enumerated  what  I  believe  to  be  three  essentials 
in  training  for  battle  for  the  National  Guard.  In  the  regular  Service 
we  have  more  than  three,  but  I  don't  believe  that  you  gentlemen 
have  the  time  to  devote  to  anything  more  than  the  three  enumer- 
ated above.  If  you  make  good  in  these,  you  will  learn  the  rest  in 
campaign  in  a  short  time  by  association  with  regular  troops;  but  if 
you  are  not  proficient  in  these  three,  you  will  be  slaughtered  on  the 
battle-field  before  you  have  time  to  learn  them.  I  will  now  take 
them  up  in  the  order  enumerated,  and  endeavor  to  give  you  an  idea 
of  how  much  time  you  can  devote  to  each. 

First,  your  reccruit  must  have  a  thorough  and  systematic  course 
in  close  order  before  he  is  allowed  to  take  his  place  in  the  company . 
You  gain  nothing  by  placing  him  in  the  ranks  of  the  company  too 
soon  and  it  has  the  disadvantage  of  keeping  your  other  men  back, 
because  he  ^' balls  up"  the  formations,  and  you  continually  have  to 
correct  him  and  come  back  to  squad  drill  for  his  benefit.  This 
disgusts  the  other  men  and  they  lose  interest  in  drill  and  will  *'beat" 
the  next  one  if  they  can. 

After  your  men  are  proficient  in  squad  drill,  it  is  sufficient  if 
you  drill  them  for  twenty  minutes  in  close  order  drill  in  teaching 
them  company  drill.  A  close  order  company  drill  of  more  than 
twenty  minutes  is,  I  believe,  too  long.  The  men  lose  interest. 
But  make  your  drill  sharp  and  snappy,  although  short.  After  your 
men  are  proficient  in  company  close  order  drill,  ten  minutes  of  sharp 
close  order  will  be  sufficient  each  drill-night.  This  should  be  given 
first.  In  the  regular  Service  we  give  this  drill  first  and  last,  but  you 
gentlemen  cannot  spare  that  last  ten  minutes;  you  have  too  many 
other  things  to  learn. 

Now,  don't  waste  time  on  Butts'  Manual.  This  drill  is  excel- 
lent if  you  have  the  time  to  spare,  as  we  have  in  the  regular  Service, 
but  you  can't  hope  to  have  it  more  than  once  a  week,  and  given  that 
way  it  has  little  valua;.  besides,  you  can't  spare  the  time.^ 

Bayonet  exercise,  an  essential  which  belongs  to  close  order 
drill,  although  not  given  for  disciplinary  purposes,  but  to  teach  a 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  167 

man  to  fight  with  his  bayonet,  will  harden  their  muscles  sufficiently 
if  they  need  such  training. 

Now  we  come  to  extended  order  drill.  Devote  every  moment 
that  you  can  spare  from  close  order  drill  and  target  practice  to  it , 
and  that  will  be  little  enough;  but  don't  slight  the  others. 

As  to  target  practice,  if  you  can  have  men  shoot  the  gallery 
course  and  the  range  course  once  a  year,  you  have  done  all  that  can 
reasonably  be  expected  of  you.  Just  before  I  was  ordered  down 
here,  I  was  on  duty  with  the  National  Gu^rd  of  Utah,  and  they 
had  a  scheme  for  target  practice  that  appealed  to  me  as  excellent. 
They  have  the  same  trouble  in  getting  their  men  for  target  practice 
that  you  have,  and  they  have  solved  the  problem  in  this  way :  in  their 
yearly  camp  they  devote  every  afternoon  to  range  practice.  They 
manage  somehow  to  have  their  men  shoot  the  gallery  course  in  the 
armories.  They  drilled  all  morning  in  camp  in  extended  order 
drills  and  battle  exercises  and  shot  all  afternoon.  It  was  pretty 
strenuous,  but  I  did  not  hear  a  kick  from  anyone.  The  reiult  was 
satisfactory,  and  was  much  better  than  having  the  men  lie  around 
in  their  tents. 

Now  I  am  going  to  take  up  fire  control,  fire  direction,  and 
fire  distribution.  Fire  control  requires  discipline;  without  control, 
you  can't  direct  it;  if  you  can't  direct  it,  you  can't  distribute  it;  if 
you  can't  distribute  it,  your  fire  will  not  be  effective  and  you  will 
never  attain  fire  superiority;  if  you  can't  secure  fire  superiority, 
you  will  never  be  able  to  advance  in  the  attack  or  stop  the  enemy' s 
attack  in  the  defense. 

Now,  what  is  fire  control?  Fire  control  implies  a  perfect  com- 
mand over  your  firiiig-l^n^.  You  must  be  able  to  commence  firing, 
cease  firing,  use  clip  or  volley  fire,  without  the  slightest  delay  or 
confusion.  You  mtist  be  able  to  increase  or  diminish  the  rate  of 
fire  at  will.  When  you  are  able  to  do  all  these  things,  you  l^ave  fire 
control.  *  , 

Now,  what  is  fire  direction?  Fire  direction  implies  the  ability 
to  direct  the  fire  of  your  unit  upon  any  target  or  locality  that  you 
wish.  Your  men  must  be  so  well  trained  that  they  will  shoot  at 
the  object  indicated,  whether  they  can  see  any  signs  of  the  enemy 
or  not.     You  must  be  able  to  shift  your  fire  from  one  locality  to 


168  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

another  without  delay  or  confusion.  Before  you  can  accompUsh 
this  object,  you  must  be  able  to  clearly  describe  the  target  or  exact 
location  of  the  locality  at  which  you  wish  to  shoot  to  the  men  of 
your  command  without  it  being  necessary  to  point  out  the  location 
to  each  man  individually.  This  direction  must  be  so  clear  that  it 
will  be  readily  understood  by  each  man  in  your  command.  This 
necessitates  the  cultivation  of  your  descriptive  powers. 

Now,  what  is  fire  distribution?  Fire  distribution  implies  that 
the  entire  target  is  covered  with  a  well-delivered  and  directed  fire . 
This  distribution  must  be  so  complete  that  no  part  of  the  target  is 
slighted  in  the  least  degree.  It  implies  that  the  least  visible  portions 
of  the  target  are  covered  with  an  as  effective  fire  as  those  parts 
which  are  plainly  visible.  Remember  that  a  section  of  the  enemy's 
line  not  covered  with  an  effective  fire  represents  a  part  of  the  enemy's 
line  which  you  are  allowing  to  fire  with  peace-time  accuracy.  No 
line  can  withstand  a  fire  of  this  kind.  Now,  why  is  this  so?  I  will 
tell  you.  It  has  been  found  by  careful  computation  and  experiment 
that  when  a  line  are  firing  with  peace-time  accuracy,  they  make  a 
certain  per  cent  of  hits;  it  has  also  been  proven  that  when  you  open 
an  effective  fire  uipon  this  line,  their  fire  drops  off  in  accuracy  from 
one-fortieth  to  one-seventieth  (authorities  differ  a  little  bit  on  the 
proportion).  Now,  to  illustrate  this,  let  us  assume  that  the  firing- 
line  not  under  fire  is  firing  with  an  accuracy  which  gives  them  280 
hits  per  minute.  (This  is  merely  to  illustrate  the  proportion,  re- 
member.) N6w,  when  you  subject  this  line  to  an  effective  fire,  their 
hits  drop  off  from  280  to  7  or  4.  Let  us  take  the  highest  number,  7 . 
Now,  you  see  what  this  means — you  have  gained  fire  superiority, 
and  you  can  advance.  But  suppose  your  fire  is  not  distributed 
evenly  along  the  enemy's  entire  line — say,  for  the  sake  of  argument, 
that  half  of  their  line  is  not  covered  with  fire  at  all;  this  part  of  the 
line  is  shooting  with  an  accuracy  which  gives  them  280  hits.  It  is 
true  that  the  part  of  the  line  at  which  you  are  firing  is  only  making 
about  2  hits  per  minute,  being  under  the  concentrated  fire  of  your 
entire  line;  but  as  half  of  the  line  is  not  under  any  fire  at  all,  the 
average  for  the  entire  line  is  280  plus  2,  which  equals  282,  and  this 
divided  by  2  gives  you  an  average  for  the  entire  line  of  141.  Nowj 
no  troops  on  God's  green  earth  can  advance  against  any  fire  like 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  169 

that.  Now  you  can  see  why  fire  distribution  is  absolutely  essential. 
You  have  got  to  bring  the  average  for  the  entire  line  down  to  7  be- 
fore you  have  a  ghost  of  a  show. 

Now,  how  do  we  get  fire  distribution?  We  get  it  by  dividing 
the  entire  enemy's  line  into  sections  and  by  assigning  a  section  to 
each  subdivision  in  your  firing-line.  How  is  this  done?  The  colo- 
nel divides  the  target  between  his  battalions,  the  majors  divide 
their  sector  between  their  companies,  the  captains  divide  their  parts 
between  their  platoons,  and  the  platoon  commanders  divide  the 
part  assigned  to  them  between  their  squads.  It  is  very  simple, 
but  it  requires  lots  of  practice  before  you  can  do  it  well  and  before 
you  can  describe  your  section  to  your  men  so  clearly  that  there 
will  be  no  chance  of  mistakes.  Now,  it  is  not  necessary  to  have  a 
company  out  at  drill  in  order  to  practice  this.  Ypu  gentlemen 
can  do  it  whenever  you  get  out  in  open  country,  or  even  when  you 
are  passing  a  vacant  lot.  Say  to  yourself:  ''The  enemy  is  over 
there,  and  I  want  to  divide  his  line  so  that  it  will  be  covered  by 
the  fire  of  my  four  platoons;  what  sector  will  I  assign  to  the  first 
platoon?  what  to  the  second?"  and  so  on.  Practice  this  whenever 
you  get  the  chance. 

Now,  all  this  brings  up  another  question:  Before  you  can 
control  these  men  on  the  firing-line,  you  must  have  a  system  that 
will  work — ^not  one  that  will  work  here  on  the  armory  floor,  but  one 
that  will  work  under  all  conditions  on  the  firing-line.  This  system 
must  be  one  of  signals. 

Usually  you  go  out  to  drill  and  you  will  see  a  major  running  up 
and  down  the  firing-line  giving  orders  to  captains  verbally;  you 
will  see  captains  going  up  and  giving  orders  to  their  platoon  com- 
manders and  occasionally  correcting  a  private  personally;  platoon 
commanders  doing  the  same  thing.  Now,  that  won't  work  under 
battle  conditions.  A  verbal  command  cannot  be  heard  five  yards 
when  the  whole  line  is  shooting.  A  man — any  man — who  exposes 
himself  by  standing  up  or  kneeling  in  rear  of  the  firing-line  will  last 
about  five  seconds  before  he  is  killed  or  wounded.  It  is  absolutely 
impossible  to  move  back  and  forth  in  rear  of  the  firing-line  in  action . 
Now,  don't  forget  that.  That  being  the  case,  how  are  we  going  to 
control  the  firing-line?     We  have  got  to  control  it  by  signals,  and 


170  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

by  signals  alone.  You  will  fin^  these  signals  in  the  Infantry  Drill 
Regulations,  Paragraphs  41  to  47,  inclusive.  You  have  got  to  mem- 
orize them  thoroughly.     You  can't  do  anything  without  them. 

Now  let  us  see  how  this  works  out  in  action.  When  the  battal  - 
ion  is  ordered  forward  into  action,  the  major  will  call  up  his  company 
commanders  and  repeat  his  instructions  to  them,  so  that  all  will  know 
the  plan  if  he  is  killed  and  so  that  all  can  endeavor  to  carry  out  the 
plan  intelUgently;  he  assigns  certain  companies  to  the  firing-line 
and  certain  ones  to  the  support,  and  tells  each  captain  what  he  is  to 
do  and  what  is  expected  of  him;  he  divides  the  target  between  the 
companies  to  compose  the  firing-line  and  orders  them  to  move  out. 
Captains  return  to  their  companies,  explain  the  situation  to  their 
lieutenants,  and  tell  the  men  enough  so  that  they  can  help  to  carry 
out  the  plan;  divide  the  target  between  their  platoons,  give  them 
the  range  at  which  fire  is  to  be  opened,  and  start  the  attack  forward. 
Platoon  commanders  divide  the  target  between  their  squads,  open 
fire  at  the  proper  time,  and  control  the  fire.  Remember,  captains 
direct  the  fire,  but  platoon  commanders  control  it — that  is  their  job. 
Sergeants  and  corporals  assist  the  platoon  commanders  in  this 
control.  The  corporal  must  see  that  his  men  set  their  sights  prop- 
erly, fire  at  th'e  object  ordered,  and  employ  the  kind  of  fire  indi- 
cated— that  is  his  work,  and  in  order  to  accomplish  this  successfully 
he  must  be  on  the  job  every  second.  Now  you  begin  to  see  how 
important  it  is  that  you  have  efficient  squad  leaders.  Let  us  see 
just  how  this  system  works  out  on  the  firing-line: 

Platoon  commanders  are  in  rear  of  their  platoons,  captains  are 
in  rear  of  their  companies,  the  major  is  in  rear  of  the  firing-line  about 
150  yards  or  so  and  between  it  and  the  supports.  He  has  his 
sergeant-major  and  a  musician  with  him;  he  may  have  an  orderly 
or  two  also.  Remember,  the  platoon  commander  has  his  platoon 
guide  at  his  side,  the  captain  has  his  two  musicians,  and  the  first 
sergeant,  if  he  is  not  in  command  of  a  platoon.  Now,  the  major 
wants  the  fine  to  advance;  he  blows  a  blast  on  his  whistle  to  attract 
the  attention  of  the  company  musicians,  who  look  back  to  see  what 
he  wants — ^he  wants  the  line  to  advance,  so  he  signals  '*F."  The 
company  musician  repeats  back  the  signal  (remember,  all  signals 
are  always  repeated  back  when  understood),  then  turns  to  the  cap- 


COMPANY.  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  171 

tain  and  says:  "The  majpr  signals  *F\"  The  captain  blows  a 
blast  on  his  whistle  to  attract  the  attention  of  the  platoon  guides 
or  the"^  platoon  guide  of  the  platoon  to  which  he  wishes  to  give 
orders,  points  at  him,  and  gives  the  signal  for  platoon  rush.  The 
platoon  guide  repeats  back  the  signal,  and  then  tuims  to  his  platoon 
commander  and  says:  ''The  captain  signals  platoon  rush."  The 
platoon  commander  blows  a  blast  on  his  whistle  to  attract  the  at- 
tention of  his  squad  leader,  who,  upon  hearing  it,  ceases  firing  (no  t 
his  squad,  but  he  alone),  looks  back,  gets  the  signal  for  suspend 
firing  and  rush,  repeats  it  back,  causes  his  squad  to  suspend  firing 
and  be  ready  to  go  forward  at  the  platoon  commander's  command . 
When  all  is  ready,  the  platoon  commander  commands,  'ToUow  me," 
and,  running  at  top  speed,  leads  the  platoon  to  its  place  in  the  new 
line.  To  halt  the  platoon,  he  gives  the  signal  for  halting  and  then 
gives  the  signal  for  firing. 

You  see  how  simple  it  all  is.  But  Napoleon  said:  ''All  things 
in  war  are  simple,  but  the  simplest  things  are  difficult."  You  will 
find  this  to  be  very,  very  true. 

Now  you  see  why  so  much  extended  order  drill  is  so  necessary. 
You  have  got  to  know  these  things  so  well  that  they  will  become 
a  habit. 

Reinforcing  the  Firing-line. 

Now  I  am  going  to  take  up  another  very  important  matter — 
that  of  reinforcing  the  firing-line. 

Paragraph  226,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  says:  "A  rein- 
forcement of  less  than  a  platoon  has  Uttle  influence  and  will  be 
avoided  whenever  practicable." 

The  firing-line  needs  a  good  reinforcement  or  it  needs  no  rein- 
forcement. Sending  a  squad  or  two  into  the  firing-line  has^  Ht- 
tle  appreciable  effect.  Now,  why  is  this  so?  Let  us  re^dew  the 
causes  which  render  the  reinforcing  of  the  firing-line  necessary.  We 
reinforce  the  firing-fine  when  we  wish  to  increase  the  density  of  our 
fire;  we  reinforce  it  when  the  line  has  suffered  losses  which  have 
reduced  its  fire  n>aterially;  we  reinforce  it  when  the  line  has  been 
subjected  to  a  severe  fire  and  when  its  morale  has  been  impaired  in 
consequence.  It  is  not  necessary  that  the  fine  should  have  suffered 
severe  losses;  the  fact  that  they  have  been  exposed  to  a  heavy  fire 


172  COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY). 

frequently  is  enough  to  demorali^je  them,  especially  if  they  are 
''green"  troops.  A  reinforcement  joining  the  line  at  this  time  often 
will  have  a  most  beneficial  effect.  It  encourages  the  men,  and  often 
will  cause  those  on  the  line  to  recover  their  nerve  and  settle  down 
and  do  good  work.  We  reinforce  the  firing-line  when  we  want 
them  to  go  forward  and  when  it  is  difficult  to  get  the  men  to  leave 
the  ground  and  rush.  A  reinforcement  coming  up  from  the  rear 
will  often  carry  the  line  forward  with  it  to  the  new  position.  We 
reinforce  the  line  when  it  is  necessary  to  replace  losses. 

In  any  of  the  above  cases  you  will  see  how  little  effect  a  rein  - 
forcement  of  a  squad  will  have. 

Now  the  next  question  is,  "  How  should  these  men  join  the  fine?  " 
They  must  go  in  wherever  there  is  a  gap  or  an  interval  in  the  line; 
one  man  here,  four  men  there,  six  men  some  other  place — ^wherever 
there  is  an  interval.  The  firing-line  cannot  leave  exact  gaps,  in 
.which  you  can  place  an  entire  squad  or  platoon.  If  they  can  ma- 
neuver like  that,  they  are  all  right  and  don't  need  reinforcing.  Of 
course,  when  you  come  up  on  a  flank,  you  can  preserve  the  integrity 
of  your  units;  but  that  will  be  the  exception.  The  rule  is.  You  will 
go  in  wherever  there  is  an  opening. 

Paragraph  375,  Infantry  Drill  Regulations,  says:  ''When  the 
men  of  two  or  more  units  intermingle  in  the  firing-line,  all  officers 
and  men  submit  at  once  to  the  senior.'' 

Now  this  method  naturally  suggests  the  question,  "Won't  there 
be  confusion  unutterable  if  this  is  done?"  It  should  not,  and  I  will 
tell  you  why.  The  original  platoon  and  squad  divisions  were  in  the 
1  ine  before  it  was  reinforced,  were  they  not?  Well,  they  are  there  yet. 
There  has  been  nothing  to  change  them.  When  the  reinforcement 
joins  the  line,  it  goes  in  wherever  there  is  a  hole,  and  consequently 
you  reinforce  the  squads  and  platoons  that  need  it  the  most.  Now, 
the  men  joining  the  firing-line  don't  know  where  these  divisions  are, 
but  the  men  on  the  firing-line  do.  Jones  knows  that  he  is  the  left 
of  the  first  platoon,  and  Smith  knows  that  he  is  the  right  of  the  second, 
etc.  Now,  when  the  first  platoon  is  ordered  forward,  Jones  goes  with 
it;  Smith  does  not,  because  he  belongs  to  the  second.  Now  suppose 
you  have  placed  three  men  in  between  Jones  and  Smith — what  will 
they  do?     We  have  answered  that  question  in  the  21st  Infantry 


COMPANY  TRAINING  (INFANTRY).  173 

by  making  the  rule  that  men  joining  the  firing-line  always  go  for- 
ward, when  a  rush  is  ordered,  with  the  men  on  their  right.  Now, 
this  rule  will  take  the  three  men  between  Jones  and  Smith,  and  after 
that  the  third  man  on  the  left  of  Jones  knows  that  he  belongs  to 
the  first  platoon.  The  same  thing  works  in  the  squad.  You  see 
how  simple  it  is;  but  your  men  must  know  this  so  thoroughly  that 
it  will  be  a  habit. 

If  an  officer  or  non-commissioned  officer  coming  up  with  rein- 
forcements sees  that  he  is  senior  to  the  man  commanding  a  platoon, 
he  takes  charge  at  once  and  the  other  man  will  act  as  his  assistant. 

Now,  do  you  begin  to  see  why  we  officers  of  the  regular  Service 
insist  upon  so  much  drill  and  discipline?  It  is  not  for  show;  it  is 
not  because  we  officers  think  that  we  are  so  much  better  than  the 
other  fellow;  it  is  not  for  the  glory  of  having  men  salute  you  and  to 
have  the  fun  of  ordering  them  around;  it  is  simply  that  we  have 
learned  by  years  of  experience  that  you  can't  do  anything  without  it. 

If  you  are  going  to  play  this  game,  you  have  got  to  play  it  right; 
there  is  no  middle  course. 

I  intended  to  make  this  lecture  very  much  longer  than  it  is, 
but,  reading  it  over,  I  came  to  the  conclusion  that  I  had  better  quit 
right  here.  There  is  lots  more  that  I  could  tell  you,  but  if  you  get 
the  things  down  pat  that  I  have  explained  to  you  in  this  lecture,  I 
will  be  more  than  satisfied,  and  then  I  will  have  another  one  for  you. 

There  is  no  such  thing  as  learning  this  game.  The  further  on 
you  go  the  more  you  will  see  that  there  are  lots  of  things  yet  to  be 
learned. 

I  have  frequently  heard  officers  and  men  say  that  drills  are 
monotonous.  They  can  be  made  so  if  you  have  never  learned  squad 
drill  correctly  and  consequently  cannot  get  away  from  it;  but  if  you 
have  a  good  foundation,  there  is  no  limit  to  the  things  before  you. 

You  can  study  this  game  for  years  and  never  have  to  rerpad 
a  book. 

I  will  be  glad  to  answer  any  questions/ 


-.-^ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFOENIA  LIBRAEY 
BERKELEY 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 

STAMPED  BELOW 

Books  not  returned  on  time  are  subject  to  a  fine  of 
50c  per  volume  after  the  third  day  overdue,  increasing 
to  $1.00  per  volume  after  the  sixth  day.  Books  not  in 
demand  may  be  renewed  if  application  is  made  before 
expiration  of  loan  period. 


WAR  19  1918 


50w-7,'16 


^B  03969 


